Home

openSUSE 10.3 GNOME User Guide

1. Owner Names and Signatures Details Technical Details Dates KeylD EF9EA249 Created 2007 09 06 Type DSA Expires Never l Strength 1024 Actions Fingerprint Override Owner Trust Ultimate 2 2486 7739 CB7D 7105 D827 8570 843F OEB6 EF9E A249 Export Complete Key Export v Subkeys D Type Created Expires Status Stren add 843FOEB6EFSEA249 DSA 2007 09 06 Never Good 1024 3 Expire 383D4D52E4EA3F3E ElGamal 2007 09 06 Never Good 2048 x Revoke Delete p Quer Each subkey has the following information ID The identifier of the subkey Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 177 Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a subkey DSA keys can only sign ElGamal keys are used to encrypt and RSA keys are used to sign or to encrypt Created Specifies the date the key was created Expires Specifies the date the key can no longer be used Status Specifies the status of the key Strength Specifies the length in bits of the key The longer the key the more security it provides However a long key does not compensate for the use of a weak passphrase 5 Click Close 9 3 2 Editing Secure Shell Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all SSH keys 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Double click the Secure Shell key you want to view o
2. lsleee IIIA Accessing Network Resources lsleeeee eh e eae 263 263 264 264 264 265 265 266 266 266 266 267 267 268 268 271 271 272 273 274 275 276 276 279 281 281 282 283 283 284 284 Contents 11 12 B GNU Licenses B 1 GNU General Public License B 2 GNU Free Documentation License openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide About This Guide This manual introduces you to the GNOME graphical desktop environment as implemented in openSUSE 10 3 and shows you how to configure it to meet your personal needs and preferences It also introduces you to several programs and services including office programs such as OpenOffice org Web browsers file managers scanning tools and image editing tools It is intended for users who have some experience using a graphical desktop environment such as Macintosh Windows or other Linux desktops This guide contains the following sections Part I GNOME Desktop on page 15 Part II Office and Collaboration on page 115 Part III Internet on page 201 Part IV Multimedia on page 219 Part V Appendixes on page 279 Audience This guide is intended for users of the GNOME desktop Feedback We want to hear your comments and suggestions about this manual and the other documentation included with this product Please use the User Comments feature at the bottom of each page of the online documentation or
3. Filter Hardware 8 echt M Conprins Card and Yarka D cav ramwr cr Groups X phre Deivs Ji G verse Mode Fardtanre EX BS serrer sana Macelarcens hebr levees B T cad heat Saw ees Miscellaneous Revs pp Ta FF E Anteisals er mw T rgevii Tesce 87 Pos 3 Say Cergy Seer iy and Jars Sahar t telaans yraz SE bee F sem ag BysaY re Vercer Dive CZ Network Devices aa DSL e uot B veceri Niven Car e Karek dvlstrr er 6j Net VOIK Serv ces WS ES erel swere csreries ui SCS passo Ey ceteras chert E por Eraser W ooer 2 zi Tersier gert helewh See ces ore d he We cien NS Chr 2 hotcermgaztmaa 3 v Q oui Seros Seve i Windvex Dyre Yerne Novell AppArmor WS fee View In irae 7 sanerrer Eerma Vzrel Uy apam Kaan ts Seles fie Ed elie fs ercele Ace Fry le 6 Jodra rene vizi Security and Users By Corp Manage vert Mara Seeurly H YaST contains various modules you can use to adjust your system settings These modules are divided into the following categories Hardware Contains modules for configuring hardware components such as your monitor keyboard mouse printer and scanner Miscellaneous The YaST Control Center has several modules that cannot easily be classified into the other module groups The modules in this category can be used for things such as viewing log files and installing drivers from a vendor CD Network Devices Includes modules for configuring network devices such as network car
4. 3X Close Select from the following options Customizing Your Settings 85 Table 2 10 File Manager Display Options Option Description Icon Captions Sets the order of information to appear beneath icon names You can set three information types in the order that they appear Date Configures the date format List Columns To configure the columns that appear in the File Manager as well as the order in which they appear click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or Edit gt Preferences from Nautilus then click the List Columns tab Select the columns that you want to appear To change the order click Move Up or Move Down Figure 2 24 File Manager List Columns Dialog Box File Management Preferences Views Behavior Display List Columns Preview List Columns Choose the order of information to appear in the list view Name Size Type Date Modified Date Accessed Group MIME Type Octal Permissions Use Default Owner Permissions SELinux Context Ooodododoovovo8 AARAA Preview To configure how file previews appear in the File Manager and whether folders show the number of items they contain click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or Edit gt Preferences from Nautilus then click the Preview tab 86 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 25 File Manager Preview Dialog Box Fi
5. X Close c Ena To open a file displayed in the Search Results list right click the file then click Open or double click the file To open the folder that contains a file displayed in the Search Results list right click the file then click Open Folder To delete a file displayed in the Search Results list right click the file then click Move to Trash To save the results of the last search that Search for Files performed right click anywhere in the Search Results list then click Save Results As Type a name for the file that the results are saved to then click Save Disabling Quick Searches By default Search for Files tries to speed up some searches by using the Locate command locate provides a secure way to index and quickly search for files Because locate relies on a file index the Search Results list might not be up to date To disable quick searches run the following command in a terminal window gconftool 2 type bool set apps gnome search tool disable quick search 1 1 9 Moving Text Between Applications To copy text between applications select the text then move the mouse cursor to the position where you want the text copied Click the center button on the mouse or the scroll wheel to copy the text When copying information between programs you must keep the source program open and paste the text before closing it When a program closes any content from that application that is on the
6. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automat
7. Description 2 Enter the stream details in the Add new radio station dialog box then click Save The new station is added to your list 17 2 5 Listening to Podcasts Banshee lets you subscribe download and listen to your favorite Podcasts Podcasting is a form of audio blogging where users subscribe to a feed of shows and the episodes are downloaded and managed for offline listening Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 253 Subscribing to a Podcast 1 Click Music gt Subscribe to Podcast 2 Enter the URL of the podcast you want to subscribe to 3 Optional Click Advanced then specify what happens when new episodes of this podcast are available You can choose to download only the most recent episode download all episodes or decide which episodes you want to download when new episodes become available 4 Click Subscribe The new podcast is added to your list Listening to a Podcast To listen to a podcast select Podcasts in the source list then double click the podcast you want to listen to Use the options on the Tools gt Podcast menu to update a podcast subscribe to other podcasts or find new podcasts Figure 17 7 Podcasts in Banshee Using Open Source at Novell Daylight Saving Time Novell Open Audio Music Edit Playback Tools View Help K DD oo UNT Using Open Source at Novell Daylight Saving Time Subscribe to Podcast 2 Update Podcasts s 0
8. Defining Your Identity on page 140 Receiving Mail on page 140 Receiving Mail Options on page 142 Sending Mail on page 145 Account Management on page 146 Time Zone on page 146 Importing Mail Optional on page 146 Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 139 Defining Your Identity The Identity window is the first step in the assistant Here you enter some basic personal information You can define multiple identities later by clicking Edit gt Preferences then clicking Mail Accounts When the First Run Assistant starts the Welcome page is displayed 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Forward to proceed to the Identity window Type your full name in the Full Name field Type your e mail address in the E Mail Address field Optional Select if this account is your default account Optional Type a reply to address in the Reply To field Use this field if you want replies to e mails sent to a different address Optional Type your organization name in the Organization field This is the company where you work or the organization you represent when you send e mail Click Forward Receiving Mail The Receiving E mail option lets you determine where you get your e mail You need to specify the type of server you want to receive mail with If you are unsure about the type of server to choose ask your system administrator or ISP 1 Select a server type in the Server Type list The following a list
9. Select if you want to limit the number of Global Address Lists GAL 142 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide The GAL contains a list of all e mail addresses If you select this option you need to specify the maximum number of responses 4 Select if you want the password expire warning period If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should send the password expire message 5 Select if you want to automatically synchronize remote mail locally 6 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail IMAP and IMAP4rev1 Receiving Options If you select IMAP or IMAP4rev1 as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 2 Select if you want Evolution to use custom commands to connect to Evolution If you select this option specify the custom command you want Evolution to use 3 Select if you want Evolution to show only subscribed folders Subscribed folders are folders that you have chosen to receive mail from by subscribing to them 4 Select if you want Evolution to override server supplied folder namespaces By choosing this option you can rename the folders that the server provides If you select this option you need to specify the namespace to use Select if you want to apply filters to new message
10. c Various Liszt Spanish Rhapsody assical Treasures 25 C 1 21 25 Items 47 minutes 36 seconds 2 Select the CD title in the source list on the left then click mport CD in the upper right corner 17 2 4 Listening to Internet Radio You can use Banshee to listen to Internet radio stations and streaming audio The Radio view in Banshee automatically lists several common Internet radio stations maintained on banshee project org http banshee project org You can also add your own stations Listening to an Internet Radio Station on page 252 Adding a New Internet Radio Station on page 253 Listening to an Internet Radio Station To listen to Internet radio stations select Radio in the source list on the left then double click the station you want to listen to 252 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 17 6 Internet Radio Stations in Banshee WGPE WGPE The Classical Station Music Edit Playback Tools View Help WCPE Kd pel on 4 v WCPE The Classical Station Ada Station Tj e Music Library 25 Station Comment Podcasts v Ambient o Radio 22 7 Groove Salad on Soma FM A nicely chilled plate of ambient beats and grooves CEST eR gt Drone Zone on Soma FM Served best chilled safe with most medications Atmospheric textures with minimal beats DnbRadio com 24 7 Drum and Bass Jungle and Liquid Funk Clas
11. 1 Reset To Defaults 3 Close Display Preferences include the following Automatically resize the window when a new video is loaded Select this option if you want Totem Movie Player to automatically resize the window when a new video is loaded Visual Effects You can choose to show visual effects when an audio file is playing select the type of visualization you want to show and select the visualization size Color Balance Specify the level of color brightness contrast saturation and hue 18 2 3 Audio Preferences The Totem Audio Preferences dialog box lets you select the audio output type 268 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 18 4 Totem Audio Preferences Preferences Audio Output Audio output type Stereo Playing Movie Files 269 270 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Burning CDs and DVDs The GNOME desktop provides the following applications for writing data and audio CDs and DVDs Section 19 1 GNOME CD DVD Creator on page 271 Section 19 2 Brasero on page 272 19 14 GNOME CD DVD Creator You can use the Nautilus file manager to burn CDs and DVDs 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt GNOME CD DVD Creator You can also insert a blank disc and click Make Data CD or Make Audio CD 2 Copy the files you want to put on the CD or DVD into the CD DVD Creator window CD DVD Creator File Browser File Edit View Go Bookmarks Help
12. 265 18 1 6 Showing or Hiding Controls To hide the Totem Movie Player window controls click View gt Show Controls to deselect the Show Controls option To show the controls on the Totem Movie Player window right click the window then select Show Controls If the Show Controls option is selected Totem Movie Player shows the menu bar time elapsed slider seek control buttons volume slider and status bar on the window If the Show Controls option is not selected the application hides these controls and shows only the display area 18 1 7 Managing Playlists To show the playlist click View gt Sidebar then click Playlist at the top of the sidebar The Playlist dialog box is displayed You can use the Playlist dialog box to do the following To add a track or movie Click the Add button Select the file you want to add to the playlist then click OK To remove a track or movie Select the filenames from the filename list box then click Remove To save a playlist to file Click the Save button then specify a filename To move a track or movie up the playlist Select the filename from the filename list box then click the Up button To move a track or movie down the playlist Select the filename from the filename list box then click the Down button To hide the playlist click View gt Sidebar or click the Sidebar button To enable or disable repeat mode click Edit gt Repeat Mode To enable or disable shuff
13. 3 ES EJ EJ gt Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Browse Editlmage Fullscreen Slideshow gt v Favorites lo007 i amp Hidden amp People 5 Places 9 Events Name plantO1 jpg Version Original t 9 10 2007 11 42 AM Comment Size 500x750 Exposure None No Constraint Date 510f51 4 amp aE 3 Choose from the following edit functions using the toolbar below the photo or items on the Edit menu Managing Your Digital Image Collection 243 Function O Adjust Colors A AutoColor Comment Convert to Black and White B Convert to Sepia Tones iY Crop st Remove Red Eye Sharpen 244 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Description To adjust the brightness contrast and colors of a photo click the Adjust the photo colors icon to open the adjustment dialog box Change the settings you want then click OK This effect automatically adjusts color levels to make a color balanced picture It works best for pictures taken with automatic white balance Click the Automatically adjust the colors icon to access this feature You can add a description or a comment to a photo by clicking the text entry box below the photo and entering text Converts the photo to black and white Converts the photo to sepia tones Cropping an image is a great way to improve the quality of a photograph by improving how it is framed You crop a photo by selecting the part of the photo yo
14. Any time new e mail arrives in a e mail folder that folder label is displayed in bold text along with the number of new messages in that folder 4 2 3 E Mail Evolution e mail is like other e mail programs in several ways t can send and receive e mail in HTML or as plain text and makes it easy to send and receive multiple file attachments It supports multiple e mail sources including IMAP POP3 and local mbox or mh spools and files created by other e mail programs Itcan sort and organize your e mail in a wide variety of ways with folders searches and filters It lets you guard your privacy with encryption However Evolution has some important differences from other e mail programs First it s built to handle very large amounts of e mail The junk e mail message filtering and searching functions were built for speed and efficiency There s also the search folder an advanced organizational feature not found in some e mail clients If you get a lot of e mail or if you keep every message you get in case you need to refer to it later you ll find this feature especially useful Here s a quick explanation of what s happening in your main Evolution e mail window Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 149 Message List The message list displays all the e mails that you have This includes all your read and unread messages and e mail that is flagged to be deleted Preview Pane This is where your e mail is displayed
15. imagecomment imagemodel imagetag mailfrom mailfromaddr mailinglist mailto mailtoaddr speakingto title Applies to Music files Music file Document Document Address book File Music file Image file JPEG image Image file E mail E mail E mail E mail E mail Chat Document Property Name of the album Name of the artist Author of the document same as creator Creator of the document mapped to dc creator for example creator of PDF files E mail address File extension for example extension jpeg or ext mp3 Use extension or ext to search in files with no extension Genre of the music Comments and descriptions found in images that have an IPTC caption or Exif comment Model of the camera for example EOS2D F Spot and Digikam image tags and IPTC keywords Name of the sender E mail address of the sender ID of the mailing list for example dashboard hackers gnome org Name of the recipient E mail address of the recipient Speaker Title of document mapped to dc title for example the title tag of HTML files Property searches follow the rules mentioned in Section 10 2 Search Tips on page 186 You can use property searches as an OR query or as an exclusion query and phrases can be used as query For example the following line searches for all PDF or HTML documents containing the word apple whose author property contains john and whose title does not cont
16. teas 226 15 5 2 Selecting Parts of Images 0 cette 227 15 5 3 Applying and Removing Color 0 0 cece eas 228 15 5 4 Adjusting Color Levels 6 0 0 c eee ee eR dee 230 15 5 5 Undoing Mistakes ii jet cok ib et ee Dela AEE eae eid 230 15 5 6 gt Layets ia eer wees opt Ate es oa oe ee NONU RU UE REEL 230 15 5 7 Image Modes oen ke Me Mb ee eb ed eee TUS E 231 15 5 8 Special Effects ue ene ee a ee EA ee RE 231 15 6 Printing Images ze ue T ILI Re Idee 4c elu aa ee IA ee ie eo bain 231 15 7 ForMore Information isseleeee RR e 232 16 Managing Your Digital Image Collection 235 16 1 Importing Photos 22 nm Rr d RR peni be bee ela v SER 236 16 2 Downloading Pictures from Your Camera sseeeeee ees 237 16 3 Getting Photo Information lslseeee RR I 238 16 4 Managing Tags eReIHPeReESubRL4 eheT d eee ee ese ee 238 16 5 Searching and Finding Photos 239 16 6 Exporting Image Collections sa cri ie e e a RII 240 16 6 1 Generating a Web Site Gallery llseleelee s 241 16 6 2 Exporting Photos toCD e a A a II 241 16 6 3 Exporting Photos to a Folder 0 0 0 0 eee 242 16 6 4 Posting to a Flickr Picasa Web Album SmugMug or 23 Account 243 16 7 Basic Photo Editing bsta r he eaea aiae a E n 243 16 8 Sharing Photo Si nern n E E E Ia E N a 245 16 8 1 E mailing PROTOS 22i eee ira a a a hohe adsa ipe ie eei 245 16 8 2 Printing PROOSA o
17. Then safely remove the floppy disk CD or DVD when the tray automatically opens Floppy disks can also be formatted by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Floppy Formatter In the Floppy Formatter dialog select the density of the floppy disk and the file system settings Linux native ext2 which is the file system for Linux or DOS FAT to use the floppy with Windows systems 1 8 Finding Data on Your Computer or in the File System GNOME provides several ways to find data on your computer or in the file system With Beagle also called Desktop Search you can easily search your personal information space usually your home folder to find documents e mails Web history IM ITC conversations source code images music files applications and much more To locate files on your computer click Computer type your search terms in the Search field then press Enter The results are displayed in the Desktop Search dialog box Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 33 Figure 1 11 Desktop Search Dialog Box Desktop Search beagle Search View Help Eind beagle Q Find Now v Applications 2 results Cy Search QI Search Settings Q Search for data on your desktop v Images 1 result 7 beagle png PNG 1600x1200 373 9 KB v Documents 3 results about beagles odt Introducing a New Product 1 page Today beagle odt 1 page Showing all 6 matches Y
18. asp html and php files Binary mode transfers files as raw data Examples of binary files include wav jpg gif and mp3 files To change the transfer mode click FTP gt Binary or FTP gt Ascii For FTP transfers you can also click FTP gt Options click the FTP tab then select the Transfer files in ASCII mode option Transferring Data From the Internet 213 214 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Reading Newsfeeds with Liferea Liferea is a news aggregator for receiving and reading online newsfeeds It provides GNOME users a fast easy to use interface for reading Internet newsfeeds and blogs This chapter contains the following information Section 14 1 Starting Liferea on page 215 Section 14 2 Reading a Newsfeed on page 216 Section 14 3 Creating a New Subscription on page 217 Section 14 4 Updating Subscriptions on page 217 Section 14 5 For More Information on page 217 14 1 Starting Liferea To start Liferea click Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Liferea Figure 14 1 Liferea Main Screen Liferea Program Feeds Items View Search Help Y G l S gj P CjExampleFeeds 35 Q unread 35 23 Liferea Linux Feed Reader Q Flaggea Welcome to Liferea a desktop news aggregator for online news feeds The left pane contains the list of your subscriptions To add a subscription select Feeds gt New Subscription To browse the headlines of
19. i Windows are translucent while they re being moved Window Transitions L Windows wobble when they first appear Iv Windows fade away when they are closed i Windows zoom to from taskbar on minimize unminimize Translucent Windows i Use scroll wheel plus these modifiers to change window opacity CO Shit Control V Alt Super X Close Moving Windows By default windows appear transparent when you move them If you want window edges to stick snap to other windows and workspace edges when you hold down the Shift key while moving the window both the Windows wobble while they re being moved and Window edges stick to other windows when you hold down Shift options must be selected You can also choose to make windows appear distorted wobbly as you move or resize them giving the impression that the window is more fluid than rigid Window Transitions These options let you add a fade in and fade out effect to windows and menus when you open and close them Windows will also shrink smoothly onto the task bar when they are minimized and will grow smoothly back to their normal size when they are reopened Translucent Windows This option lets you use the scroll wheel to change how transparent a window appears on screen Select Use scroll wheel plus these modifiers to change window opacity then select the 74 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide button or combination of buttons you want to use Select a window hold down the b
20. 188 189 191 191 192 193 194 194 195 196 196 197 197 197 198 198 199 201 203 203 204 204 204 204 204 204 205 205 206 206 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 211 211 212 213 Contents 9 14 Reading Newsfeeds with Liferea 215 14 1 Starting Liferea conc ILAEACSBSCRIXERACXGU ae Pe ee a a a oe NES 215 14 2 Reading a Newsfeed osd 2cavee eves cee uult eevee ie tied etee Mes tede pionii si 216 14 3 Creating a New Subscription 0 0 0 eet ee 217 14 4 Updating Subscriptions 0 0 RI sa 217 14 5 For More Information zr RR x RR Y es a ee i ee Ra re eee 217 Part IV Multimedia 219 15 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 221 1oalt Graphics Formatszz zo odd dE Lnd a tad RO b RO A 221 152 Starting Ihe GIMP ie centi ehe ER t rete SR EE EE REV Ic e 221 15 2 1 Initial Gonfiguratlon c cem RAD eee ke oe aA Dun Ree eS 221 15 2 2 The Default Windows 0 ccc eens 222 15 3 Using The GIMP sich e sate aceite Eee terere ctm Ree RD a ch ee Bg Po e ced Re 223 15 3 1 Creating a Newlmage lsulllsesllsellleelsl e 223 15 3 2 Opening an Existing Image 0 I 224 15 3 3 Scanning ari Image o sey oa eed ee e em ERE RE MES 224 15 3 4 The Image Window ssssseee RII 224 15 4 Saving Images eere re wem ER eg seni Deeds pb reprehe ese Eres RE 224 15 5 Editing Images 22e pha Dk ae Rae e Mer de Sha eed ere Per 225 15 5 4 Changing the Image Size 6
21. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the GNU Licenses 285 program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any deriv
22. For example when Num Lock is off the 8 key acts as an up arrow Press Shift 8 to type the number 8 Also you can specify whether certain keyboard shortcuts are processed by the X Window System rather than by GNOME Specify the layout of the numeric keypad Most people should use the default but some keypads require a non standard layout If a third level chooser is specified you can obtain a third character from certain keys in the same way that using Shift with a key produces a different key than pressing that key without Shift For example if you add the Euro sign to the E key and set the left Windows key as the third level chooser then pressing Left Windows E produces the Euro sign Specify that one of the keyboard lights indicates when you are using an alternative keyboard layout That light no longer indicates its standard function Configure how and at what level a nonbreakable space is entered by using the Spacebar You can also click the Accessibility button to start the Keyboard accessibility preference tool See Section 2 3 1 Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Settings on page 97 for more information Configuring Typing Break Preferences Use the Typing Break tabbed page to set typing break preferences Add a brief description of a typing break openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 5 Keyboard Preferences Dialog Typing Break Page Keyboard Preferences Keyboard Layouts Layout Options
23. Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 255 Figure 17 9 Editing Multiple Songs Dialog Box Editing song 1 of 9 Metadata Details B Artist Various 3 Album Classical Treasures 25 Classical Fay Title Rossini William Tell O Enter Next J Genre NEN Track number 1 5 l Iv p 5 O Track count 0 O Year 0 3 Rating JApply common field values to all tracks ll Forward X Cancel Save Click the Details tab to view detailed information about the selected song including when a song was last played when the song was imported how long the song is and how many times the song has been played Figure 17 10 Details Dialog Box Editing Rossini William Tell Overtur o x Metadata Details Filename 01 Rossini William Tell Ove Location home jsmith M usic Various C Duration 3 02 File size 3 3 MB Play count 0 Last played Never played Imported on 2 12 2007 4 10 20 PM Bitrate 160 kbps Sample rate 44100 Hz Channels 2 X Cancel Save 17 3 2 Creating Smart Playlists You can create playlists that automatically add and remove songs based on criteria you specify For example a smart playlist can contain songs you rated as five stars but that you haven t listened to for six months Another smart playlist can contain all songs
24. Sidebar to make the sidebar appear then click Properties in the drop down list The dialog contains the title artist year and duration of movie or song video dimensions codec and framerate and the audio bit rate and codec 18 1 4 Seeking Through Movies or Songs To seek in movies or songs use any of the following methods To skip forward Click Go gt Skip Forward To skip backward Click Go gt Skip Backward To move to next movie or song Click Go gt Next Chapter Movie or click the button To move to previous movie or song Click Go gt Previous Chapter Movie or click the button 18 1 5 Changing the Zoom Factor To change the zoom factor of the display area use any of the following methods To zoom to full screen mode Click View gt Fullscreen To exit fullscreen mode click the Leave Fullscreen button or press Esc To zoom to half size 50 of the original movie or visualization Click View gt Fit Window to Movie gt Resize 1 2 To zoom to size 100 of the original movie or visualization Click View gt Fit Window to Movie gt Resize 1 1 To zoom to double size 200 of the original movie or visualization Click View gt Fit Window to Movie gt Resize 2 1 To switch between different aspect ratios click View gt Aspect Ratio The supported aspect ratios include Auto Square 4 3 TV 16 9 Widescreen 2 11 1 DVB The default aspect ratio is Auto Playing Movie Files
25. including Microsoft Exchange Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 39 40 Figure 1 14 Evolution Mail Inbox 86 unread 89 total Evolution Ele Edt View Folder Message Search Help S amp m a o New Get Mail Reply ReplytoAll Forward Print Delete junk Not Junk Cancel Cl In 96 umead Bo toti Show All Messages Search i ip CumemFolder On This Computer 269 Suble Oste CustomerCare Lowes Thank you for shopping Feb 20 11 56 AM D orans a CustomerCare Lowes Welcome to Lowes com Feb 20 11 45 AM 7 David Carlisle davidca Need Mont s email Feb 22 12 12 PM From The Evolution Team lt evolution novell com gt To Evolution Users evolutiongimovell com gt Subject Welcome to Evolution Date 14 March 2007 12 00 00 0000 06 00 MDT Search Folders Mal The Evolution Team is proud to welcome you to Evolution m a complete system for managing your communications and SP Bi Codecs personal information TCEUCR Getting Started On the left of the Evolution window is the side bar with shortcuts to all your mail folders B Memos Below that you will find buttons for your calendars contacts tasks mail and memos For a complete guide to using Evolution select Table of Contents in the Help menu or a Tasi press the F1 key i To start Evolution click Computer gt More Applications gt Office gt Evolution Mail and Calendar The first time you start Evolution it p
26. presentations with Powerpoint users as long as you save your presentations in Powerpoint format Section 3 4 1 Creating a Presentation on page 133 Section 3 4 2 Using Master Pages on page 134 3 4 1 Creating a Presentation 1 Click File gt New gt Presentation 2 Select the option to use for creating the presentation There are two ways to create a presentation Create an empty presentation Opens Impress with a blank slide Use this option to create a new presentation from scratch without any preformatted slides Create a presentation from a template Opens Impress with your choice of template Use this option to create a new presentation with a predesigned OpenOffice org template or a template you ve created or installed yourself such as your company s presentation template Impress uses styles and templates the same way other OpenOffice org modules do See Section 3 2 4 Using Templates to Format Documents on page 128 for more information about templates You can also choose to open an existing presentation 3 Select a slide design and an output medium then click Next The slide design provides a variety of backgrounds and ready made presentations or you can select Original to create your own The output medium is the form the final presentation will take such an overhead sheet paper or a screen slide show among other choices Select Preview for a thumbnail showing your choices 4 Select the type a
27. those of Change Canvas Size described in Changing the Canvas Size on page 226 Scaling an Image Select Image gt Scale Image to change the overall size of an image Select the new size by entering it in Width or Height To change the proportions of the image when scaling this distorts the image click the chain icon to the right of the fields to break the link between them When those fields are linked all values are changed proportionately when the value in one of the fields is changed Adjust the resolution with X resolution and Y resolution Interpolation is an expert option that controls the scale method When you are finished adjusting the size click Scale to scale the image Reset restores the original values Cancel stops the procedure Changing the Canvas Size Changing the canvas size is like putting a mat around an image Even if the mat is smaller the rest of the image is there but you can only see part of it If the mat is larger you see the original image with extra space around it To change the canvas size select Image gt Canvas Size In the dialog that opens enter the new size By default the width and height maintain the same proportions as the current image To change this click the chain icon After adjusting the size determine how the existing image should be positioned in comparison to the new size Use the offset values or drag the box inside the frame at the bottom When satisfied with the changes cli
28. when you want to have an identity for your job and one for your friends They take the following form 176 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Name comment e mail address 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Double click the PGP key you want to view or edit or select the key then click Key gt Properties 3 Click the Names and Signatures tab then click 4dd Name 4 Specify a name in the Full Name field You must enter at least five characters in this field 5 Specify an e mail address in the Email Address field Your e mail address is how most people will locate your key on a key server or other key provider Make sure it is correct before continuing 6 Inthe Key Comment field specify additional information that will display in the name of your new ID This information can be searched for on key servers 7 Click Close Editing OpenPGP Subkey Properties Each OpenPGP key has a single master key used only for signing Subkeys are used to encrypt and to sign as well In this way if your subkey is compromised you don t need to revoke your master key 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Double click the PGP key you want to edit or select the key then click Key gt Properties 3 Click the Details tab then click Subkeys 4 Use the button to on the left of the dialog box to add delete expire or revoke subkeys
29. 0 6 3 3 Removing a Buddy 4 6 4 Chatting scole en eee es 7 Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga 7 1 Requirements liliis 7 2 Configuring Ekiga liliis 7 3 TheEkiga User Interface 00 0 7 4 Makig aCall eese eR ez 7 5 Answering aCall 0 020002 200 ee 7 6 Using the Address Book 0000 00 ee 7 7 For More Information 00 ee eee eee 8 Accessing Network Resources 8 1 General Notes on File Sharing and Network Browsing 8 2 Accessing Network Shares l i sess 83 Sharing Folders 0 2 0 cee eee 8 3 1 Enabling Sharing on the Computer 8 3 2 Enabling Sharing for a Folder 0 0 cece tees 8 4 Managing Windows Files llle 8 5 Configuring and Accessing a Windows Network Printer 9 Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 9 1 Signing and Encryption 000 9 2 Generating a New Key Pair 00 0 9 2 1 Creating OpenPGP Keys 9 2 2 Creating Secure Shell Keys 9 3 Modifying Key Properties 000 9 3 1 Editing OpenPGP Key Properties 9 3 2 Editing Secure Shell Key Properties 9 4 Importing KeyS 0 eee BR 9 5 Exporting Keys evi aoe eee iA ei eee 9 6 Backing Up Keyrings 0 0 cee eee eee 9 Signing aKey serret oe Pete E 9 8 File Manager Integration sss sesess
30. 3 Right click the item you want to remove 4 Select Remove from Favorites The removed application no longer appears in your Favorite Applications view Recent Applications Recent Applications shows the last two applications you have started Use this view to quickly find applications you have used recently Recent Documents Click the Documents tab to display the last several documents you have opened Use this view to quickly locate the documents you worked on most recently Click More Documents to open the File Browser Recent Places Click the P aces tab to display the last several places you have opened Use this view to quickly locate the places you worked on most recently Click More Places to open the File Browser 1 4 3 System System provides shortcuts to several system applications Table 1 3 System Shortcuts Application Description Help Opens the Help Center which provides online documentation for your system Control Center Allows you to customize and configure your system For more information see Chapter 2 Customizing Your Settings on page 55 Install Software Opens the Software Installer which guides you through the process of installing new software Lock Screen Locks your system so that nobody can access it while you are away Enter your password to unlock the system Log Out Opens the Log Out dialog where you can log out or switch users Shutdown Opens the Shutdown dialog where you can shut down
31. 32 Airix DRM Mister Superstar Antichrist Superstar 5 04 ooo DRM All Apologies In Utero 3 50 oo Speak to Me Breathe Dark Side of the Moon 3 57 On the Run Dark Side of the Moon 3 35 Love Is Blindness Achtung Baby 4 23 13 Items 1 hour 3 minutes 31 seconds B To view or change device properties right click your device then select Source Properties From there you can view various pieces of information If you have an iPod you can update the owner s name 17 4 2 Adding Music to Your Digital Audio Player To add tracks to your player simply drag the tracks you want from your Music Library to your device Banshee transparently supports transcoding of your songs for any device You can have your music library in any number of formats including but not limited to FLAC Ogg Vorbis MP3 and AAC and it is transparently transcoded before it is sent to your digital audio player To remove tracks select your device in the list of sources right click the song you want to delete then click Remove Song s 17 4 3 Copying Music on Your Digital Audio Player to Banshee Banshee supports importing music from your digital audio player to your music library Simply drag and drop the songs from your digital audio player to your Music Library and they are copied automatically You can also import all of the music on your digital audio player by right clicking your player in the source list and selecting Import Playing and
32. 6 Printing From Firefox on page 208 Section 12 7 For More Information on page 209 12 1 Navigating Web Sites Firefox has much the same look and feel as other browsers It is shown in The Firefox Browser Window on page 203 The navigation toolbar includes Forward and Back buttons and a location bar for a Web address Bookmarks are also available for quick access For more information about the various Firefox features use the Help menu Figure 12 1 The Firefox Browser Window openSUSE org Mozilla Firefox Eile Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help B e B http www opensuse org openSUSE Getting Started Latest Headlines A Discover it Create it en English z ovell Inc All Rights Reserve NOVell Browsing with Firefox 203 12 1 1 Tabbed Browsing If you often use more than one Web page at a time tabbed browsing might make it easier to switch among them Load Web sites in separate tabs within one window To open a new tab select File gt New Tab This opens an empty tab in the Firefox window Alternatively right click a link and select Open link in new tab Right click the tab itself to access more tab options You can create a new tab reload one or all existing tabs or close them You can also change the sequence of the tabs by dragging and dropping them on a requested position 12 1 2 Using the Sidebar Use the left side of your browser window for vi
33. 9 8 1 Encrypting Files From Nautilus 9 8 2 Signing Files From Nautilus 9 8 3 Decrypting Files From Nautilus 9 8 4 Verifying Signatures From Nautilus 9 9 Encryption Preferences 00 000 9 9 1 Encryption Settings 9 9 2 Passphrase Cache 00 9 9 3 Key Servers riete eb eee 9 9 4 Key Sharing 00 c ee eee eee eee 8 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 159 159 160 160 160 161 161 161 163 163 163 164 165 166 166 168 169 169 170 170 170 170 171 172 10 Searching with Beagle 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 Using Beagle Search Tips Performing a Property Search 0 0 0 eect eee Setting Search Preferences 1 0 0 0 cette ees Indexing Other Directories 0 2 tenes Preventing Files and Directories from Being Indexed lisse elles 11 Taking Notes with Tomboy 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 Creating Notes Searching All Notes Linking Notes Accessing Your Notes ses eis sie ecet acy ut Run REM ea oe ace Meee eee MARIS Formatting Text in Notes 0 2 eet eee 11 5 1 Using Bulleted Lists 5 eere eI ee eG eee wa od Exporting Notes to HTML ssseeeeeee mI he Deleting Notes Printing Notes Configuring Tomboy Preferences 0000c cece e ee 11 9 1 Editing Preferences senec aa a vere bala sat
34. Archive Manager does not extract the specified file to the destination folder This option is only available if the Overwrite existing files option is selected This option is available only if the archive type supports encryption Currently only zip and arj archives support encryption If the archive contains encrypted files enter the required password in the Password field to decrypt the specified files during the extraction process The required password is the encryption password that was specified when the archive was created Displays the contents of the destination folder in a file manager window after the extraction of the specified files is completed If all of the files in the archive are protected by a password and you have not specified the password Archive Manager displays an error dialog If some but not all of the files in the archive are protected by a password and you have not specified the password Archive Manager does not display an error dialog However Archive Manager extracts only the unprotected files to the new archive To extract an archived file in a file manager window without opening Archive Manager right click the file then select Extract Here Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 49 50 The Extract operation extracts a copy of the specified files from the archive The extracted files have the same permissions and modification date as the original files that were added to the archiv
35. Banshee amp OpenOffice org Wri Music Player Word Processor Status SM F Spot mg Nautilus m Hard Drive _ YY Photo Browser File Browser 60G Free 63G Total M Network Wired More Applications Using ethernet ethQ Click the icon to open the YaST Network Settings module You can use this module to configure your network setup method or edit your network card configuration 1 6 2 Accessing Network Shares Other network devices like workstations and servers can be set up to share some or all of their resources Typically files and folders are marked to let remote users access them These are called network shares If your system is configured to access network shares you can use Nautilus File Manager to access them To access network shares double click your Home directory icon on the desktop then click Network Servers in the left pane The view pane displays the network shares that you can access Double click the network resource that you want to access You might be required to authenticate to the resource by providing a username and password Figure 1 10 Network File Browser Network File Browser Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Help S A a Back Reload Home Computer Search Novell Services Places v x N a Er Search z Novell Services Windows Network jsmith Desktop LFile System e Network Servers Audio Disc To access NFS shares double click the UNZX Network
36. Charged Figure 1 16 GNOME Power Manager Notification When Laptop Primary Battery is Fully Charged Battery Charged Your battery is now fully charged You can disable this notification by changing the GConf key apps gnome power manager notify fully charged Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 41 42 You receive a repeat notification only if your battery percentage charge drops below 95 and then is again fully charged This prevents some machines from showing unwanted repeat notifications if the battery is incorrectly reporting the charged status Power Low When the battery is low you receive the following notification You should consider switching to AC power as soon as possible Figure 1 17 GNOME Power Manager Notification When Battery Power is Low Power Critically Low x You have approximately 3 minutes of remaining battery life 2 Plug in your AC Adapter to avoid losing data Power Critical When the computer has run out of power it shows this notification explaining what action is required You can change the critical low action by using the Preferences tool see Section 1 15 3 Modifying Power Management Preferences on page 44 for more information Figure 1 18 GNOME Power Manager Notification When the System Power is Critically Low Power Critically Low x The battery is below the critical level EN and this computer will power off when the battery becomes completely empty Su
37. Click Finish Sharing a Directory If directory sharing is enabled on your computer use the following steps to configure a directory to be shared 1 Open the File Manager and browse to the directory you want to share 2 Right click the directory you want to share then click Sharing Options 32 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide A Folder Sharing Share this folder Share name Documents C Allow other people to write in this folder Comment X Cancel B Create Share 3 Select the Share this folder check box then type the name you want to use for this share 4 If you want other users to be able to copy files to your shared directory select the Allow other people to write in this folder check box 5 Optional Type a comment if desired 6 Click Create Share 1 7 Accessing Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs To access floppy disks CDs or DVDs insert the medium into the appropriate drive For many types of removable media a File Manager window pops up automatically when the media is inserted or attached to the computer If File Manager does not open double click the icon for that drive to view the contents WARNING Do not simply remove disks from the drive after using them Floppy disks CDs and DVDs must always be unmounted from the system first Close all File Manager sessions still accessing the medium then right click the icon for the medium and select Eject from the menu
38. Editor J General Disable command line Panel Disable printing Epiphany Web Browser GNOME Screensaver Disable print setup Disable save to disk openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Disable command line Prevents the user from accessing the terminal or specifying a command line to be executed This options also disables access to the panel s Run Application dialog box Disable printing Prevents the user from printing This option disables access to the Print dialogs boxes in all applications Disable print setup Prevents the user from modifying print settings This option disables access to the Print Setup dialog boxes in all applications Disable save to disk Prevents the user from saving files to disk This option disables access to the Save as dialog boxes in all applications Panel Use the options in the Panel category to lock down the panel disable the panel applets you specify and disable the force quit lock screen and log out options Figure 2 27 Panel Lockdown Editor Settings Lockdown Editor General C Lock down the panels Panel C Disable force quit Epiphany Web Browser li GNOME Screensaver Disable lock screen Disable log out Disabled Applets Battery Charge Monitor OAFIID GNOME E i4 Brightness Applet OAFIID GNOME Brighti CD Player Deprecated OAFIID GNOME Character Palette OAFIID GNOME_Charp Clock OAFIID GNOME_ClockApplet Command Li
39. Grayscale and Indexed RGB is a normal color mode and is the best mode for editing most images Grayscale is used for black and white images Indexed limits the colors in the image to a set number It is mainly used for GIF images If you need an indexed image it is normally best to edit the image in RGB then convert to indexed before saving If you save to a format that requires an indexed image The GIMP offers to index the image when saving 15 5 8 Special Effects The GIMP includes a wide range of filters and scripts for enhancing images adding special effects to them or making artistic manipulations They are available in Filters and Script fu Experimenting is the best way to find out what is available Xtns in the toolbox includes a number of items for creating buttons logos and other things 15 6 Printing Images To print an image select File gt Print from the image menu If your printer is configured in the system it should appear in the list In some cases it might be necessary to select an appropriate driver with Setup Printer Select the appropriate paper size with Media Size and the type in Media Type Other settings are available in the Jmage Output Settings tab Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 231 Figure 15 3 The Print Dialog Printer Settings Image Output Settings Printer name File M Printer model PostScript Level 2 Setup printer New printer Media size Le
40. Includes the dialogs to configure any proxies and to change All settings related to search engines IMPORTANT All settings listed in the table are applied g obally for the specified applications They are used as defaults for every new document you create 3 1 7 Finding Templates Templates greatly enhance the use of OpenOffice org by simplifying formatting tasks for a variety of different types of documents OpenOffice org comes with a few templates and you can find additional templates on the Internet You can also create your own Creating templates is beyond the scope of this guide but detailed instructions are found in the OpenOffice org help system and in other documents and tutorials available online In addition to templates you can find other extras and add ins online The following table lists a few of the prominent places where you can find templates and other extras Because Web sites often close or their content changes the information in the following table might not be current when you read it 124 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Table 3 3 Where to Find OpenOffice org Templates and Extras Location What You Can Find OpenOffice org documentation Web site http Templates for Calc spreadsheets CD cases seed documentation openoffice org packets fax cover sheets and more Samples Templates User template 2 x index html Worldlabel com http www worldlabel com Pages Templates for many types of labels open
41. License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section 1s held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or u
42. Managing Your Music with Banshee 259 Figure 17 12 Importing Music from Your Digital Audio Player to Banshee b a Music Library 646 Podcasts amp Eject Zen Micro Synchronize Zen Micro A Source Properties 17 4 4 Synchronizing Your Library To keep your digital audio player up to date with your Banshee Library select your player in the source list then click Synchronize in the upper right corner Banshee also synchronizes your ratings and cover art in your tracks to your iPod 17 5 Creating Audio and MP3 CDs 1 Insert a blank CD in your CD or DVD drive 2 Select the songs you want to burn then click the Write CD button in the upper right side of Banshee 3 Specify the disk options you want then click Write For example click Eject disk after writing if you want Banshee to eject your CD when the writing is completed Disc Options Session Information Disc format Audio Classical Treas Various Write Options Write speed Maximum 24x Eject disc after writing X Close Write You can track the status of the burn in the bottom left corner of Banshee A message box appears when the burn is complete 4 Click OK 17 6 Sharing Your Music You can automatically update your online Audioscrobbler http www last fm profile with the music you listen to in Banshee This lets others see what you are listening to and gives you
43. OK The photos are added to your catalog Managing Your Digital Image Collection 237 16 3 Getting Photo Information When you select an image some basic statistical information is displayed in the lower left part of the window This includes the filename its version copy or original image the date of creation size and the exposure used in creating this particular photo To view more detailed information on a photo including the EXIF data associated with the file click View gt Metadata Browser Figure 16 3 F Spot Metadata Browser Metadata Browser Manufacturer Canon Model Canon PowerShot A620 Orientation top left x Resolution 180 00 y Resolution 180 00 Resolution Unit Inch Date and Time 2006 10 23 04 22 08 YCbCr Positioning centered Compression JPEG compression x Resolution 180 00 16 4 Managing Tags Use tags to categorize any of your photos to create manageable subsets of your collection F Spot comes with default tags but you can change them and add new ones If for example you want to organize your collection of portrait shots of your loved ones do the following 1 Select the Browse mode of F Spot 2 In the left frame of the F Spot window right click the People category then select Create New Tag 2a Create a new tag called Friends 2b Create a new tag called Family The new tags appear as subcategories below the People category 3 Attach tags to images or groups o
44. Preferences Preferences General Display Audio Networking Connection speed 14 4 Kbps Modem TV Out No TV out Text Subtitles Font Sans Bold 20 Encoding Unicode UTF 8 General Preferences include the following Networking Select a network connection speed from the Connection speed drop down list box TV Out Select No TV out if you have no TV out connection this option is selected by default if you don t have a TV out interface Select TV out in fullscreen by Nvidia NTSC if you want TV Playing Movie Files 267 out connection in NTSC or select TV out in fullscreen by Nvidia PAL if you want TV out connection in PAL Text Subtitles Lets you change the font and encoding used to display subtitles 18 2 2 Display Preferences The Totem Display Preferences let you choose to automatically resize the window when a new video is loaded change the color balance and configure visual effects when an audio file is played Figure 18 3 Totem Display Preferences Preferences General Display Audio Display O Automatically resize the window when a new video is loaded Visual Effects I Show visual effects when an audio file is played Type of visualisation S Visualisation size Normal l Color Balance Brightness M Contrast ED Saturation Hue
45. Started with the GNOME Desktop 29 Figure 1 8 Edit Bookmarks Dialog Box Edit Bookmarks Bookmarks Name fm user123 user123 Location file ome user123 Que A Jump to Remove To change the order of your bookmarks click a bookmark and drag it to the desired location 1 5 5 File Manager Preferences You can change the File Manager preferences by clicking Edit gt Preferences For more information see Section 2 2 3 File Management Preferences on page 82 1 6 Accessing Network Resources This section describes how to access network resources Section 1 6 1 Connecting to Your Network on page 30 Section 1 6 2 Accessing Network Shares on page 31 Section 1 6 3 Sharing Directories From Your Computer on page 32 1 6 1 Connecting to Your Network You can connect to a network with wired and wireless connections To view your network connection status click Computer In the Status area of the main menu The Network Connections icon shows your network connection status For example in the following figure the computer is connected to a wired network using an Ethernet connection Figure 1 9 Network Connections Icon in the Main Menu openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Q Search System veiw Documents Places Help Lock Screen Favorite Applications f Logout Firefox gt Evolution Web Browser Mail and Calendar ILS
46. Table 3 1 A full description of each module is available in the online help described in Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 Table 3 1 The OpenOffice org Application Modules Module Purpose Writer Word processor application module Calc Spreadsheet application module Impress Presentation application module Base Database application module Draw Application module for drawing vector graphics Math Application module for generating mathematical formulas The appearance of the application varies depending on the desktop or window manager you use Regardless of the appearance the basic layout and functions are the same 3 1 Understanding OpenOffice org This section contains information that applies to all of the application modules in OpenOffice org Module specific information can be found in the sections relating to each module Section 3 1 1 Advantages of the Novell Edition of OpenOffice org on page 118 The OpenOffice org Office Suite 117 Section 3 1 2 Using the Standard Edition of OpenOffice org on page 119 Section 3 1 3 Compatibility with Other Office Applications on page 119 Section 3 1 4 Starting OpenOffice org on page 121 Section 3 1 5 Improving OpenOffice org Load Time on page 121 Section 3 1 6 Customizing OpenOffice org on page 121 Section 3 1 7 Finding Templates on page 124 3 1 1 Advantages of the Novell Edition of OpenOffice org op
47. The GIMP User Group offers an informative Web site at http gimp org tutorials http gimp org tutorials http www gimp org http www gimp org is the official home page of The GIMP 232 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Grokking the GIMP by Carey Bunks is an excellent book based on an older version of The GIMP Although some aspects of the program have changed it can provide excellent guidance for image manipulation An online version is available at http gimp savvy com BOOK http gimp savvy com BOOK Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 233 234 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Managing Your Digital Image Collection F Spot is a management tool for your collection of digital images tailored for the GNOME desktop It allows you to assign different tags to your images in order to categorize them and offers various image editing options For example you can remove red eye crop and adjust brightness and colors F Spot supports sixteen common file types including JPEG GIF TIFF and RAW You can import photos from your hard drive your digital camera or your iPod You can also use F Spot to create photo CDs generate a Web site gallery or export your photos to your Flickr 23 Picasa Web or SmugMug account To access F Spot click Computer gt F Spot Photo Browser The first time you run F Spot you can tell it where to find the images you want to import into your collection If you already have a collection of
48. The OpenOffice org Office Suite 123 Settings Category Description Application Load Save Includes the settings related to the opening and saving of several All file types There is a dialog for general settings and several special dialogs to define how external formats should be handled Language Covers the various settings related to languages and writing aids All Settings such as your locale and spell checker settings This is also the place to enable support for Asian languages OpenOffice org Configures the global word processing options such as the basic Writer Writer fonts and layout that Writer should use OpenOffice org Changes the settings related to the HTML authoring features of Writer Writer Web OpenOffice org OpenOffice org Changes the settings for Calc such as those related to sortlists Calc Calc and grids OpenOffice org Changes the settings that should apply to all presentations For Impress Impress example you can specify the measurement unit for the grid used to arrange elements OpenOffice org Includes the settings related to the vector drawing module such Draw Draw as the drawing scale grid properties and some print options OpenOffice org Provides a single dialog to set special print options for formulas Math Math OpenOffice org Provides dialogs to set and edit connections and registered Base Base databases Charts Defines the default colors used for newly created charts All Internet
49. To open an existing image select File gt Open or press Ctrl O In the dialog that opens select the desired file You can also press Ctrl L and type directly the URI of the desired image Then click Open to open the selected image or press Cancel to skip opening an image 15 3 3 Scanning an Image Instead of opening an existing image or creating a new one you can scan one To scan directly from The GIMP make sure that the xsane package is installed To open the scanning dialog select File gt Acquire gt XSane Device dialog Create a preview when the object to scan is smaller than the total scanning area Press Acquire preview in the Preview dialog to create a preview If you want to scan only part of the area select the desired rectangular part with the mouse In the xsane dialog select whether to scan a binary black and white without shades of gray grayscale or color image and select the required scan resolution The higher the resolution the better the quality of the scanned image is However this also results in a correspondingly larger file and the scanning process can take a very long time at higher resolutions The size of the final image both in pixels and bytes is shown in the lower part of the dialog In the xsane dialog use the sliders to set desired gamma brightness and contrast values These sliders are not available in binary mode Changes are visible in the preview immediately After all settings have been made
50. Track Artist Title amp j Radio 2 I Classical Trea 25 bum Time Rating K Various Rossini William Tell Ove assical Treasures 25 C 3 02 8 Various Strauss Blue Danube assical Treasures 25 C 2 09 cs Various Ponchielli Dance of the assical Treasures 25 C 1 59 s Various Bizet Carmen Overture assical Treasures 25 C 2 20 Various Schubert Serenade assical Treasures 25 C 3 14 Various Schubert Marche Militaire K assical Treasures 25 C 1 41 K Various J Strauss Radetsky Mar assical Treasures 25 C 2 18 K Various Chopin Nocturne assical Treasures 25 C 2 07 K ON Ou WD B Various Debussy Claire de Lune assical Treasures 25 C 1 43 Various Schubert Unfinished Sy Various Mendelssohn Violin Con Various Tchaikovsky Waltz Of FI Various Liszt Hungarian Rhapsody Various Verdi Dance Of The Prie Various Strauss Voices of Spring y assical Treasures 25 C 2 03 cs assical Treasures 25 C 1 34 cs assical Treasures 25 C 2 04 6 assical Treasures 25 C 2 01 K assical Treasures 25 C 1 30 K assical Treasures 25 C 1 18 K Various Mozart Minuet in D assical Treasures 25 C 0 22 6 Various Tchaikovsky Dance of th assical Treasures 25 C 1 36 g Various Tchaikovsky Violin Conc Classical Treasures 25 C 3 03 O iy O Ead O Be O ie O Ba O Beal O fe O ESI o ee
51. call it MyPilot or Palm5 or Roger Local Basedir This is the directory where you will store information backed up from your handheld Sync Action This is the action that will be performed when you press the HotSync button on your cradle If you set this option to Use conduit settings then you can choose different actions depending on the type of data being handled If you set it to anything else all data is handled the same way For descriptions of the synchronization actions see Conduit Settings on page 156 Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot 155 5 1 3 Adding or Editing an Entry on the Device Settings Tab The Device Settings tab controls the way your desktop system looks at your handheld as hardware To add an entry to the list click Add To edit a device select it then click Edit For each entry you can specify the following options Name This is the name used to display the device in a list Type Select the type of connection you have Serial USB IrDA infrared or Network Timeout Specifies the amount of time to try to connect to the system in seconds If there is no communication between the desktop and the handheld for this many seconds the system will stop trying Device Your handheld is represented to the computer as a special file in the dev directory The name of the file varies from system to system In many cases however it is dev pilot Other possible values are dev t
52. click RSS 2c Locate the URL for the Top Stories feed in the list provided by CNN and copy it For this example the URL is http rss cnn com rss cnn topstories rss In Liferea click Feeds gt New Subscription Paste the URL into the Source field Click OK Specify a name for the feed and the amount of time you want to pass before the feed is checked for updates then click OK oa kb o The newsfeed is added to the Feed List Any headlines are downloaded and added to the Item List 14 4 Updating Subscriptions Subscriptions are updated with the latest headlines according to the time interval you set when you created the subscription You can also update your subscriptions manually before the interval has passed You can update all of your subscriptions at once update only the subscriptions in a folder or update a specific individual subscription To update all subscriptions at once Click Feeds gt Update All To update all subscriptions within a folder Select the folder you want to update then click Feeds gt Update Selected To update a specific subscription To update a specific subscription select the subscription and click Feeds gt Update Selected 14 5 For More Information For more information about using Liferea click Help or refer to the official Liferea home page at http liferea sourceforge net http liferea sourceforge net Reading Newsfeeds with Liferea 217 218 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Mu
53. click Scan to scan the image 15 3 4 The Image Window The new opened or scanned image appears in its own window The menu bar in the top of the window provides access to all image functions Alternatively you can access the menu by right clicking the image or clicking the small arrow button in the left corner of the rulers File offers the standard file options such as Save and Print Close closes the current image Quit closes the entire application With the items in the View menu you can control the display of the image and the image window New View opens a second display window of the current image Changes made in one view are reflected in all other views of that image Alternate views are useful for magnifying a part of an image for manipulation while seeing the complete image in another view Adjust the magnification level of the current window with Zoom When Shrink Wrap is selected the image window is resized to fit the current image display exactly 15 4 Saving Images Use File gt Save to save an image you are working on Use File gt Save as to save the image with a new filename It is a good idea to save image stages under different names or make backups in another directory so you can easily restore a previous state When saving for the first time or using Save as a dialog opens in which to specify the filename and type Enter the filename in the field at the top For Save in folder select the directory in which to sa
54. customize the desktop background in the following ways Select an image for the desktop background The image is superimposed on the desktop background color The desktop background color is visible if you select a transparent image or if the image does not cover the entire desktop Select a color for the desktop background You can select a solid color or create a gradient effect with two colors A gradient effect 1s a visual effect where one color blends gradually into another color To change the desktop preferences 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Background tab 2 Set the background preferences the way that you want them The following settings can be changed Option Description Desktop Wallpaper Displays an image of your choice on the desktop 68 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Option Description Style Determines what processing steps should be applied to the selected image to adapt it optimally to the current screen resolution To specify how to display the image select one of the following options from the Style drop down list Centered Displays the image in the middle of the desktop Fill Screen Enlarges the image to cover the desktop and maintains the relative dimensions of the image Scaled Enlarges the image until the image meets the screen edges and maintains the relative dimensions of the image Tiled Repeats the image over the entire
55. edition The Navigator provides a tree view of the document structure providing improved document navigation Improved change tracking interoperability 118 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Better HTML export Improved printing of fonts Font Improvements The Novell edition of OpenOffice org includes several font enhancements including Aliased bitmap fonts are not allowed preventing poor display of fonts when a document is projected Inclusion of a set of fonts licensed from AGFA which are metrically compatible with some key default Microsoft fonts and are transparently mapped to the corresponding Microsoft fonts when documents are exported or imported Animproved OpenSymbol font which provides better support of bullets displaying attractive bullets rather than missing glyph square boxes that sometimes appear OpenClipart The Linux version of the Novell edition of OpenOffice org includes a large selection of free clipart from the OpenClipart http openclipart org project To access this clipart click Tools gt Gallery Multimedia The Novell edition includes native platform multimedia support with gstreamer on Linux Performance Improvements The Novell edition of OpenOffice org on Linux starts faster than the standard edition because of several enhancements This is true even on lower memory systems GroupWise Integration The Novell edition of OpenOffice org includes basic integration wi
56. entering text in the Find field in the Desktop Search window This option has no effect on the Search field in the main menu Display the search window by pressing Choose the keystrokes to display the Desktop Search window by specifying any combination of Ctrl Alt and a function key F12 is the default keystroke 3 Click OK 10 5 Indexing Other Directories By default Beagle indexes your home directory only If you do not want your home directory to be indexed deselect the Index my home directory option on the Indexing tab of the Search Preferences dialog box If you want to index additional folders follow these steps 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search amp Indexing 188 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide You can also click Search gt Preferences in the Desktop Search dialog box 2 Click the ndexing tab U Search Preferences Search Indexing General v Index my home directory Add any additional paths to be included for indexing Name Privacy Specify any resources such as paths patterns mail folders or type of objects you wish to exclude from indexing Type Name ap Add X Cancel oK 173 3 Click Add in the General section of the dialog box 4 Select the directory you want to index then click Open Make sure you have rights to the directories you add 5 If you want to remove a directory from the list of indexed dire
57. find an item click the arrow next to a submenu in the Menus list select the group containing that item then locate the item in the tems list openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 30 Main Menu Editor Main Menu Menus SUSE Menu Item New Menu TX Applicati 7 Applications ications isa peer dP New Item b Development e Development gt Bl cautainment Bl Edutainment New Separator gt Me Games e Games b L Graphics L Graphics gt E Hidden E Hidden b e Internet v e Internet gt Sj Multimedia Multimedia gt E Office v E Office b P Settings Modules wi p Settings Modules gt Sl System v i System gt XY Utilities v qq Utilities wa Preferences Help For example to locate the Sound Recorder application 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 Click the arrow next to the Multimedia submenu in the Menus list then select the Recording group 3 Locate Sound Recorder in the Items list Rearranging Menu Items You can change the order in which items appear in the Main menu For example you might want to place your frequently used applications at the top of the menu or at the top of their groups to make them easier to find To move an item drag it to a new location in the menu You can move the item to a new location in the same menu or drop it on an item in the Menus list to move it to a new menu or
58. from F Spot sending them as is original size or resizing them 1 Select the photos you want to e mail 2 Click File gt Send Mail Create Mail Size Tiny Large Small Extra large Medium Original Style r4 Summary Number of pictures 8 Total original size 4 84 MB Estimated new size 0 84 MB X Cancel Create mail Managing Your Digital Image Collection 245 3 Select a size for your photos 4 Click Create mail Your default e mail program opens with your photos attached to a new mail message 16 8 2 Printing Photos 1 Select the photos you want to print 2 Click File gt Print Print Photos Printer Job Paper Printer State Jobs Location Create a PDF document Generic Postscript amp hp5simx 5 Ready Settings Default zi Configure dp Add Location amp Print Preview 3 Select the print options you want such as the printer you want to use or the page orientation then click Print to print your photos 246 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee Banshee is a GNOME music management and playback application that lets you import CDs sync your music collection to an iPod or other digital audio player play music directly from an iPod or other digital audio player create playlists with songs from your library create audi
59. generally don t have times associated with them You can see a larger view of your task list by clicking Tasks in the shortcut bar 4 2 5 The Contacts Tool The Evolution contacts tool can handle all of the functions of an address book or phone book However it s easier to update Evolution than it is to change an actual paper book in part because Evolution can synchronize with Palm OS devices and use LDAP directories on a network Another advantage of the Evolution contacts tool is its integration with the rest of the application For example you can right click on an e mail address in Evolution mail to instantly create a contact entry 150 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide To use the contacts tool click Contacts in the shortcut bar By default the display shows all your contacts in alphabetical order in a minicard view You can select other views from the View menu and adjust the width of the columns by clicking and dragging the gray column dividers The largest section of the contacts display shows a list of individual contacts You can also search the contacts in the same way that you search e mail folders using the search tool on the right side of the toolbar Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 151 152 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot GNOME Pilot lets you integrate your GNOME desktop with handheld computers You can use it to set up and perform synchronization between PDAs and
60. gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Removable Drives and Media Some of the possible configuration settings include What happens when a blank CD is inserted in the CD drive What happens when an audio CD is inserted in the drive Whether images are automatically imported from a digital camera when it is attached to the computer Whether removable storage devices are mounted when they are plugged in to the computer Whether PDAs are automatically synced when attached to the computer In general you do not need to change the settings that are already configured unless you want to change the behavior when a device is connected or if you want to connect a new device that is not yet configured If you attach a device for the first time and it behaves in an unexpected or undesired way check the Removable Drives and Media settings 2 1 10 Configuring a Scanner The Scanner configuration enables you to attach and configure a scanner or to remove an already attached scanner NOTE Scanner configuration is done in YaST2 and requires root privileges To open YaST2 and configure a scanner click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Scanner Refer to the instructions on the Scanner Configuration screen for information about the available options openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 2 1 11 Specifying Screen Resolution Settings Use this module to specify the resolution settings for your screen including Resolution and R
61. gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Theme tab The color settings for the desktop and applications are controlled by using themes You can choose from a variety of preinstalled themes Selecting a style from the list overview applies it automatically Customize opens another dialog where you can customize the style of single desktop elements like window content window borders pointers and icons Making changes and leaving the dialog by clicking Close switches the theme to Custom Theme Click Save As to save your modified theme under a custom name The Internet and other sources provide many additional themes for GNOME you can install as tar gz files Creating a Custom Theme on page 67 Installing a New Theme on page 68 Deleting a Theme on page 68 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Creating a Custom Theme The themes that are listed in the Theme Preferences tool are different combinations of controls options window frame options and icon options You can create a custom theme that uses different combinations of options 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Theme tab 2 Select a theme from the list of themes then click Customize The following settings can be customized Controls The controls setting for a theme determines the visual appearance of windows panels and applets It also determines the visual appearance of the GNOME compliant interf
62. gt OpenOffice org Writer This opens Writer To open a different module click File gt New from the newly opened Writer document then choose the module you want to open Click Computer gt More Applications gt Office then click the name of the OpenOffice org module you want to start Some OpenOffice org modules can be found in other sections of the More Applications window For example the Writer Web module is listed under nternet and the Draw module is under Graphics Ina terminal window enter oof fice The OpenOffice org window opens Click File gt New then choose the module you want to open If any OpenOffice org application is open you can open any of the other applications by clicking File gt New gt Name of Application 3 1 5 Improving OpenOffice org Load Time To speed up the load time of OpenOffice org by preloading the application at system startup 1 Click Tools gt Options gt Memory 2 Select Enable systray Quickstarter The next time you restart your system OpenOffice org preloads When you open an OpenOffice org application module it opens faster 3 1 6 Customizing OpenOffice org You can customize OpenOffice org to best suit your needs and working style Toolbars menus and keyboard shortcuts can all be reconfigured to help you more quickly access the features you use the most You can also assign macros to application events if you want specific actions to occur when those events take plac
63. have a thumbtack icon that look like this 9 Notes that are not pinned to the panel menu have thumbtack icons that look like this 11 5 Formatting Text in Notes You can use the Text button on the Tomboy toolbar to format text within your notes The Text button displays a drop down menu with the following options Undo Allows you to cancel previous changes made to your note during the current session To undo your last change by using the keyboard press Ctrl Z Redo Allows you to put back changes that were removed using the Undo feature To redo your last change using the keyboard press Shift Ctrl Z 194 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Bold To make text within your note bold select the text you want to modify then select the Bold option from the Text drop down menu You can also press Ctrl B after selecting text Italic To make text within your note italic select the text you want to modify then select the Italic option from the Text drop down menu You can also press Ctrl I after selecting text Strikeout Puts a line through the selected text Select the text you want then select the Strikeout option from the Text drop down menu You can also press Ctrl S after selecting text Highlight Puts a yellow background around the selected text Select the text you want then select the Highlight option from the Text drop down menu You can also press Ctrl H after selecting text Fixed Width The fixed width styl
64. images stored on your hard drive enter the path to the directory and optionally include subfolders F Spot imports these images into its database Figure 16 1 F Spot Main Window File Edit View Find Tags Help z EJ gt Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Edit Image Fullscreen Slideshow Q9 Favorites bor 8 Hidden a People 5 9 m Events E 8 17 2007 8 17 2007 m 8 17 2007 Name nature mall jpg Version Original al D Date 8 17 2007 f 2 38 PM Size 75x100 z xposure None y J Exposure Nane 8 17007 8 17007 8 17007 8 17007 ly 17 Photos 1 selected Thumbnails of your images are displayed in the right part of the window and detailed information for a selected image is displayed in a sidebar to the left By default your photos are displayed in reverse chronological order so your newest photos are always at the top You can sort your photos in chronological order or reverse alphabetical order by clicking View gt Reverse Order A menu bar at the top of the window allows you to access the main menus A toolbar below the menu bar offers the following options Managing Your Digital Image Collection 235 Table 16 1 F Spot Toolbar Icon Description Rotate Left or Right Use this shortcut to change an image s orientation Browse The Browse mode allows you to view and search your entire collection or tagged subsets of it You can also use the time line to search im
65. indent and line spacing Then click a starting point in the image A small dialog opens in which to enter your text Enter single or multiple lines of text then click Close The text tool creates text on a special layer To work with the image after adding text read Layers on page 230 When the text layer is active it is possible to modify the text by clicking in the image to reopen the entry dialog Change the settings by modifying the tool options Retouching Images with the Clone Tool The clone tool is ideal for retouching images It enables you to paint in an image by using information from another part of the image If desired it can instead take information from a pattern When retouching it is usually a good idea to use a small brush with soft edges In this way the modifications can blend better with the original image To select the source point in the image press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the desired source point Then paint with the tool as usual When you move the cursor while painting the source point marked by a cross moves as well If the A ignment is set to Non Aligned the default setting the source resets to the original when you release the left mouse button Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 229 15 5 4 Adjusting Color Levels Images often need a little adjusting to get ideal print or display results In many programs designed for inexperienced users the brightness and contrast levels are mod
66. information as well as their employees privacy 9 2 Generating a New Key Pair To exchange encrypted messages with other users you must first generate your own key pair One part of it the public key is distributed to your communication partners who can than use it to encrypt the files or e mail messages they send The other part of the key pair the private key is used to decrypt the encrypted contents IMPORTANT The public key is intended for the public and should be distributed to all your communication partners However only you should have access to the private key Do not grant other users access to this data Section 9 2 1 Creating OpenPGP Keys on page 174 Section 9 2 2 Creating Secure Shell Keys on page 175 9 2 1 Creating OpenPGP Keys OpenPGP is a non proprietary protocol for encrypting e mail with the use of public key cryptography based on PGP It defines standard formats for encrypted messages signatures private keys and certificates for exchanging public keys 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Key gt Create New Key 3 Select PGP Key then click Continue 4 Specify your full name e mail address and any additional information 5 Optional Click Advanced key options to specify the following advanced options for the key Encryption Type Specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your keys DSA ElGamal is the recommen
67. manual or other work in any medium that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License Such a notice grants a world wide royalty free license unlimited in duration to use that work under the conditions stated herein The Document below refers to any such manual or work Any member of the public is a licensee and is addressed as you You accept the license if you copy modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it either copied verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document s overall subject or to related matters and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject Thus if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters or of legal commercial philosophical ethical or political position regarding them The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated as being those of Invariant Sections in the notice that sa
68. or Audio File by URI Location 04 18 4 3 Playing a DVD VCD or CD lsseslssesls rn 18 1 4 Seeking Through Movies orSongs isle tees 18 1 5 Changing the Zoom Factor 0 cect eh 18 1 6 Showing or Hiding Controls 0 0 0 eee 18 1 7 Managing Playlists o mairei cette eee 18 1 8 Choosing Subtitles iren er teens 18 1 9 Taking Screen Shots roce aduerre idiye cukuri etre e Modifying Totem Movie Player Preferences ille 18 2 1 General Preferences s ee up RR P Ru UR Rr RR 18 2 2 Display Preferences ur AV Rer LXV bens INC TAXE Eun 18 2 3 Audio Preferences 227 5 fess LE ERAI hi EE SE RET 19 Burning CDs and DVDs 19 1 19 2 GNOME CD DVD Creator 0 0 0 teens Brasero yx 23 Scot Phe ee GN ap eed ee ep RM he Se ee a ek oa is 19 2 1 Creating a Data CD or DVD 0 ee 19 2 2 Creating an Audio CD or DVD osuessaan naana aana 19 2 3 CopyingaCDorDVD 0 RR 19 2 4 Burning an Existing CD DVD Image to Disc 0 esee 19 25 Erasinga CD or DVD o ecri gerta eia a a a e E EA aE E Part V Appendixes A Moving from Windows to Linux A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 Starting Applications from the Main Menu 0 0 0 0 000 I Managing Files ueLeLeLeuhel4 i leebrlestsbeter qqpsrbtlvnre ebenvWeperu Using the Command Line lseseeeee RR eee Customizing Your Desktop lssseeseeeeee e ee ae Switching between Applications
69. or a partial filename with wildcards in the field provided Use an asterisk to indicate a sequence of characters Use a question mark to indicate a single character The search is case sensitive Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 35 Option Date modified less than Description Searches for files that were modified within the period specified in days Date modified more than Searches for files that were modified before the period specified in days Size at least Searches for files that are equal to or larger than the size specified in kilobytes Size at most Searches for files that are smaller than or equal to the size specified in kilobytes File is empty Searches for empty files Owned by user Searches for files that are owned by the user specified Type the name of the user in the text box provided Owned by group Searches for files that are owned by the group specified Type the name of the group in the text box provided Owner is unrecognized Searches for files that are owned by a user or group that is unknown to the system Name does not contain Searches for filenames that do not contain the string that you enter Type a full filename or a partial filename with wildcards in the field provided Use an asterisk to indicate a sequence of characters Use a question mark to indicate a single character The search is case sensitive Name match
70. proceed as follows Click Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Ekiga Softphone Open Edit gt Accounts then click Add Type an Account Name kh OND Select an appropriate Protocol depending on what type of account you use Normally you would select SZP here oa Type a Registrar User and Password according to the data provided by your provider 6 Click OK to activate the account The status of your account displayed in the Ekiga main window changes to Registered 7 3 The Ekiga User Interface All functions of Ekiga are available via the menu bar Shortcuts to the most important functions are provided by means of a toolbar to the left and by special key combinations Figure 7 1 Ekiga User Interface Call Edit View Tools Help E aso e me Standby Registered accounts 2 1 2 alc 3 def 4 ghi 5 ikl 6 mno 7 pars 8 tuy 9 WXyz HU CU FN Dialpad Audio Video Statistics The user interface has different modes To switch between views use View gt View Mode and View gt Control Panel or select the view mode icon on the left side of the GUI and the different tabs at the bottom The Full View is shown in Figure 7 1 All icons in the toolbar provide a tool tip that is activated by the mouse pointer hovering over the icon 164 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide At the bottom of the user interface several tabs provide the functionality for Dialpad Audi
71. the generic name you want to give the item then click Close The old generic name is replaced by the new one in the menu Adding New Items to the Main Menu You can add a new item to the Main menu This is especially helpful when you install an application but it is also useful if you have other applications that do not currently appear on the menu You can also add a directory a link or another type of item to the menu To add an application to the Main menu 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 In the Menus list click the arrow next to the menu containing the group where you want to add the application then select the group The contents of that group appear in the tems list Click New Item Type a name and generic name for the item Click Browse and browse to the item Select the item oo fF o Click the Type list then select the type of item For example if you are adding a directory click the list and select Directory If you are adding an application leave the default item type Application as is 8 Optional To assign an icon to the new item click No Icon then select an icon for the item If you do not select an icon the item appears in the menu without an icon 9 Click Close After the item 1s added to the menu you can move it to the place where you want it to appear in the menu as described in Rearranging Menu Items on page 93 2 2 6 Improving Access for th
72. the session is marked idle GNOME Power Manager starts its own system timer When the timeout set in GNOME Power Manager Preferences is reached and the CPU load is idle then the idle action is performed such as turning off the screen suspending or hibernating the computer To make this clearer the sliders in GNOME Power Manager Preferences are set to start at the value of the session timeout 1 minute because GNOME Power Manager Preferences cannot logically trigger before the session is marked as idle If you adjust the value of the session idle timeout in Screensaver Preferences the start time of the sliders in GNOME Power Manager Preferences change accordingly For more information see Section 2 2 7 Configuring the Screen Saver on page 96 1 16 Creating Displaying and Decompressing Archives You can use the Archive Manager application also known as File Roller to create view modify or unpack an archive An archive is a file that acts as a container for other files An archive can contain many files folders and subfolders usually in compressed form The Archive Manager application supports common formats such as zip tar gz tar bz2 1zh and rar You can use Archive Manager to create open and extract a compressed non archive file To start Archive Manager click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt File Roller If you have already compressed a file double click the filename in the Nautilus file manager
73. trust value or one fully trusted signature 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Select the key you want to sign from the Trusted Keys or Other Collected Keys tabs 3 Click Key gt Sign Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 179 4 Select how carefully the key has been checked then indicate if the signature should be local to your keyring and if your signature can be revoked By signing you indicate your trust that this key belongs to PGP Global Directory Verification Key How carefully have you checked this key amp Not at all Casually O Very Carefully Not at all means you believe the key is owned by the person who claims to own it but you could not or did not verify this to be a fact How others will see this signature C Others may not see this signature VI can revoke this signature at a later date Sign key as Signer User 123 lt 1crt4est gmail com gt S Help M Cancel S Sign 5 Click Sign 9 8 File Manager Integration Passwords and Encryption Keys integrates with the Nautilus file manager You can encrypt decrypt sign and verify files as well as import public keys from the file manager window without launching Passwords and Encryption Keys Section 9 8 1 Encrypting Files From Nautilus on page 180 Section 9 8 2 Signing Files From Nautilus on page 180 Section 9 8 3
74. used This option provides an extra level of security Password Type the password that the remote user must enter to view or control your session 3 Click Close 2 4 8 Configuring Beagle Search Settings Beagle is the search engine used on the GNOME desktop By default Beagle is configured to start automatically and index your home directory If you want to change these settings specify the number of results displayed after a search or change the Beagle privacy settings click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Search Settings 106 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide For more information see Setting Search Preferences on page 188 and Preventing Files and Directories from Being Indexed on page 189 2 4 9 Managing Sessions This module lets you manage your sessions session occurs between the time that you log in to the desktop environment and the time that you log out You can set session preferences and specify which applications to start when you begin a session You can configure sessions to save the state of applications and then restore the state when you start another session You can also use this preference tool to manage multiple sessions For example you might have a mobile session that starts applications you use most frequently when traveling a demo session that starts applications used to present a demonstration or slide show to a customer and a work session that uses a different set of applications when yo
75. user123 Local All Files Not connected Filename Size User 4 Filename Size User Po 4096 root beagle 4 096 user12 config 4 096 user12 evolution 4 096 user12 fontconfig 4 096 user12 fonts 4 096 user12 gconf 4 096 user12 m tll gt Progress gFTP 2 0 18 Copyright C 1998 2003 Brian Masney lt masneyb gftp org gt If you have any questions comments or suggestions about this program please feel free to email them to me You can always find out the latest news about gFTP from my website at http www gftp org gFTP comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details see the COPYING file This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions for details see the COPYING file Section 13 1 Using GNOME FTP on page 211 Section 13 2 Setting Up an HTTP Proxy Server on page 212 Section 13 3 ASCII vs Binary Transfers on page 213 13 1 Using GNOME FTP 1 To start GNOME FTP click Computer gt More Applications gt Internet 2 Click Remote gt Open URL gt GNOME FTP Transferring Data From the Internet 211 3 Specify a URL to connect to then enter a username and password Leave the username blank to log in as an anonymous user 4 Click Connect Upon successful connection you see a list of the files on the remote server on the right of the G
76. your GNOME desktop The gnome pilot package along with the optional conduits in evolution pilot allows you to move information between your handheld device and your GNOME desktop You must run the setup tool before synchronizing The setup tool starts the GNOME Pilot daemon gpilotd Ifit is not running you can start the daemon with the usr 1ibexec gpilotd command You can also use the GNOME Pilot applet to start the daemon Section 5 1 GNOME Pilot Configuration Tool on page 153 Section 5 2 The Pilot Applet on page 157 5 1 GNOME Pilot Configuration Tool To start the GNOME Pilot configuration tool click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt GNOME Pilot There are three tabs in the Pilot Settings tool Pilots Devices and Conduits The first time you run the GNOME Pilot tools you will be guided through the initial setup by an assistant Section 5 1 1 The GNOME Pilot Setup Assistant on page 153 Section 5 1 2 Adding or Editing a Handheld Entry on page 155 Section 5 1 3 Adding or Editing an Entry on the Device Settings Tab on page 156 Section 5 1 4 Conduit Settings on page 156 5 1 1 The GNOME Pilot Setup Assistant The setup assistant guides you through getting your handheld device ready to synchronize with your desktop system 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt GNOME Pilot Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot 153 gnome p
77. 1 4 3 SYSIOM iud e p ER CERE REN EM Ob EMDEY S E woe Sey ee ee RS ee et 1 4 4 Status ve a nens ER eIWUWOLLTe PX AE NOISE Ne d pr E wq 1 5 Managing Folders and Files with Nautilus llle 1 5 1 File Manager Navigation Shortcuts 0 0 0 e eee eee 1 5 2 Archiving Folders oere serae I e nl Peed oe bea E T3 yer IX YET 1 5 3 Creating a CD DVD ime e a a i ER DR SEX eal Sete hub seen 1 5 4 Using Bookmarks rue ree ERBOTG RR RR LARA ear na eet a ad 1 5 5 File Manager Preferences llli ses 1 6 Accessing Network Resources lseeee eet 1 6 1 Connecting to Your Network 0 0 0 te ete eae 1 6 2 Accessing Network Shares 0 0 0 cect nh 1 6 3 Sharing Directories From Your Computer llle eee 1 7 Accessing Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs 00000 cee ee 1 8 Finding Data on Your Computer or in the File System 2 002000002 eee 1 8 1 Searching Tor Files ou dU hae deaths oo ede RIRs 1 9 Moving Text Between Applications 0 0 0 0 eee 1410 Printinig luis ell nite bhedyen etal gerbe ee bla debe P LBS SN bande eh 1 10 1 Installing a Local Printer 0 es 1 10 2 Monitoring Print Jobs in GNOME 0 0 eee ee 1 11 Managing Internet Connections 0 0 0 00 teens 1 142 Exploring the Internet ire p Rd ERU EE es RENI RE NU RE x E Rx e ee 1 13 E Mail and Scheduling is eree ter gatie ideia an dari a ai E aaie daia A aii taS 1 14 Opening or Creating Documents wi
78. 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 15 Other Features Tabbed Page 3D Desktop Window Effects Desktop Cube Other Features Window Picker The Window Picker shrinks and rearranges the windows on your desktop so you can see all of them at once and then selects the one you click Activate deactivate when type Control Alt Up lx or when move the mouse to this corner Top Left gt Zoom Zoom mode lets you zoom in on part of the desktop Iv Zoom into desktop when I press L Shift C Control Alt v Super D Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 iv Zoom in and out when use the scroll wheel with O Shift Control C Alt V Super Water Effect May be very slow with some video cards IV Create ripples with the pointer when hold down O Shift Control V Alt IV Super Activate deactivate rain when type lt Shift gt F9 downpour chance of showers rome Window Picker This option lets you tile or scale the windows on your desktop so that you can see what windows you have open and select a specific one This also provides you with a snapshot of all applications open on your desktop Pressing Ctrl Alt Up arrow shrinks all windows and rearranges them on the screen so that they do not overlap Selecting a window with the mouse causes all windows to return to their original size and position with the selected window on top To change the keystrokes used to tile window
79. 14 of 30 38 by Novell Open Audio from Novell Open Audio e Music Library 112 Podcasts Podcasts 69 All 3 Podcasts e Radio 1 51 Linux Reality Main Feed All 68 69 Novell Open Audio Classical Trea 25 3 0 10 this WEEK in TECH MP3 Edition gt 5 3 Episode Podcast Date m ZENworks amp V Novell Open A 2 16 2007 1 openSUSE 10 2 gt 4 SLED10 Desic Novell Open A 2 22 2007 F1 r Using Open S Novell Open 2 8 2007 v ZENworks Lin Novell Open A 2 1 2007 V Alert GroupWi Novell Open A 2 1 2007 a TA teeth Tele o Aimat Anan A ADENANT B A gt Recommended Artists Top Tracks by Novell Top Albums by Novell LUGRadio HY 100 similarity 2 Using Open Sour gt 69 Items 23 hours 46 minutes 40 seconds 17 3 Managing Your Music Library Banshee gives you several ways to organize your music You can create playlists which allow you to put similar songs together and you can sort and rate songs You can also view a variety of information about your music collection including playback statistics when a song was last played and how many times Section 17 3 1 Organizing Your Music on page 255 254 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Section 17 3 2 Creating Smart Playlists on page 256 17 3 1 Organizing Your Music To create a new playlist click Music gt New Playlist or press Ctrl N A new playl
80. 173 Chapter 10 Searching with Beagle on page 185 Chapter 11 Taking Notes with Tomboy on page 191 Office and Collaboration 115 116 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide The OpenOffice org Office Suite OpenOffice org is a powerful open source office suite that provides tools for all types of office tasks such as writing texts working with spreadsheets or creating graphics and presentations With OpenOffice org you can use the same data across different computing platforms You can also open and edit files in other formats including Microsoft Office then save them back to this format if needed This section covers information about the Novell edition of OpenOffice org and some of the key features you should be aware of when getting started with the suite Section 3 1 Understanding OpenOffice org on page 117 Section 3 2 Word Processing with Writer on page 125 Section 3 3 Creating and Using Spreadsheets with Calc on page 131 Section 3 4 Creating and Using Presentations with Impress on page 133 Section 3 5 Creating and Using Databases with Base on page 135 Section 3 6 Creating Graphics with Draw on page 137 Section 3 7 Creating Mathematical Formulas with Math on page 137 Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 OpenOffice org consists of several application modules subprograms which are designed to interact with each other They are listed in
81. AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER AND 2 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER IN TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL THE AUTHOR INITIAL WRITER ANY CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Novell Inc has intellectual property rights relating to technology embodied in the product that is described in this document In particular and without limitation these intellectual property rights may include one or more of the U S patents listed on the Novell Legal Patents Web page http www novell com company legal patents and one or more additional patents or pending patent applications in the U S and in other countries Novell Inc 404 Wyman Street Suite 500 Waltham MA 02451 U S A www novell com Online Documentation To access the online documentation for this and other N
82. DM The login screen has the following items Login prompt Enter your username and password to log in Language menu Select a language for your session Session menu Select the desktop to run during your session If other desktops are installed they appear in the list Restart Select to restart the computer Shut Down Select to shut down the computer 1 1 1 What Is a Session A session is the period of time from when you log in to when you log out During a session you can use applications print browse the Web and so on The login screen offers several login options For example you can select the language of your session so that text that appears in the interface is presented in that language After your username and password are authenticated the Session Manager starts The Session Manager lets you save certain settings for each session It also lets you save the state of your most recent session and return to that session the next time you log in The Session Manager can save and restore the following settings Appearance and behavior settings such as fonts colors and mouse settings Applications that you were running such as a file manager or an OpenOffice org program TIP You cannot save and restore applications that Session Manager does not manage For example if you start the vi editor from the command line in a terminal window Session Manager cannot restore your editing session F
83. Decrypting Files From Nautilus on page 181 Section 9 8 4 Verifying Signatures From Nautilus on page 181 9 8 1 Encrypting Files From Nautilus 1 In Nautilus right click the files you want to encrypt 2 Select Encrypt 3 Select the people recipients you want to encrypt the file to then click OK 9 8 2 Signing Files From Nautilus 1 In Nautilus right click the files you want to sign 2 Select Sign 3 Select a signer then click OK 4 If prompted specify the passphrase of your private key then click OK 180 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 9 8 3 Decrypting Files From Nautilus To decrypt an encrypted file in Nautilus simply double click the file you want to decrypt If prompted specify the passphrase of your private key 9 8 4 Verifying Signatures From Nautilus To verify files simply double click the detached signature file Detached signature file names often havea sig extension 9 9 Encryption Preferences Section 9 9 1 Encryption Settings on page 181 Section 9 9 2 Passphrase Cache on page 182 Section 9 9 3 Key Servers on page 182 Section 9 9 4 Key Sharing on page 183 9 9 1 Encryption Settings 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Edit gt Preferences then click the Encryption Settings tab Encryption Preferences Encryption Settings Passphrase Cache Key Servers Key Sharing Defaults Defaul
84. GNOME lets you set up multiple desktops and each one can run different programs Switch between them with a single click A 6 Accessing Network Resources From your desktop you can access files and directories or certain services on remote hosts or make your own files and directories available to other users in your network openSUSE offers various different ways of accessing and creating network shared resources If the network structure and the configuration of your computer allow for it you can easily browse your network for shared resources and services with the file manager Figure A 6 GNOME Network Browsing Windows Network File Edit View Places Help Le Ls Ls blk group bob bosco Ute Ut Ute brwg1 ex2000 exch55 Lt Ut Ug gwdoc iprintdoc matrix Bimi Bimi Bimi Windows Network v 25 items To learn more about the various possibilities of accessing network resources refer to Section 1 6 Accessing Network Resources on page 30 284 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide GNU Licenses This appendix contains the following Section B 1 GNU General Public License on page 285 Section B 2 GNU Free Documentation License on page 290 B 1 GNU General Public License Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it
85. Gale 175 these elements the actual document window occupying the majority of the window that is used to display web pages although it may be empty at the First Steps 176 outset the menu bar the navigation toolbar and the personal toolbar There is Overview of G 176 also a combined status and component bar at the bottom of the window Finally to the left of the document window Mozilla provides a sidebar that contains a Tabbed Browsi 176 number of different tabs each of them giving access to a particular task Using Intelligen 177 When you right dick in the document window Mozilla opens a context menu with a number of entries Use this menu for example to add the current page to View History 78 your bookmarks Bookmark This Page or to view its source code View Page Additional Setti 178 Source To open Evince double click a PDF file in a file manger window or Web site or press AIt F2 type evince then press Enter To view a PDF file in Evince click File gt Open locate the desired PDF file then click Open Use the navigation icons at the top of the window to navigate through the document If your PDF document provides bookmarks you can access them in the left panel of the viewer 1 19 Controlling Sound YaST automatically identifies and configures the sound cards in your computer You can also use the YaST Hardware module to configure your sound card manuall
86. If you find the preview pane too small you can resize the pane enlarge the whole window or double click the message in the message list to have it open in a new window To change the size of a pane drag the divider between the two panes As with folders you can right click messages in the message list and get a menu of possible actions including moving or deleting them creating filters or search folders based on them and marking them as junk mail Most of the e mail related actions you want to perform are listed in the Actions menu in the menu bar The most frequently used ones like Reply and Forward also appear as buttons in the toolbar Most of them are also located in the right click menu and as keyboard shortcuts 4 2 4 The Calendar To begin using the calendar click Calendar in the shortcut bar By default the calendar shows today s schedule on a ruled background At the upper right there s a monthly calendar you can use to switch days Below that there s a Task list where you can keep a list of tasks separate from your calendar appointments Appointment List The appointment list displays all your scheduled appointments Month Pane The month pane is a small view of a calendar month To display additional months drag the column border to the left You can also select a range of days in the month pane to display a custom range of days in the appointment list Task List Tasks are distinct from appointments because they
87. L in Epiphany Disable bookmark editing Prevents the user from adding or editing bookmarks 90 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Disable history Disables all historical information by disabling back and forward navigation not allowing the history dialog box and hiding the most used bookmarks list Disable javascript chrome Disables JavaScript control over window chrome Disable toolbar editing Prevents the user from editing toolbars Force fullscreen mode Locks Epiphany in fullscreen mode Hide menubar Hides the menu bar by default The menu bar can still be accessed by using the F10 key Disable unsafe protocols Disables loading of content from the unsafe protocols you specify Safe protocols are HTTP and HTTPS GNOME Screensaver Use the options in the GNOME Screensaver category to lock the screen when the screen saver goes active enable or disable the log out after a delay option in the unlock dialog box and to enable or disable the switch user option in the unlock dialog box Figure 2 29 GNOME Screensaver Editor Settings Lockdown Editor General l3 M Lock on activation J Panel a O Allow log out Epiphany Web Browser E2 GNOME Screensaver a M Allow user switching Customizing Your Settings 91 92 Lock on activation Select this option to lock the screen when the screen saver goes active Allow log out Select this option to offer an option in the unlock dialog box to l
88. NOME FTP window the file list on the left side is your local computer s directory of files You can now upload and download files gFTP 2 0 18 ETP Local Remote Bookmarks Transfers Logging Tools Help V Host ison family com v Port v User lelizabe v Pass ecco FTP Ee home user123 v Local All Files _ tobiasson family com FTP Cached All Fi 4s Filename Size User Filename Size User 5 4 096 root Trash 4 096 user12 G skel 4 096 user12 C3 images 4 096 user12 C3 metacity 4 096 user12 profile 824 elizabe 3 macromedia 4 096 user12 shrc 852 elizabe nautilus 4 096 useri2 g _dolphinsurfing jt 31 686 elizabe m gt l login 256 elizabe login conf 165 elizabe mail aliases 371 elizabe mailrc 331 elizabe eececect Filename Progress v tobiasson 100 complete 00 00 00 est time remaining File 1 of 1 dolphinsui Finished gFTP 2 0 18 Copyright C 1998 2003 Brian Masney lt masneyb gftp org gt If you have any questions comments or suggestions about this program please feel free to email them to me You can always find out the latest news about gFTP from my website at http www gftp org gFTP comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details see the COPYING file This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain
89. Options If you select Novell GroupWise as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 o0 fF WwW NM 8 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages Select if you want to check for new messages in all folders Select if you want to apply filters to new messages in the Inbox on the server Select if you want to check new messages for junk content Select if you want to only check for junk messages in the Inbox folder Select if you want to automatically synchronize remote mail locally Type your Post Office Agent SOAP port in the Post Office Agent SOAP Port field If you are unsure what your Post Office Agent SOAP port is contact your system administrator Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail Microsoft Exchange Receiving Options If you select Microsoft Exchange as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 2 3 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages Specify the Global Catalog server name in the Global Catalog Server Name field The Global Catalog Server contains the user information for users If you are unsure what your Global Catalog server name is contact your system administrator
90. SE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Moving from Windows to Linux If you are coming from Microsoft Windows take a look at how familiar elements of Windows translate to openSUSE After logging in you will notice that the desktop has a familiar layout and recognizable icons many of them similar to the Windows and Macintosh desktops Figure A 1 GNOME Desktop B Corpse Bw De ar Duvet WetAccess Bb R Giesen som n Section A 1 Starting Applications from the Main Menu on page 281 Section A 2 Managing Files on page 282 Section A 3 Using the Command Line on page 283 Section A 4 Customizing Your Desktop on page 283 Section A 5 Switching between Applications on page 284 Section A 6 Accessing Network Resources on page 284 A 1 Starting Applications from the Main Menu Similar to the Start menu on Windows you can access all the programs installed on your system from the main menu To open the menu click Computer in the left corner of the panel The function oriented menu structure makes it easy to find the right application for your purpose even if you do not know the application names yet Find more information about the main menu in Section 1 4 Using the Main Menu on page 23 Moving from Windows to Linux 281 Figure A 2 Main Menu in GNOME Q Search System Documents Places Q Help E Lock Screen Favorite Applications Logout Firefox gt Evolution amp Web Brows
91. SUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Under the toolbox a dialog shows options for the currently selected tool If it is not visible open it by double clicking the tool s icon in the toolbox Layers Channels Paths Undo In the first section use the drop down box to select the image to which the tabs refer By clicking Auto you control whether the active image is chosen automatically By default Auto is enabled Layers shows the different layers in the current images and can be used to manipulate the layers Information is available in Layers on page 230 Channels shows the color channels of the image and lets you manipulate them Paths are a vector based method of selecting parts of an image They can also be used for drawing Paths shows the paths available for an image and provides access to path functions Undo shows a limited history of modifications made to the current image Its use is described in Undoing Mistakes on page 230 15 3 Using The GIMP Although The GIMP can be a bit overwhelming for new users most quickly find it easy to use once they work out a few basics Crucial basic functions are creating opening and saving images Section 15 3 1 Creating a New Image on page 223 Section 15 3 2 Opening an Existing Image on page 224 Section 15 3 3 Scanning an Image on page 224 Section 15 3 4 The Image Window on page 224 15 3 1 Creating a New Image To create a new image select File gt New or p
92. Sg 5 i m Reload Home Computer Search Novell Services Writeto Disc a JCDIDVD Creator Places v X Q Search 3 0103GS Agenda Community Agenda Elegant St EL Fax PL docx Filhaandtering DA s Meeting Level2 do yle EN Levelt docx anitized Level docx Cx File System v Network Servers Euro symbol Invoice DE Levell Minutes_20070118_ TrackChanges and standardisation EN docx EN Level2 docx more docx Level3 docx 3 Click Write to Disc 4 Modify information in the Write to Disc dialog or accept the defaults then click Write The files are burned on the disc This could take a few minutes depending on the amount of data being burned and the speed of your burner You can use the Banshee music player to burn audio and MP3 CDs as explained in Section 17 5 Creating Audio and MP3 CDs on page 260 Burning CDs and DVDs 271 19 2 Brasero Brasero is a application for the GNOME desktop that lets you burn CDs and DVDs Figure 19 1 Brasero Disc Burning Application Project Disc Help Create a new project Choose from the following options Brasero D AA SP Audio project Data project EL Create a traditional audio CD Create a data CD DVD Disc copy ro Burn image Create 1 1 copy of a CD DVD Burn an existing CD DVD image to disc Brasero includes the following features Ability to edit disc contents remove move or r
93. Texinfo input format LaTeX input format SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD and standard conforming simple HTML PostScript or PDF designed for human modification Examples of transparent image formats include PNG XCF and JPG Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors SGML or XML for which the DTD and or processing tools are not generally available and the machine generated HTML PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only The Title Page means for a printed book the title page itself plus such following pages as are needed to hold legibly the material this License requires to appear in the title page For works in GNU Licenses 291 formats which do not have any title page as such Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work s title preceding the beginning of the body of the text A section Entitled XYZ means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below such as Acknowledgements Dedications Endorsements or History To Preserve the Title of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section Entitled XYZ according to this definition The Document may include Warranty Discla
94. Touchpad to start the Touchpad module Customizing Your Settings 65 66 2 2 Look and Feel Look and Feel settings include the following Section 2 2 1 Customizing the Desktop Appearance on page 66 Section 2 2 2 Configuring Desktop Effects on page 71 Section 2 2 3 File Management Preferences on page 82 Section 2 2 4 Locking Desktop Functions on page 87 Section 2 2 5 Customizing the Main Menu on page 92 Section 2 2 6 Improving Access for the Visually Impaired on page 95 Section 2 2 7 Configuring the Screen Saver on page 96 Section 2 2 8 Customizing Window Behavior on page 96 2 2 1 Customizing the Desktop Appearance Use the Appearance module to customize the look of the desktop With this module you can change the desktop theme fonts and background as well as changing the look of menus and the main toolbar Choosing a Theme on page 66 Changing the Desktop Background on page 68 Configuring Fonts on page 69 Configuring Menus and Toolbars on page 71 Choosing a Theme A theme is a group of coordinated settings that specifies the visual appearance of a part of the desktop You can choose themes to change the appearance of the desktop Use the Theme Preferences tool to select from a list of preinstalled themes The list of available themes includes several themes for users with accessibility requirements To choose a theme click Computer gt Control Center
95. Typing Break D Lock screen to enforce typing break Hep A Accessibility X Close You can modify any of the following typing break preferences Table 2 3 Typing Break Preferences Option Description Lock Screen to Enforce Typing Break Locks the screen when you a typing break is due Work Interval Lasts Lets you specify how long you can work before a typing break occurs Break Interval Lasts Lets you specify the length of your typing breaks Allow Postponing of Breaks Lets you postpone typing breaks You can also click the Accessibility button to start the Keyboard accessibility preference tool See Section 2 3 1 Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Settings on page 97 for more information 2 1 5 Configuring a Modem If you connect to a network over a modem use this option to configure your modem The modem is configured in YaST NOTE Root privileges are required for configuring your modem 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Modem 2 Enter the root password Customizing Your Settings 61 62 YaST opens 3 Follow the instructions in YaST to configure the modem 2 1 6 Configuring the Mouse Use the Mouse Preference tool to configure your mouse for right hand use or for left hand use You can also specify the speed and sensitivity of mouse movement Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Mouse You can customize the settings for the Mouse Preference to
96. VD on page 276 1 To start Brasero click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Brasero Disc Burning Application 2 Inthe main Brasero window click Data project The New Data Disc Project dialog box opens Project Edit View Disc Help Data project i Contents of your data project Rd 3 T Brasero New data disc project gt File Browser Browse the file system To add files to Add but e items ou s in this area and c Empty 0 660 MiB in CDORW DVD CRX830E 100 MB 200MB 300MB 400 MB 500 MB 600MB 1 file selected 0 bytes 3 To add files to the project do any of the following Bi n Buser123 Places Name v Modified E A Sear fee o Recently Used De Today at 14 fm user123 Do Today at 13 Desktop do Today at 14 File System B gra Today at 14 CD RW DVD ROM Driv Dima Yesterday a amp amp Network Servers ind Today at 10 Music TodayatO9 kI gt zi 5 A fies i z Select the files you want to add in the selection pane on the right then click the Add button Drag files to the area on the left from the selection pane or from your file manager Double click the files you want to add in the selection pane Copy the files you want to add for example from your file manager then paste the files
97. Word document edit it and save it again as a Word document Most Word documents can be imported into OpenOffice org without any problem Formatting fonts and all other aspects of the document remain intact However some very complex documents such as documents containing complicated tables Word macros or unusual fonts or formatting might require some editing after being imported OpenOffice org can also save in many popular word processing formats Likewise documents created in OpenOffice org and saved as Word files can be opened in Microsoft Word without any trouble If you use OpenOffice org in an environment where you frequently share documents with Word users you should have little or no trouble exchanging document files Just open the files edit them and save them as Word files 3 2 3 Formatting with Styles OpenOffice org uses styles for applying consistent formatting to various elements in a document The following types of styles are available 126 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Table 3 4 About the Types of Styles Style What it Does Paragraph Applies standardized formatting to the various types of paragraphs in your document For example apply a paragraph style to a first level heading to set the font and font size spacing above and below the heading location of the heading and other formatting specifications Character Applies standardized formatting for types of text For example if you want emphasized text to
98. a feed select itin the feed list and the headlines will be loaded into the right pane lt p gt Liferea is now online By default the Liferea interface is divided into two sections the Feed List and the Item List The Feed List is on the left It contains a list of your subscriptions When you click a subscription the Reading Newsfeeds with Liferea 215 headlines for that subscription appear in the Item List on the right When you click a headline the contents of that feed appear in the View pane beneath the Item List Drag the borders between each pane to resize the panes for more comfortable viewing 14 2 Reading a Newsfeed Liferea comes preconfigured to receive newsfeeds from Novell Cool Solutions and Novell Technical Information To read one of these example feeds 1 To start Liferea click Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Liferea 2 In the Feed List click the subscription you want to read For example click Example Feeds gt Novell gt Novell Cool Solutions 3 Click a headline in the Item List Unread headlines appear in bold text When you click a headline the selected item opens for reading in the View pane Unlike many news aggregators Liferea lets you read news even if you are offline After headlines are fed to Liferea you can read the items whether you are online or not You must be online however to update your newsfeeds with the latest headlines Figure 14 2 Reading a Newsfeed with L
99. access to charts detailing your listening history If you join groups such as the Banshee Group http www last fm group Banshee you can also see what other people are listening to 1 In Banshee click Tools gt Audioscrobbler gt Configure 260 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Audioscrobbler Reporting Audioscrobbler Reporting Your profile page on Last fm is automatically updated whenever you listen to music It lets others see what you re listening to right now and shows charts of your listening history Join the Banshee group 2 If you have already registered with Last fm http www last fm click Enable song reporting then specify your Last fm username and password If you have not previously registered with Last fm click Create an account This opens the Last fm Web site where you can register Click Enable song reporting then specify your Last fm username and password 3 Click Close Banshee starts reporting with the next song you play After Audioscrobbler is configured use the options on the Tools gt Audioscrobbler menu to enable or disable song reporting visit your user profile Web page or visit the Web site of any Audioscrobbler groups you belong to 17 7 Configuring Banshee Preferences 1 Click Edit gt Preferences Preferences Music Library Copy files to music folder when importing Write metadata to files File System Organization Fo
100. ace items that appear on windows panels and applets such as menus icons and buttons Some of the controls setting options that are available are designed for special accessibility needs You can select an option for the controls setting in the Controls tabbed page of the Theme Details tool Colors The color settings determine the colors of various screen elements Set the colors to provide an appearance that most appeals to you Window Border The window border setting for a theme determines the appearance of the frames around windows only You can select an option for the window frame setting in the Window Border tabbed page of the Theme Details tool Icons The icon setting for a theme determines the appearance of the icons on panels and the desktop background You can select an option for the icon setting in the Icons tabbed page of the Theme Details tool Pointer You can set the appearance and size of your mouse pointer so it is appealing and easy to see with your chosen theme 3 Select the controls option that you want to use in the custom theme from the list in the Controls tab 4 Click the Colors tab then select the colors you want to use for the available interface elements 5 Click the Window Border tab then select the window frame option that you want to use in the custom theme 6 Click the cons tab then select the icons option that you want to use in the custom theme 7 Click the Pointer tab then select t
101. age 50 Section 1 18 Viewing PDF Files on page 51 Section 1 19 Controlling Sound on page 51 Section 1 20 Using the Fingerprint Reader on page 52 Section 1 21 Obtaining Software Updates on page 54 Section 1 22 For More Information on page 54 1 1 Logging In and Selecting a Desktop If more than one user account is configured on your computer usually all users must authenticate unless Auto Login is enabled for a certain user Auto login lets a user automatically log in to the desktop environment when the system starts This feature can be enabled or disabled during installation or at any time by using the YaST User Management module For more information see Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 17 18 Section 5 1 Managing User Accounts http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensusel03 startup data sec y2 userman_users html sec_y2_ userman users in the openSUSE 10 3 Start Up Guide If your computer is running in a network environment and you are not the only person using the machine you are usually prompted to enter your username and password when you start your system If you did not set up your system and your user account check with your system administrator for your username and password The program managing the login process depends on the desktop environment installed on your system For GNOME it is GDM If the KDE desktop is also installed on your system it might be K
102. ages by creation date Edit Image This mode allows you to select one image and do some basic image processing Details are available in Section 16 7 Basic Photo Editing on page 243 Fullscreen Switch to fullscreen display mode Slideshow Start a slide show 16 1 Importing Photos You can import photos from your hard drive or from your digital camera see Section 16 2 Downloading Pictures from Your Camera on page 237 for more information F Spot automatically makes copies of photos imported from your hard drive If you don t want to copy images deselect Copy files to the Photos folder on the Import dialog box or press Shift when dragging photos into F Spot Figure 16 2 Importing Images into F Spot 2 20 2007 a map d ice ET E Done Loading Attach tag i Copy files to the Photos folder i Include subfolders X Cancel 4D Import By default F Spot copies your photos to the Photos directory in your home directory You can change the directory F Spot uses by clicking Edit gt Preferences If all the photos you are importing are from a particular event or if they have some other characteristic in common you can create a tag for them so you can easily find them at a later time During the import select Attach Tag then choose the appropriate tag from the drop down menu 236 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide To import photos 1 Click File gt Import 2 Sele
103. ain the word oranges apple ext pdf OR ext html author john title oranges Searching with Beagle 187 10 4 Setting Search Preferences Use the Search Preferences dialog box to set search preferences for Beagle 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search amp Indexing You can also click Search 7 Preferences in the Desktop Search dialog box Search Preferences Search Indexing General Start search amp indexing services automatically Index data while on battery power User Interface v Automatically start searching after the user has stopped typing Display the search window by pressing Ctrl C Alt F12 X Cancel P ok 2 Choose from the following options Start search amp indexing services automatically Select this option if you want the search daemon to start automatically when you log in to your session this option is selected by default If you want to use Beagle s Search functionality the daemon must be running Index data while on battery power Select this option if you want your data to be indexed when your computer is operating on battery power This option is particularly useful if you are using openSUSE on a laptop and you want to stop indexing when your laptop is running on battery power Automatically start searching after the user has stopped typing Select this option if you want Beagle to start searching as soon as you stop
104. al File Edit View Terminal Tabs Help jgarcia linux gt J A 4 Customizing Your Desktop To change to the way your GNOME desktops looks and behaves click Computer gt Control Center Some of the settings you might want to change include the desktop background screen saver keyboard and mouse configuration sounds and file associations Figure A 5 GNOME Control Center Control Center Filter 8 Bluetooth M OSL M Graphics Card and Mo Groups Keyboard Moder D Mous ar E rodem Mouse Hardware Look and Feel Q Network Card Primers Removable Drives and Personal W sane E Screen Resolution System E Common Tasks 5 Add Printer ul Appearance I Desktop Effects WP File Management Configure Network Change Password CP Lockdown Editor Py Main Menu eg Orca Screen Reader a Add User BD screensaver TH Windows Open Administrator Settings Accessibility E Assistive Technology YE Change Password Ea T Keyring Manager Shortcuts GHB Date and Time w GStreamer Properties pE Language m Network Proses WW Power Management Preferred Applications a 2 e e Remote Desktop CX Search Settings r Sessions Sound a User Management Wh vast For more information see Chapter 2 Customizing Your Settings on page 55 Moving from Windows to Linux 283 A 5 Switching between Applications Similar to the taskbar on Windows the bottom panel in GNOME lets you easily switch between open windows Unlike Windows
105. al phone calls you can enter the number like sip call number Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga 165 Call Edit View Tools Help le Standby Registered accounts 0 LJ a 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno I SENE rm rum eum Dialpad Audio Video Missed calls 0 Voice Mails 0 3 Click the Call button to the right of the SIP address prompt or press Ctrl O then wait for the other party to pick up the phone 4 To end the call click Hang up or press Ctrl D If you need to adjust the sound parameters during a call click View gt View Mode gt Full View to show four tabs holding more options The second one holds the Audio options for Playback level and Recording level Use the sliders to adjust both volumes to fit your needs 7 5 Answering a Call Ekiga can receive calls in two different ways First the user can be called directly with Ssip user host Alternatively make your calls via a SIP provider Most SIP providers enable you to get calls from a normal land line to your VoIP account Depending on the mode in which Ekiga is run there are several ways in which you would notice an incoming call Normal Application Incoming calls can only be received and answered if Ekiga is already running You hear the ring sound on your headset or your speakers If Ekiga is not running the call cannot be received Panel Applet Normally the Ekiga pane
106. al Keyboard P Choose Selected layouts Layout U S English M Separate layout for each window Add Help A Accessibility X close ei Reset to Defaults Default openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Select your keyboard model from the drop down list then use the navigational buttons to add or remove the selected layout to or from the list of available layouts You can select different layouts to suit different locales You can also click the Accessibility button to start the Keyboard accessibility preference tool Configuring Keyboard Layout Options Use the Layout Options tabbed page to set your keyboard layout options These options determine the behavior of certain keys and other keyboard settings Figure 2 4 Keyboard Preferences Dialog Layout Options Page Keyboard Preferences x Keyboard Layouts Layout Options Typing Break b Adding the EuroSign to certain keys gt Alt Win key behavior gt CapsLock key behavior gt Compose key position gt Ctrl key position gt Japanese keyboard options gt Layout switching gt Miscellaneous compatibility options gt Numeric keypad layout selection gt Third level choosers gt Use keyboard LED to show alternative layout gt Using space key to input non breakable space character Help A Accessibility X Close Select an option to open a submenu for that option then select the desired settings For
107. anager In GNOME you can then establish Internet connections with NetworkManager or ifup http www annodex net cgi bin man man2html ifup For a list of criteria to help you to decide whether to use NetworkManager see Section 10 0 Managing Network Connections with NetworkManager http www novell com documentation opensusel03 opensusel03 startup data cha nm html cha nm and Section 9 1 2 Integration in Changing Operating Environments http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensusel03 startup data sec mobile nbook htmlzsec mobile nbook change in the openSUSE 10 3 Start Up Guide 1 12 Exploring the Internet The GNOME desktop includes Firefox a Mozilla based Web browser You can start it by clicking Computer gt Firefox You can type an address into the location bar at the top or click links in a page to move to different pages just like in any other Web browser For more information see Chapter 12 Browsing with Firefox on page 203 1 13 E Mail and Scheduling For reading and managing your mail and events openSUSE offers you Novell Evolution a groupware program that makes it easy to store organize and retrieve your personal information Evolution seamlessly combines e mail a calendar an address book and a task list in one easy to use application With its extensive support for communications and data interchange standards Evolution can work with existing corporate networks and applications
108. and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible You may add other material on the covers in addition Copying with changes limited to the covers as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly you should put the first ones listed as many as fit reasonably on the actual cover and continue the rest onto adjacent pages If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100 you must either include a machine readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer network location from which the general network using public has access to download using public standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document free of added material If you use the latter option you must take reasonably prudent steps when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy directly or through your agents or retailers of that edition to the public It is requested but not required that you contact the authors of the Document well before redist
109. anges the information in the following table might not be current when you read it Table 3 5 Where to Get Information About OpenOffice org Location OpenOffice org online help menu Official OpenOffice org support page http support openoffice org index html OpenOffice org Migration Guide http documentation openoffice org manuals oooauthors2 0600MG MigrationGuide pdf Taming OpenOffice org http www taming openoffice org com OpenOffice org Macros http www pitonyak org oo php 138 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide What You Can Find Extensive help on performing any task in OpenOffice org Manuals tutorials user and developer forums users openoffice org mailing list FAQs and much more Information about migrating to OpenOffice org from other office suites including Microsoft Office Books news tips and tricks Extensive information about creating and using macros Evolution E Mail and Calendaring Evolution makes the tasks of storing organizing and retrieving your personal information easy so you can work and communicate more effectively with others It s a highly evolved groupware program an integral part of the Internet connected desktop Evolution can help you work in a group by handling e mail address and other contact information and one or more calendars It can do that on one or several computers connected directly or over a network for one person or for large groups With E
110. anywhere with a keypress Example Hotkeys lt Control gt lt Shift gt F11 lt AIt gt N Show notes menu lt Alt gt F12 Open Start Here lt Alt gt F11 Create new note disabled Open Search All Notes disabled The Hotkey preferences include the following Show notes menu Specify the key combination to open the Notes menu Open Start Here Specify the key combination to open the Start Here note which is preinstalled with Tomboy Create new note Specify the key combination to create a new note Open Search All Notes Specify the key combination to open the Search All Notes dialog box 11 9 3 Synchronization Preferences The Synchronization tabbed page lets you share notes announce notes receive announcements and get notes from other instances of Tomboy This can be useful for example if you want to work on a single set of notes in separate instances of Tomboy running on your desktop and your laptop 198 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 11 6 Tomboy Synchronization Preferences Tomboy Preferences Editing Hotkeys Synchronization Add ins Service Local Folder Folder Path Browse iieii Bisex The Synchronization preferences include the following Service Specify the location of the synchronized files By default you can select a local folder or WebDAV server To synchronize to a remote loc
111. appear in italics you can create an emphasis style that italicizes selected text when you apply the style to it Frame Applies standardized formatting to frames For example if your document uses sidebars you can create frames with specified graphics borders location and other formatting so that all of your sidebars have a consistent appearance Page Applies standardized formatting to a specified type of page For example if every page of your document contains a header and footer except for the first page you can use a first page style that disables headers and footers You can also use different page styles for left and right pages so that you have bigger margins on the insides of pages and your page numbers appear on an outside corner List Applies standardized formatting to specified list types For example you can define a checklist with square check boxes and a bullet list with round bullets then easily apply the correct style when creating your lists Opening the Styles and Formatting Window on page 127 Applying a Style on page 127 Using Styles Versus Using Formatting Buttons and Menu Options on page 128 Changing a Style on page 128 Creating a Style on page 128 Opening the Styles and Formatting Window The Styles and Formatting window called the Stylist in earlier versions of OpenOffice org is a versatile formatting tool for applying styles to text paragraphs pages frames and lists To open this
112. apply a slide master to that slide 3 5 Creating and Using Databases with Base OpenOffice org includes a database module Base Use Base to design a database to store many different kinds of information from a simple address book or recipe file to a sophisticated document management system Tables forms queries and reports can be created manually or by using convenient wizards For example the Table Wizard contains a number of common fields for business and personal use Databases created in Base can be used as data sources such as when creating form letters It is beyond the scope of this document to detail database design with Base More information can be found at the sources listed in Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 Base comes with several predefined database fields to help you create a database The steps in this section are specific to creating an address book using predefined fields but it should be easy to follow them to use the predefined fields for any of the built in database options The process for creating a database can be broken into several subprocesses Section 3 5 1 Creating the Database on page 135 Section 3 5 2 Setting Up the Database Table on page 135 Section 3 5 3 Creating a Form on page 136 Section 3 5 4 Modifying the Form on page 136 Section 3 5 5 What s Next on page 137 3 5 1 Creating the Database First create the datab
113. apps compiz plugins cube screen0 options registry folder 3 Scroll down the list on the right side of the Configuration Editor and select skydome 4 Double click skydome image then specify the path to the skydome image you want to display behind the cube Skydome images must be in png format The suggested image sizes for skydome images are 1024 x 1024 1024 x 2048 1024 x 4096 2048 x 1024 2048 x 2048 2048 x 4096 4096 x 1024 4096 x 2048 and 4096 x 4096 5 Optional Select skydome animated to make it look like you are moving around the cube when you use your mouse to rotate the cube Customizing Your Settings 81 6 Click OK 7 Click File gt Quit to close the Configuration Editor Figure 2 20 Skydome Image UE E D a f A gor 2 2 3 File Management Preferences You can change the File Manager preferences in the Control Center by clicking Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or from Nautilus by clicking Edit gt Preferences The configurable preferences are organized on five tabs Views on page 82 Behavior on page 84 Display on page 85 List Columns on page 86 Preview on page 86 Views To configure the appearance of the File Manager click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or Edit gt Preferences from Nautilus then click the Views tab 82 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 21 File Manager Views Dialog Box Fil
114. ar toolbar 1 Click the arrow icon at the end of the toolbar you want to change 2 Click Visible Buttons to display a list of buttons 3 Select the buttons in the list to enable check mark or disable no check mark them Customizing Menus You can add or delete items from current menus reorganize menus and even create new menus 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Menus 2 Select the menu you want to change or click New to create a new menu Click Help for more information about the options in the Customize dialog 3 Modify add or delete menu items as desired 4 Click OK Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts You can reassign currently assigned keyboard shortcuts and assign new shortcuts to frequently used functions 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard 2 Select the keys you want to assign to a function or select the function and assign the keys or key combinations Click Help for more information about the options in the Customize dialog 3 Modify add or delete keyboard shortcuts as desired 4 Click OK 122 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Customizing Events OpenOffice org also provides ways to assign macros to events such as application startup or the saving of a document The assigned macro runs automatically whenever the selected event occurs 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Events 2 Select the event you want to change Click Help for more information about the options in the Customize dialog box 3 Assign or remo
115. ase 1 Click File gt New gt Database 2 Select Create a new database then click Next 3 Click Yes register the database for me to make your database information available to other OpenOffice org modules select both check boxes in the bottom half of the dialog then click Finish 4 Browse to the directory where you want to save the database specify a name for the database then click OK 5 Continue with Setting Up the Database Table 3 5 2 Setting Up the Database Table Next define the fields you want to use in your database table 1 In the Table Wizard click Personal The Sample tables list changes to show the predefined tables for personal use If you had clicked Business the list would contain predefined business tables The OpenOffice org Office Suite 135 2 Inthe Sample tables list click Addresses The available fields for the predefined address book appear in the Available fields menu 3 In the Available fields menu click the fields you want to use in your address book You can select one item at a time or you can shift click multiple items to select them 4 Click the single right arrow to move the selected items to the Selected fields menu To move all available fields to the Selected fields menu click the double right arrow 5 Use the up arrow and down arrow to adjust the order of the selected fields The fields appear in the table and forms in the order in which they are listed 6 Click Next 7 Make sure each of t
116. ast2 html in the SLED 10 SPI Deployment Guide 2 1 Hardware Hardware settings include the following Section 2 1 1 Configuring Bluetooth Services on page 56 Section 2 1 2 Configuring Your DSL Connection on page 56 Section 2 1 3 Configuring Your Graphics Card and Monitor on page 57 Section 2 1 4 Modifying Keyboard Preferences on page 57 Section 2 1 5 Configuring a Modem on page 61 Section 2 1 6 Configuring the Mouse on page 62 Section 2 1 7 Configuring a Network Card on page 63 Section 2 1 8 Installing and Configuring Printers on page 64 Section 2 1 9 Configuring Removable Drives and Media on page 64 Section 2 1 10 Configuring a Scanner on page 64 Section 2 1 11 Specifying Screen Resolution Settings on page 65 Section 2 1 12 Configuring a Touchpad on page 65 2 1 1 Configuring Bluetooth Services Bluetooth services enable you to connect wireless devices such as mobile phones and personal data assistants PDAs to your computer Bluetooth wireless support includes automatic recognition of Bluetooth enabled devices via the YaST central configuration and administration tool Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Bluetooth then set the configuration options that are appropriate for your device NOTE Root privileges are required for configuring Bluetooth services 2 1 2 Configuring Your DSL Connection If you connec
117. ation click the Add ins tab select Synchronization gt SSH Sync Service Add in then click Enable This adds an SSH sshfs FUSE option to the Service drop down list Specify the information required for the Service you selected then click Save Advanced Specify what happens when a conflict is detected between a local note and a note on the configured synchronization server You can choose to be prompted when a conflict occurs to rename the local note or to replace the local note with the note on the synchronization server Clear Clears your current synchronization settings If you choose to clear your synchronization settings you might need to synchronize your notes again when you save new settings To synchronize your notes click Tools gt Synchronize Notes in any open note 11 9 4 Add ins Preferences The Add ins tabbed page lets you enable and configure Tomboy add ins formerly called plug ins Tomboy comes with several pre installed add ins such as Backlinks Bugzilla Links Evolution Mail Integration Export to HTML Fixed Width Note of the Day Printing Support and Sticky Notes Importer The list of installed add ins is shown on the left of the Add ins tabbed page To enable or disable an add in select the add in you want then click Enable or Disable Taking Notes with Tomboy 199 Figure 11 7 Tomboy Add ins Preferences Tomboy Preferences The following add ins are installed Add in P To
118. ative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided
119. ature in Word has a reputation for corrupting documents This problem does not exist in OpenOffice org Writer so you can safely use master documents to manage your projects To create a master document 1 Click New gt Master Document or Open an existing document and click File gt Send gt Create Master Document 2 Insert subdocuments 3 Click File gt Save The OpenOffice org help files contain more complete information about working with master documents Look for the topic entitled Using Master Documents and Subdocuments TIP The styles from all of your subdocuments are imported into the master document To ensure that formatting is consistent throughout your master document you should use the same template for each subdocument Doing so is not mandatory however if subdocuments are formatted 130 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide differently you might need to do some reformatting to successfully bring subdocuments into the master document without creating inconsistencies For example if two documents imported into your master document include different styles with the same name the master document will use the formatting specified for that style in the first document you import 3 2 6 Using Writer as an HTML Editor In addition to being a full featured word processor Writer also functions as an HTML editor Writer includes HTML tags that can be applied as you would any other style in a Writer document You can view t
120. cally files and folders are marked to let remote users access them These are called network shares If your system is configured to access network shares you can use your file manager to access these shares and browse them just as easily as if they were located on your local machine Whether you have only read access or also write access to the shared folders depends on the permissions granted to you by the owner of the shares To access network shares open Nautilus and click Network Servers Nautilus displays the networks that you can access Click a network then click the server You might be required to authenticate to the server by providing a username and password Figure 8 1 Network File Browser Network File Browser Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Help Y Z a y Back Reload Home Computer Search Novell Services EnNetwork Places v Xx N a E Q Search Novell Services Windows Network jsmith E Desktop File System Network Servers Audio Disc 2 items 8 3 Sharing Folders Sharing and exchanging documents is a must have in corporate environments Nautilus offers you file sharing which makes your files and folders available to both Linux and Windows users 8 3 1 Enabling Sharing on the Computer Before you can share a folder you must enable sharing on your computer 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt YaST 2 Enter the root password 3 Click Network Services 4 Cli
121. cation there is no need to manually type a password to authenticate 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Key gt Create New Key 3 Select Secure Shell Key then click Continue 4 Specify a description of what the key is to be used for You can use your e mail address or any other reminder 5 Optional Click Advanced key options to specify the following advanced options for the key Encryption Type Specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your keys Select RSA to use the Rivest ShamirAdleman RSA algorithm to create the SSH key This is the preferred and more secure choice Select DSA to use the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA to create the SSH key Key Strength Specifies the length ofthe key in bits The longer the key the more secure it is provided a strong passphrase is used but keep in mind that performing any operation with a longer key requires more time than it does with a shorter key Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits At least 2048 bits is recommended 6 Click Just Create Key to create the new key or click Create and Set Up to create the key and set up another computer to use for authentication 7 Specify the passphrase for your new key click OK then repeat When you specify a passphrase use the same practices you use when you create a strong password The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that spaces are va
122. cessibility of the GNOME desktop to users with visual impairments Subpixel Smoothing LCDs Uses techniques that exploit the shape of individual Liquid Crystal Display LCD pixels to render fonts smoothly Use this option for LCD or flat screen displays Click Details to specify further details of how to render fonts on your screen Resolution Dots Per Inch Specify the resolution to use when your screen renders fonts Smoothing Select one of the options to specify how to antialias fonts Hinting Select one of the options to specify how to apply hinting to improve the quality of fonts at small sizes and at low screen resolutions Subpixel Order Select one of the options to specify the subpixel color order for your fonts Use this option for LCD or flat screen displays 70 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Configuring Menus and Toolbars You can configure the appearance and behavior of menus and toolbars Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Interface tab Showing Icons in Menus If you want icons to appear in menus select Show icons in menus Not all menu items have icons Defining New Keyboard Shortcuts If you want to be able to define new keyboard shortcuts for menu items select Editable menu shortcut keys When this option is enabled you can change an application shortcut key by placing the mouse pointer over the menu item you want to change then pressing the new
123. change any of these effects see Modifying Desktop Effects on page 73 You can also enable Xgl by running the following command as root gnome xgl switch enable xgl To disable Xgl click Disable Desktop Effects in the Desktop Effects Settings dialog box or run the following command as root gnome xgl switch disable xgl Modifying Desktop Effects Use the Desktop Effects Settings tool to enable or disable specific desktop effects or to change the keystrokes or mouse actions used to control those effects 1 Click Computer gt Control Center 2 Click Desktop Effects in the Look and Feel group 3 Choose from the following options Window Effects Desktop Cube Other Features 4 When you finish making changes click Close Customizing Your Settings 73 You can also use gconf editor to change Xgl settings 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt GNOME Configuration Editor or press Alt F2 and enter gconf editor 2 Navigate to the apps compiz general and apps compiz plugins registry folders and make the changes you want 3 Click File gt Quit to close the Configuration Editor Window Effects Use the options on this tabbed page to specify what happens when you move windows how window transitions appear and to change window opacity Figure 2 12 Window Effects Tabbed Page 3D Desktop Window Effects Desktop Cube Other Features Moving Windows C Windows wobble while they re being moved z
124. ck Resize to change the canvas size Click Reset to restore the original values or Cancel to cancel the canvas resize 226 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 15 5 2 Selecting Parts of Images It is often useful to perform an image operation on only part of an image To do this you must select the part of the image you want to work on Areas can be selected by using the select tools available in the toolbox using the quick mask or combining different options Selections can also be modified with the items under Select The selection is outlined with a dashed line Using the Selection Tools on page 227 Using the Quick Mask on page 227 Using the Selection Tools The main select tools are easy to use The paths tool which can also be used for more than selecting is more complicated so is not described here In the tool options for the other select tools use one of the icons in the Mode row to determine whether the selection should replace be added to be subtracted from or intersect with an existing selection Rect Select This tool can be used to select rectangular or square areas In the tool options select among Free Select Fixed Size and Fixed Aspect Ratio to control the shape and size of the selection To make a square selection in the free select mode hold Shift while selecting a region Ellipse Select Use this to select elliptical or circular areas The same options are available as for a rectangular selection Holding Sh
125. ck Windows Domain Membership 5 Click Allow Users to Share Their Directories then click Finish 8 3 2 Enabling Sharing for a Folder To configure file sharing for a folder 1 Open Nautilus 170 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 2 Right click the window background or a folder then select Sharing Options from the context menu File Manager M Folder Sharing Share this folder Share name Documents _ Allow other people to write in this folder Comment X Cancel B Create Share 3 Select Share this folder 4 Optional If you want other people to be able to write to the folder select Allow other people to write in this folder 5 Conditional If the folder does not already have the permissions that are required for sharing click Add the permissions automatically The folder icon changes to indicate that the folder is now shared IMPORTANT Samba domain browsing only works if your system s firewall is configured accordingly Either disable the firewall entirely or assign the browsing interface to the internal firewall zone Ask your system administrator about how to proceed 8 4 Managing Windows Files With your openSUSE machine being an Active Directory client you can browse view and manipulate data located on Windows servers The following examples are just the most prominent ones Browsing Windows Files with Nautilus Use Nautilus s network browsing features to brow
126. clipboard is lost 1 10 Printing Before you can install a printer you need to know the root password and have your printer information ready Depending on how you connect to the printer you might also need the printer URI TCP IP address or host and the driver for the printer A number of common printer drivers Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 37 38 ship with openSUSE If you cannot find a driver for the printer check the printer manufacturer s Web site You can also use YaST to configure your printers as described in Section 2 5 Setting Up a Printer http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensuse103_startup data sec_y2_hw_print html sec_y2 hw print in the openSUSE 10 3 Start Up Guide Section 1 10 1 Installing a Local Printer on page 38 Section 1 10 2 Monitoring Print Jobs in GNOME on page 38 1 10 1 Installing a Local Printer 1 Connect the printer cable to your computer and connect the printer s power supply The printer dialog should open If it doesn t click Computer gt Control Center gt Add Printer gt New Printer to open it 2 Enter the root password 3 Click Local Printer If the printer was autodetected select the printer from the list If the printer was not autodetected click Use another printer by specifying a port and then select the correct printer port 5 Click Forward 6 Select the printer driver for this printer then click Apply You can also install a print
127. conditions for details see the COPYING file To bookmark a site you access frequently click Bookmarks gt Add bookmark Specify a name for the bookmark then click Add The new bookmark is added to your list of bookmarks 5 To download files select the files you want to download in the remote list of files then click the left arrow button The progress of each download is listed in the field in the middle of the window If the transfer is successful you see the files in the directory listing on the left 6 To upload a file select the files you want to upload in your local directory listing on the left then click the right arrow button The progress of each download is listed in the field in the middle of the window If the transfer is successful you see the files in the remote directory listing on the right 7 Optional To modify preferences for your downloads click FTP gt Options 13 2 Setting Up an HTTP Proxy Server 1 In GNOME FTP click FTP gt Options then click the FTP tab 2 Select HTTP proxy from the Proxy server type drop down list then specify your proxy server information on that dialog box 212 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 Click the HTTP tab then enter the same proxy server information in that dialog box 4 Click OK 13 3 ASCII vs Binary Transfers There are two common ways to transfer files via FTP ASCII and binary ASCII mode transfers files as text Examples of ASCII files include txt
128. contacts Local Address Book By default you have a local address book with the name Personal available If you need more address books click File gt New Address Book or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl B to create them To call any contact from the address book double click the contact with the mouse The call is directly initiated Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga 167 7 7 For More Information The official home page of Ekiga is http www ekiga org http www ekiga org This site offers frequently asked questions as well as a more detailed documentation For information about the support of the H323 teleconferencing protocol in Linux see http ww w openh323 org http www openh323 org This is also a good starting point when searching for projects supporting VoIP To set up a private telephone network you might be interested in the PBX software Asterisk http www asterisk org For more information about this project see http www voip info org wiki Asterisk http www voip info org wiki Asterisk 168 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Accessing Network Resources From your desktop you can access files and directories or certain services on remote hosts or make your own files and directories available to other users in your network openSUSE offers the following ways of accessing and creating network shared resources Network Browsing Your file manager Nautilus lets you browse your network for shared resou
129. ct an import source then click Open 3 After the photos are finished loading click Import The photos are added to your catalog 16 2 Downloading Pictures from Your Camera You can import new images from your digital camera by connecting it to the USB port of your computer The type of camera is detected automatically When you import photos from your camera F Spot makes copies of them so that you can clear your camera s memory 1 Click File gt Import 2 Select your camera as the import source F Spot launches a preview window displaying all the images that are available for download from your camera The files are copied to the target directory specified via Copy Files to If Import files after copy is selected all images copied from the camera are automatically imported to F Spot s database Tagging can be done on import if you select the appropriate tag with Select Tags If you do not want to import all images on your camera to your database just deselect the unwanted ones in the preview window Select Photos to Copy From Camera Selected Camera Preview Path IDCIM 124CANON IMG_2458 JPG DCIM A124CANON IMG_2459 JPG IDCIM 124CANON IMG_2460 JPG IDCIM 124CANON IMG_2461 JPG DCIM 124CANON IMG_2462 JPG aN IDCIM 124CANON IMG 2463 JPG Copy Files to home tux Photos ix Import files after copy Select Tags X Cancel Copy 3 Click Copy 4 When the photo transfer is complete click
130. ction Soft Focus Straighten Description Sharpening one region of a picture while blurring all the rest is a way to emphasize a particular area and grab attention The soft focus effect is a way to emulate a lens that allows shooting with a short distance in front of and beyond the subject that appears to be in focus Choose the central point of the area you want to be in focus then click the Soft Focus icon beneath the photo Adjust the amount of blurring then click Apply The Straighten effect helps you level a photo and is useful when editing landscapes taken without a tripod when the imaginary line of horizon is not at 0 This tool rotates a photo by a specified angle and automatically crops the resulted image so that you always see a perfect rectangle 4 Optional If you want to edit another photo use the arrow keys at the bottom right to switch to a new photo 5 To exit the edit mode click Browse on the toolbar TIP Professional image editing can also be done with The GIMP For more information see Chapter 15 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP on page 221 16 8 Sharing Photos You can use either of the following methods to share your photos by using F Spot Both methods share only the photos you have selected when you run them Section 16 8 1 E mailing Photos on page 245 Section 16 8 2 Printing Photos on page 246 16 8 4 E mailing Photos You can e mail your photos directly
131. ction use the paint tools Painting with white selects the painted pixels Painting with black deselects pixels Shades of gray colors are treated as shades of gray are a partial selection Partial selection allows smooth transitions between selected and unselected areas To use a different color for displaying the quick mask right click the quick mask button then select Configure Color and Opacity from the menu Click the colored box in the dialog that opens to select a new color After using the paint tools to adjust the selection as desired convert the quick mask view back to the normal selection view by clicking the icon in the lower left corner of the image window currently displaying a red box The selection is again displayed with a dashed line 15 5 3 Applying and Removing Color Most image editing involves applying or removing color By selecting a part of the image you can limit where color is applied or removed When you select a tool and move the cursor onto an image the cursor s appearance changes to reflect the chosen tool With many tools an icon of the current tool is shown along with the arrow For paint tools an outline of the current brush is shown allowing you to see exactly where you will be painting in the image and how large an area will be painted Selecting Colors on page 228 Painting and Erasing on page 229 Adding Text on page 229 Retouching Images with the Clone Tool on page 229 Selec
132. ctories select it in the list then click Remove 6 Click OK 10 6 Preventing Files and Directories from Being Indexed Use the Search Preferences dialog box to specify resources that you don t want indexed These resources can include directories patterns mail folders or types of objects 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search amp Indexing 2 Click the Indexing tab 3 Click Add in the Privacy section 4 Select a resource to exclude from indexing then specify the path to the resource 5 Click OK twice Searching with Beagle 189 190 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Taking Notes with Tomboy Tomboy is a GNOME desktop application for taking notes that gives you the ability to organize the ideas and information you deal with every day Among other things it can help you collect and sort all kind of data write down your ideas make to do lists and allocate your contacts Tomboy also has some useful editing features to help you customize your notes including Highlighting search text Inline spell checking Auto linking Web and e mail addresses Undo redo support Font styling and sizing Bulleted lists Tomboy is located on the GNOME panel and by default is started automatically when you log into GNOME You can also access Tomboy by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Tomboy Notes This sections contains the following information Section 11 1 Creatin
133. current note For example if your current note contains the phrase resume you can select this text then click Link to create a new note with the title resume A link is also created in the current note which you can click to open the new resume note Taking Notes with Tomboy 193 Figure 11 3 Links in Tomboy Notes FE m Job Search UE X Fe m gd B Search Tex Tools Delete Job Search Need to update resume call Bob about possible job lead and post resume to a e NL gw Aur Search Link Text Tools Delete resume Describe your new note here If you change the title of a note the links in other notes to the note whose title you changed are automatically updated Typing the name of another note in your current note automatically links that note for you To see what other notes link to the current note click Tools gt What links here 11 4 Accessing Your Notes To access your notes click the Tomboy icon on the GNOME panel then select one of the notes you recently viewed or created from the menu or search for older notes see Section 11 2 Searching All Notes on page 192 for more information The Table of Contents lists all your notes in the order they were last modified To force a note to always appear in the panel menu regardless of when you last accessed it click the thumbtack icon to the right of the note to pin it to the menu Notes that are pinned to the panel menu
134. d 7 Conditional If you chose Microsoft Exchange provide your username in the Username field and your Outlook Web Access OWA URL in the OWA Url field OWA URL and usernames should be entered as in OWA If the mail box path is different from the username the OWA path should also include the mail box path You should see something similar to this http lt server name gt exchange lt mail box path gt When you have finished continue with Receiving Mail Options on page 142 Local Configuration Options If you selected Local Delivery MH Format Mail Directories Maildir Format Mail Directories or Standard Unix Mbox Spool or Directory you must specify the path to the local files in the path field Continue with Receiving Mail Options on page 142 Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 141 Receiving Mail Options After you have selected a mail delivery mechanism you can set some preferences for its behavior Novell GroupWise Receiving Options on page 142 Microsoft Exchange Receiving Options on page 142 IMAP and IMAP4rev1 Receiving Options on page 143 POP Receiving Options on page 143 USENET News Receiving Options on page 144 Local Delivery Receiving Options on page 144 MH Format Mail Directories Receiving Options on page 144 Maildir Format Mail Directories Receiving Options on page 144 Standard Unix Mbox Spool or Directory Receiving Options on page 145 Novell GroupWise Receiving
135. ded choice because it lets you encrypt decrypt sign and verify as needed Both DSA sign only and RSA sign only allow only signing Key Strength Specifies the length ofthe key in bits The longer the key the more secure it is provided a strong passphrase is used but keep in mind that performing any operation with a longer key requires more time than it does with a shorter key Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits At least 2048 bits is recommended Expiration Date Specifies the date when the key ceases to be usable for performing encryption or signing operations You need to either change the expiration date or generate a new key or subkey after this amount of time passes Sign your new key with your old one before it expires to preserve your trust status 6 Click Create to create the new key pair 174 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide The Passphrase for New PGP Key dialog box opens 7 Specify the passphrase twice for your new key then click OK When you specify a passphrase use the same practices you use when you create a strong password The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that spaces are valid characters in a passphrase 9 2 2 Creating Secure Shell Keys Secure Shell SSH is a method of logging into a remote computer to execute commands on that machine SSH keys are used in key based authentication system as an alternative to the default password authentication system With key based authenti
136. dification cannot be redone Changes can also be undone and redone with the Edit menu Alternatively use the shortcuts Ctrl Z and Ctrl Y 15 5 6 Layers Layers are a very important aspect of The GIMP By drawing parts of your image on separate layers you can change move or delete those parts without damaging the rest of the image To understand how layers work imagine an image created from a stack of transparent sheets Different parts of the image are drawn on different sheets The stack can be rearranged changing which parts are on top Individual layers or groups of layers can shift position moving sections of the image to other locations New sheets can be added and others set aside Use the Layers dialog to view the available layers of an image The text tool automatically creates special text layers when used The active layer is highlighted The buttons at the bottom of the dialog offer a number of functions More are available in the menu opened when a layer is right clicked in the dialog The two icon spaces before the image name are used for toggling image visibility eye icon when visible and for linking layers Linked layers are marked with the chain icon and moved as a group Only layers with transparency an alpha channel can be placed above other layers in a stack To add this to a layer right click and select it from the menu 230 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 15 5 7 Image Modes The GIMP has three image modes RGB
137. ds ISDN DSL or modem Network Services Contains modules for network services and for configuring clients such as LDAP and NFS Novell AppArmor Use these modules to configure the Novell AppArmor access control system This option is available only if the Novell AppArmor pattern is installed Security and Users Use these modules to configure security details such as firewall options and to create and manage users and groups Software Use these modules to set options for installation and updates and to install or remove software packages Customizing Your Settings 113 System Use these modules to change system settings such as the date time or language and to perform tasks such as backing up or restoring files For information about using YaST see System Configuration with YaST http www novell com documentation sled10 sled_deployment_sp1 data cha_yast2 html in the SLED 10 SP1 Deployment Guide 114 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Office and Collaboration Chapter 3 The OpenOffice org Office Suite on page 117 Chapter 4 Evolution E Mail and Calendaring on page 139 Chapter 5 Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot on page 153 Chapter 6 Instant Messaging with Pidgin on page 159 Chapter 7 Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga on page 163 Chapter 8 Accessing Network Resources on page 169 Chapter 9 Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys on page
138. e The Extract operation does not change the contents of the archive 1 17 Taking Screen Shots You can take a snapshot of your screen or an individual application window by using any of the following methods From any panel You can add the Take Screenshot button to any panel For information on how to do this see Section 1 3 4 Adding Applets and Applications to the Panel on page 22 After you have added the button click the Take Screenshot button to take a snapshot of the entire desktop Use shortcut keys Press the Print Screen key to take a screen shot of the entire desktop Press Alt Print Screen to take a screen shot of the currently active window or dialog box From the Application Browser Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Take Screenshot From a terminal You can use the gnome panel screenshot command to take a screen shot This command takes a screen shot of the entire screen then displays the Save Screenshot dialog box which you can use to save the screen shot You can use the following options with the gnome panel screenshot command window Takes a screen shot of the currently active window delay seconds Takes a screen shot after the specified number of seconds then displays the Save Screenshot dialog box When you take a screen shot the Save Screenshot dialog box opens To save the screen shot as an image file specify the filename for the screen shot and choose a location f
139. e For example if you always work with a specific spreadsheet you can create a macro that opens the spreadsheet and assign the macro to the Start Application event This section contains simple generic instructions for customizing your environment The changes you make are effective immediately so you can see if the changes are what you wanted and go back and modify them if they aren t See the OpenOffice org help files for detailed instructions Customizing Toolbars Use the Customize dialog to modify OpenOffice org toolbars 1 Click the arrow icon at the end of any toolbar then click Customize Toolbar The OpenOffice org Office Suite 121 or Click Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars 2 Select the toolbar you want to customize The toolbar you clicked should already be selected You can change the toolbar you want to customize by selecting the desired toolbar from the Toolbar menu 3 Select the check boxes next to the commands you want to appear on the toolbar and deselect the check boxes next to the commands you don t want to appear 4 Select whether to save your customized toolbar in the OpenOffice org module you are using or in the document OpenOffice org module The customized toolbar is used whenever you open that module Document filename The customized toolbar is used whenever you open that document 5 Repeat to customize additional toolbars 6 Click OK You can quickly choose the buttons that appear on a particul
140. e DR eee lee 11 9 2 Hotkey Preferences csl e epe ER pee 11 9 3 Synchronization Preferences lsllle eee 11 9 4 Add ins Preferences onrera ee nenea ERR XE ERREUR ETE ERG RE E Part Ill Internet 12 Browsing with Firefox 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 Navigating Web Sites irca ttt ene ee 12 1 4 Tabbed Browsing 0000 eee 12 1 2 Using the Sidebar iota Rena eec Ras Win sae ie as Finding Information 12 2 1 Finding Information on the Web 2 00 00 e eee eee eee 12 2 2 Installing a Different Search Engine illii 12 2 8 Searching in the Current Page llileelle eh Managing Bookmarks 0 00000 cee lr 12 3 1 Using the Bookmark Manager llselee eh 12 3 2 Importing Bookmarks From Other Browsers llle 12 3 3 Live Bookmiarks uere EUER EET eere demere ed ea e red Using the Download Customizing Firefox 12 5 14 Extensions Manager secun ei el karin tok er eem ae or et M cL 12 5 2 Changing Themes insure RR ee ee Pe ee ea 12 5 3 Adding Smart Keywords to Your Online Searches 000000 ee Printing From Firefox obire RPIIuPERXCeSER eer ia a Swale Quer led For More Information eiere sidene ee eee rare 13 Transferring Data From the Internet 13 1 Using GNOME FTP 13 2 Setting Up an HTTP Proxy Server 1 0 teens 19 3 ASCII vs Binary Transfers llsseeeee 185 185 186 187 188
141. e Filter drop down menu then select Accessibility from the Selection list Select gok gnopernicus and gnome mag from the Available Software list Click Accept Insert the CD you are prompted for then click OK co OG Click Cancel 7 Close after the package installation is complete 2 3 3 Changing Your Password For security reasons it is a good idea to change your password from time to time To change your password 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Personal gt Change Password 2 Type your current password 3 Type your new password 4 Confirm your new password by typing it again then click OK 100 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 2 3 4 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts A keyboard shortcut is a key or combination of keys that provides an alternative to standard ways of performing an action You can customize the keyboard shortcuts for a number of actions To open the Keyboard Shortcuts tool click Computer gt Control Center gt Personal gt Shortcuts Figure 2 35 Keyboard Shortcuts Dialog pH LLLI Action nen Shortcut A Skip to next track Disabled Eject Ctrl Alt Delet v Desktop Launch help browser Disabled Log out Ctri Alt Delet Sleep Disabled Lock screen Ctrl Alt L Home folder Disabled Search Disabled E mail Disabled 3 To edit a shortcut key click on the corresponding row and type a new accelerator or press backspace to clear ue X Close To change the
142. e Management Preferences Views Behavior Display List Columns Preview Default View View new folders using Icon View Arrange items By Name Sort folders before files O Show hidden and backup files Icon View Defaults Default zoom level 100 gt O Use compact layout O Text beside icons List View Defaults Default zoom level 5096 Tree View Defaults Show only folders Select from the following options Table 2 8 File Manager Views Options Section Option Default View View new folders using Arrange items Sort folder before files Show hidden and backup files Icon View Default zoom level Defaults Use compact layout Text beside icons List View Default zoom level Defaults Hep X Close Description Determines whether new folders are displayed as icons or as a list Sets the order in which items are listed Items can be listed by name size type modification date or emblems Places this folder at the top of the list if this check box is selected the default Shows hidden files and backup files in your directories If this check box is not selected the default hidden and backup files do not appear Sets the size of items that appear in the File Manager Displays items closer together Displays icon captions next to the icons rather than beneath them Determines the s
143. e Theme If you do not use a theme anymore you can delete it in the same dialog with Uninstall 12 5 3 Adding Smart Keywords to Your Online Searches Searching the Internet is one of the main tasks a browser can perform for you Firefox lets you define your own smart keywords which are abbreviations to use as a command for searching the Web For example if you use Wikipedia often you can use a smart keyword to simplify this task 1 Go to Wikipedia http en wikipedia org 2 After Firefox displays the Web page see the search text field Right click it then select Add a Keyword for this Search from the menu that opens 3 The Add Bookmark dialog appears In Name name this Web page for example Wikipedia en 4 For Keyword enter your abbreviation of this Web page for example wiki 5 With Create in choose the location of the entry in your bookmarks section You can put it into any folder 6 Finalize with Add You have successfully generated a new keyword Whenever you need to look into Wikipedia you do not need to use the entire URL Justtype wiki Linux to view an entry about Linux 12 6 Printing From Firefox Configure the way Firefox prints the content it displays using the Page Setup dialog Click File gt Page Setup then go to the Format amp Options tab to select the orientation of your print jobs You can 208 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide scale or make it adjust automatically To print a background select Pr
144. e Visually Impaired The Orca screen reader assists visually impaired users so they can read the information on the screen either by magnifying the screen reading screen output aloud or outputting information from the screen in Braille to a screen reader To configure Orca click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Orca Screen Reader Customizing Your Settings 95 96 The first time you run this module a terminal opens so you can set up the Orca screen reader This setup consists of a series of yes no questions Answer the questions as appropriate for your setup After the setup is complete you must log out and log back in for your setup to take effect After the initial setup to change the preferences or to set additional options click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Orca Screen Reader 2 2 7 Configuring the Screen Saver A screen saver is a program that blanks the screen or displays graphics when the computer is not used for a specified amount of time Originally screen savers protected monitors from having images burned into them Now they are used primarily for entertainment or security To configure a screen saver click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Screensaver Figure 2 31 Screensaver Preferences Dialog r Screensaver Preferences B Screensaver theme Blank screen Random Anemone Anemotaxis AntMaze AntSpotlight Apollonian Apple If Atlantis Attract
145. e a modifier key is pressed activate Beep when the modifier is pressed If Disable If Two Keys Pressed Together is selected the keys do not stick anymore when two keys are pressed simultaneously The system then assumes that the keyboard shortcut has been completely entered 98 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Enable Repeat Keys Basic Tab Activate Repeat Keys to make settings with sliders for Delay and Speed This determines how long a key must be pressed for the automatic keyboard repeat function to be activated and at what speed the characters are then typed Test the effect of the settings in the field at the bottom of the dialog Select parameters that reflect your normal typing habits Enable Slow Keys Filters Tab To prevent accidental typing set a minimum time limit that a key must be pressed and held before it is recognized as valid input by the system Also determine whether audible feedback should be provided for keypress events accepted keypresses and the rejection of a keypress Enable Bounce Keys Filters Tab To prevent double typing set a minimum time limit for accepting two subsequent keypress events of the same key as the input of two individual characters If desired activate audible feedback upon rejection of a keypress event Toggle Keys Filters Tab You can request audible feedback from the system when a keycap modifier key is pressed Mouse Keys Tab Activates the keyboard mouse the mouse point
146. e a two button mouse press the Super key then press the left and right buttons simultaneously You can move the mouse while holding those buttons down to see other parts of the screen You can also press the Super key and use the scroll wheel on the mouse to manually zoom in and out of the desktop You can choose to deactivate any of these options or to change the zoom keystrokes Water Effect This option creates a ripple effect on your screen when you hold down the specified key or key combination Ctrl Alt Super by default and move the mouse pointer You can also enable or disable a rain effect when you press Shift F9 To change the keystrokes used to enable and disable the rain effect click the box to the right of Activate deactivate rain when I type until New accelerator appears Then press the keystrokes you want to use These new keystrokes will appear in the box Use the slider bar at the bottom of the tabbed window to specify the intensity of the rain effect openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 17 Water Effect Ele Edt View Fing Tags telp H gt i zs E Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Browse Edtimage Fullscreen Sideshow axo Miam PS i dei 3 w 2000 7 210000 70212000 RO KS K rj lj now O Frores E Haden D rove Orn m Computer GE A cese Spat Xgl Shortcuts 7 1 2000 J usert23 Fie Browser The GMP 2 n KE 7212000 72102000 7010000 BE Desitop C Fie Syste
147. e allows text to use a fixed width font To change existing text select the text you want to modify then select the Fixed Width option from the Text drop down menu You can also select the Fixed Width option from the Text drop down menu before you start typing to have the text you type be in a fixed width style Font Size There are four options in this part of the menu Small Normal Large and Huge Each of these options represents a font size you can use for the selected text in the note To modify the font size select the text you want to modify then select one of the Font Size options from the Text drop down menu Bullets Select the Bullets option from the Text drop down menu to begin or end a bulleted list If your cursor is inside a bulleted list the ncrease Indent and Decrease Indent options are enabled For more information on bullets see Section 11 5 1 Using Bulleted Lists on page 195 Increase Indent With the cursor on a bulleted list line select this option to shift the current line to the right Decrease Indent With the cursor on a bulleted list line select this option to shift the current line to the left Find in This Note Lets you search for text within the current note Selecting this option causes a Find bar to open at the bottom of the note To open the Find bar using the keyboard press Ctrl F Enter the text you want to find After entering text any matches are highlighted Click Find Ne
148. e are two ways to remove an item from the Main menu To remove an item but retain it in the tems list so you can easily restore it to the menu hide the item as explained in Showing or Hiding Menu Items on page 94 To delete an item from the tems list so it can no longer be shown right click the item and click Delete NOTE Separators cannot be hidden They can only be added or deleted If you want to show a deleted item you must add it as you would a new application See Adding New Items to the Main Menu on page 95 for information about adding an application Renaming Menu Items 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 Locate the menu item whose name you want to change as explained in Finding Menu Items on page 92 3 Right click the item then click Properties 4 Replace the current name with the name you want to give the item then click Close The old name is replaced by the new one in the menu openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Changing an Item s Generic Name A short descriptive name appears beneath the name of each item in the Main menu This is known as the generic name To change the generic name 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 Locate the menu item whose generic name you want to change as explained in Finding Menu Items on page 92 3 Right click the item then click Properties Replace the current generic name with
149. e file Save the document in the format the other user needs For example to save as a Microsoft Word file click File gt Save As then select the Microsoft Word file type for the version of Word the other user needs If the recipient only needs to read the document Export the document to a PDF file with File gt Export as PDF PDF files can be read on any platform using a viewer like Adobe Acrobat Reader If you want to share a document for editing Use one ofthe standard document formats The default formats comply with the OASIS standard XML format making them compatible with a number of applications TXT and RTF formats although limited in formatting might be a good option for text documents CSV is useful for spreadsheets OpenOffice org might also offer your recipient s preferred format especially Microsoft formats If you want to e mail a document as a PDF Click File gt Send gt E mail as PDF Your default e mail program opens with the file attached 120 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide If you want to e mail a document to a Microsoft Word user Click File gt Send gt E mail as Microsoft Word Your default e mail program opens with the file attached Send a document as the body of an e mail Click File gt Send gt Document as E mail Your default e mail program opens with the contents of the document as the e mail body 3 1 4 Starting OpenOffice org Start the application in one of the following ways Click Computer
150. e two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally 288 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to You
151. ect in File Manager by right clicking the object and then clicking Make Link Drag the link from the File Manager window and drop it onto the desktop Section 1 3 1 Default Desktop Icons on page 21 Section 1 3 2 Desktop Menu on page 21 Section 1 3 3 Bottom Panel on page 21 Section 1 3 4 Adding Applets and Applications to the Panel on page 22 1 3 1 Default Desktop Icons To remove an icon from the desktop simply drag it onto the trash can You cannot move the Home icon to the trash WARNING Be careful with this option If you move folder or file icons to the trash can the actual data is deleted If the icons only represent links to a file or to a directory only the links are deleted 1 3 2 Desktop Menu Right clicking an empty spot on the desktop displays a menu with various options You can click Create Folder to create a new folder You can create a launcher icon for an application with Create Launcher Provide the name of the application and the command for starting it then select an icon to represent it You can also change the desktop background and align desktop icons Figure 1 2 GNOME Desktop Menu Create Folder Create Launcher Create Document B Open Terminal Novell Services Clean Up by Name v Keep Aligned Change Desktop Background 1 3 3 Bottom Panel The desktop includes a panel across the bottom of the screen The bottom panel contains the Computer
152. ection describes the conventions layout and common tasks of the GNOME desktop as implemented in openSUSE 10 3 GNOME is an easy to use graphical interface that can be customized to meet your needs and personal preferences This section describes the default configuration of GNOME If you or your system administrator modified the defaults some aspects might be different such as appearance or keyboard shortcuts Section 1 1 Logging In and Selecting a Desktop on page 17 Section 1 2 Logging Out on page 19 Section 1 3 Desktop Basics on page 20 Section 1 4 Using the Main Menu on page 23 Section 1 5 Managing Folders and Files with Nautilus on page 27 Section 1 6 Accessing Network Resources on page 30 Section 1 7 Accessing Floppy Disks CDs or DVDs on page 33 Section 1 8 Finding Data on Your Computer or in the File System on page 33 Section 1 9 Moving Text Between Applications on page 37 Section 1 10 Printing on page 37 Section 1 11 Managing Internet Connections on page 39 Section 1 12 Exploring the Internet on page 39 Section 1 13 E Mail and Scheduling on page 39 Section 1 14 Opening or Creating Documents with OpenOffice org on page 40 Section 1 15 Controlling Your Desktop s Power Management on page 41 Section 1 16 Creating Displaying and Decompressing Archives on page 47 Section 1 17 Taking Screen Shots on p
153. ed to provide the following information 2a Select your authentication type in the Authentication list Or Click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported types Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work 2b Type your username in the Username field 2c Select if you want Evolution to remember your password Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 145 3 Select if you use a secure connection SSL 4 Click Forward Continue with Account Management Account Management Now that you have finished the e mail configuration process you need to give the account a name The name can be any name you prefer Type your account name on the Name field then click Forward Continue with Time Zone Time Zone In this step you need to select your time zone either on the map or select from the Time Zone drop down list When you have finished click Forward then click Apply Evolution opens with your new account created If you want to import e mail from another e mail client continue with Importing Mail Optional If not skip to Using Evolution An Overview on page 146 Importing Mail Optional If Evolution finds e mail or address files from another application it offers to import them Microsoft Outlook and versions of Outlook Express after version 4 use proprietary formats that Evolution cannot
154. ee Music Player Music Edit Playback Tools View Help K D N DE 4 Jit Music Library s Music Library Search Classical Podcasts Track Artist Title Album Time e Radio Q2 1 Various Rossini William Tell Ove Classical Treasures 25 3 02 8 Classical Trea 25 2 Various Strauss Blue Danube Classical Treasures 25 2 09 3 Various Ponchielli Dance of the Classical Treasures 25 1 59 4 Various Bizet Carmen Overture Classical Treasures 25 2 20 5 Various Schubert Serenade Classical Treasures 25 3 14 6 Various Schubert Marche Militaire Classical Treasures 25 1 41 7 Various J Strauss Radetsky Ma Classical Treasures 25 2 18 8 Various Chopin Nocturne Classical Treasures 25 2 07 9 Various Debussy Claire de Lune Classical Treasures 25 1 43 10 Various Schubert Unfinished S Classical Treasures 25 2 03 11 Various Mendelssohn Violin Con Classical Treasures 25 1 34 12 Various Tchaikovsky Waltz Of FI Classical Treasures 25 2 04 13 Various Liszt Hungarian Rhapsody Classical Treasures 25 2 01 14 Various Verdi Dance Of The Prie Classical Treasures 25 1 30 15 Various Strauss Voices of Spring Classical Treasures 25 1 18 16 Various Mozart Minuet in D Classical Treasures 25 0 22 17 Various Tchaikovsky Dance of th Classical Treasures 25 1 36 IGI I D Q 19 Items 37 minutes 25 seconds 17 2 Listening to Music To listen to music Banshee needs to know what is availab
155. efresh Rate Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Screen Resolution Figure 2 9 Screen Resolution Preferences Dialog Screen Resolution Preferences Default Settings Resolution 1280x1024 Refresh rate 77 Hz Rotation normal Options L1 Make default for this computer linux i7k9 only KESET The following table lists the screen resolution preferences you can modify Table 2 6 Screen Resolution Preferences Option Description Resolution Select the resolution in pixels to use for the screen Refresh Rate Select the refresh rate to use for the screen Rotation Select the rotation mode for your screen if you use a nonstandard monitor Make Default for This Computer Only Makes the screen resolution settings the default settings only for the computer that you are logged in to If you cannot find a setting you want you might need to use the Administrator Settings to reconfigure your graphics card and monitor settings See Setting Up Graphics Card and Monitor http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensuse103_startup data cha y2 hw graph html in the openSUSE 103 Start Up Guide for more information 2 1 12 Configuring a Touchpad Use this module to configure the behavior of a touchpad This module is only available on computers containing touchpads such as laptops In most cases the default behavior should remain unchanged Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt
156. elp and Information About OpenOffice org l l Evolution E Mail and Calendaring Starting Evolution for the First Time leen 4 1 1 Using the Setup Assistant llle eese Using Evolution An Overview llle 4 2 1 The Men Bar secsi sistini tedio i ni e ARR Era s Rad 4 2 2 The Shortcut Bareer a a a e a eee 423 E Mails iei na ee is teed ee ag ae Sd Pe Tes 42 4 TheCalendar 0 00 c cette 4 2 5 The Contacts Tool 0 00 0 cee eee Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot GNOME Pilot Configuration Tool 0 0 0 0 eee ee 5 1 1 The GNOME Pilot Setup Assistant 0 0 0 0 eee eee 5 1 2 Adding or Editing a Handheld Entry 2 5 1 3 Adding or Editing an Entry on the Device Settings Tab 5 1 4 Conduit Settings e 3 scu ra eek ee ens aoe EAS Ob pele eho The Pilot Applet 2 0 ese Seer A aati Po ale is ioe eet E 115 117 117 118 119 119 121 121 121 124 125 125 126 126 128 129 131 131 131 132 133 133 134 135 135 135 136 136 137 137 137 138 139 139 139 146 148 148 149 150 150 153 153 153 155 156 156 157 Contents 7 6 Instant Messaging with Pidgin 6 1 Supported Protocols llle eller 6 2 Adding an Account llllsllll sells 6 3 Managing Your Buddy List llle esses 6 3 1 Displaying Buddies in the Buddy List 6 3 2 AddingaBuddy
157. enSUSE includes the Novell edition of OpenOffice org The Novell edition includes several enhancements that are not yet included in the standard edition Calc Enhancements on page 118 Writer Enhancements on page 118 Font Improvements on page 119 OpenClipart on page 119 Multimedia on page 119 Performance Improvements on page 119 GroupWise Integration on page 119 Calc Enhancements The Novell edition of OpenOffice org Calc includes the following enhancements that are not found in the standard edition Improved Excel compatibility for certain functions for example ADDRESS OFFSE Improved ergonomics such as fixes for the standard edition s missing keybindings and the merge and center problem Support for R1C1 style addresses Interoperation between OpenOffice org Data Pilots and Microsoft PivotTables The ability to edit Data Pilots after they are created Addition of the GETPIVOTDATA function to help manipulate information from PivotTables Inclusion of a subset of Excel VBA macros that can be loaded and run in OpenOffice org as if they were native macros allowing a number of small accounting and management tools to be migrated to OpenOffice org without rewriting them to target StarBasic A simple linear solver that allows simple numerical analysis Writer Enhancements The Novell edition of OpenOffice org Writer includes the following enhancements that are not found in the standard
158. ename files inside directories Ability to burn or copy data or audio CDs or DVDs on the fly Automatic filtering for unwanted files for example hidden files broken recursive symlinks and files not conforming to the Joliet standard Multisession support Joliet extension support Ability to write or copy a CD DVD image to the hard drive Ability to check disc file integrity Ability to edit CD TEXT information Ability to search for audio files inside dropped folders Support for single session data DVDs Support for any kind of CD Ability to erase CDs and DVDs Ability to save load projects Ability to burn CD DVD images and cue files Song image and video previewer Nautilus integrations drag and drop cut and paste Ability to use files on a network 272 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Ability to search for files based on keywords or file type Ability to display a playlist and its contents playlists are automatically searched through Beagle All disc IO is done asynchronously to prevent the application from blocking The following sections give you a brief overview on using Brasero Section 19 2 1 Creating a Data CD or DVD on page 273 19 2 1 Creating a Data CD or DVD Section 19 2 2 Creating an Audio CD or DVD on page 274 Section 19 2 3 Copying a CD or DVD on page 275 Section 19 2 4 Burning an Existing CD DVD Image to Disc on page 276 Section 19 2 5 Erasing a CD or D
159. ense notice of the combined work In the combination you must combine any sections Entitled History in the various original documents forming one section Entitled History likewise combine any sections Entitled Acknowledgements and any sections Entitled Dedications You must delete all sections Entitled Endorsements 6 COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects 294 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide You may extract a single document from such a collection and distribute it individually under this License provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document 7 AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit When the Document is included in an aggregate thi
160. er fer TeGMP D que2 FeB a Gad nose 6 355 P Use the options on this tabbed page to specify how many sides your desktop cube has which keystroke and mouse button combination you can use to drag the cube and to configure edge flipping Customizing Your Settings 75 Figure 2 14 Desktop Cube Tabbed Page 3D Desktop Window Effects Desktop Cube Other Features Desktop Cube iv Wrap the desktop around a cube with 4 sides Drag the cube with the mouse by using O Shift i Control v Alt Super Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Unfold Control Alt Down Rotate Left Control Alt Left Rotate Left with Window Shift Control Alt Left Rotate Right Control Alt Right Rotate Right with Window Shift Control Alt Right Rotate To Face 1 Disabled Rotate To Face 1 with Window Disabled X Edge Flipping When edge flipping is enabled the cube automatically rotates to the next face when you bump the pointer against the edge of the screen Don t enable edge flipping Enable edge flipping only when dragging windows or icons Always enable edge flipping Delay before flipping J350 ms X Close Desktop Cube By default this option gives you four desktops on the faces of a virtual cube that you can rotate to access each desktop This provides extra space in which to arrange open applications and windows For example you can put an editor
161. er gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Select the keys you want to export 3 Click Key gt Export Public Key 4 Specify a filename and location for the exported key 5 Click Save to export the key You can also export keys to the clipboard in an ASCII armored block of text 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Select the keys you want to export 3 Click Edit gt Copy Public Key 9 6 Backing Up Keyrings You can back up your public and private keyrings to an archived file 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Key gt Back up Key Rings 3 Specify a filename with a valid archive extension then specify the location to save the archive You can choose any of the archive types that file roller supports 4 Click Save 9 7 Signing a Key Signing another person s key means that you are giving trust to that person Before signing a key carefully check the key s fingerprint to ensure that the key really belongs to that person Trust is an indication of how sure you are of a person s ability to correctly extend the web of trust When you see a key you have not signed the validity of that person s key is determined based on the signatures they have collected and how well you trust the people who have made those signatures By default an unknown key requires three signatures with marginal
162. er O Mail and Calendar Benua Banshee lt gt OpenOffice org Wri Music Player Word Processor Status F Spot ggg Nautilus Hard Drive Le m Dp l Photo Browser File Browser 60G Free 63G Total Network Wired More Applications Using ethernet eth0 Alternatively you can also start programs from the command line Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Gnome Terminal to open a dialog where you can enter a command to start the application The name of the command is often but not always the application name written in lowercase A 2 Managing Files To start the File Manager click your home folder icon on the desktop Figure A 3 File Manager user123 File Browser File Edit View Go Bookmarks Help gt amp g Li m Ba Forward Up Reload Home Computer Search B lt Buser123 graphics D a s bin Desktop Documents graphics EJ Desktop Z File System m E Network Servers public html 8 SU103Bet 001 Trash 5 items Free space 50 5 GB For more information about the File Manager see Section 1 5 Managing Folders and Files with Nautilus on page 27 282 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide A 3 Using the Command Line To run commands in a command line environment similar to a command prompt on Windows click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Gnome Terminal Figure A 4 Windows Command Prompt and Terminal Termin
163. er driver from a disk or visit the printer manufacturer s Web site to download the latest driver 7 Specify desired options such as a description or location for the printer in the Properties dialog box then click Close The installed printer appears in the Printers dialog box You can now print to the printer from any application 1 10 2 Monitoring Print Jobs in GNOME Modifying Printer Settings on page 38 Canceling Print Jobs on page 38 Deleting a Printer on page 39 Modifying Printer Settings 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Printers 2 Right click the printer you want to modify then click Properties 3 Modify the properties then click Close Canceling Print Jobs 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Printer 2 Double click the printer you sent the job to openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 Right click the print job then click Cancel If the print job does not appear in the list then the print job might have already finished printing Deleting a Printer 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Printer 2 Click Edit gt Become Administrator 3 Type the root password then click Continue 4 Right click the printer you want to delete then click Remove 1 11 Managing Internet Connections To surf the Internet or send and receive e mail messages you must have configured an Internet connection with YaST Depending on your environment open YaST then select whether to use NetworkM
164. er is controlled with the arrow keys of the number pad Use the sliders to set the maximum speed of the mouse pointer the acceleration time until the maximum speed is reached and the latency between the pressing of a key and the cursor movement 2 3 2 Configuring Assistive Technology Support To configure assistive technology options click Computer gt Control Center gt Personal gt Assistive Technology Preferences To enable the technologies first select Enable Assistive Technologies and then select the technologies you want to enable every time you log in Customizing Your Settings 99 Figure 2 34 Assistive Technology Preferences Dialog Assistive Technology Preferences Assistive Technologies QO AmdmeNpdos m V Enable assistive technologies Preferences e A Keyboard Accessibility A Accessible Login Geb wy close and Log Out X Close The gok package must be installed in order to get on screen keyboard support and the gnopernicus and gnome mag packages must be installed in order to get screenreading and magnifying capabilities If these packages are not installed on your system they are installed by default during installation install them with the following procedure Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt YaST Type the root password then click OK Click Software gt Software Management kh OQ N Select Selection from th
165. eral application windows populate the desktop the active one by default is the one last clicked Change this behavior by activating Select Windows When the Mouse Moves over Them If desired activate Raise Selected Window after an Interval and adjust the latency time with the slider This raises a windows a short time after the window receives focus Application windows can be shaded rolled up by double clicking the title bar leaving only the title bar visible This saves space on the desktop and is the default behavior It is also possible to set windows to maximize when the title bar is double clicked Using the radio buttons select a modifier key to press for moving a window Ctrl Alt Hyper or the Windows key 2 3 Personal Personal settings include the following Section 2 3 1 Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Settings on page 97 Section 2 3 2 Configuring Assistive Technology Support on page 99 Section 2 3 3 Changing Your Password on page 100 Section 2 3 4 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts on page 101 2 3 1 Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Settings GNOME provides keyboard settings designed to help users with motion impairments use the GNOME desktop Some of the available settings include How long a key is pressed and held before being recognized as valid input Whether the keyboard can be used as a mouse Customizing Your Settings 97 Whether key combinations that use Alt Control and Shif
166. ers and other typical documents For a more information see Chapter 3 The OpenOffice org Office Suite on page 117 or view the help in any OpenOffice org program openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 1 15 Controlling Your Desktop s Power Management GNOME Power Manager is a session daemon for the GNOME desktop that manages the power settings for your laptop or desktop computer GNOME Power Manager is usually started automatically when GNOME starts but you can manually start GNOME Power Manager by using the following command gnome power manager verbose no daemon Section 1 15 1 GNOME Power Manager Notification Messages on page 41 Section 1 15 2 Viewing Power Statistics on page 42 Section 1 15 3 Modifying Power Management Preferences on page 44 Section 1 15 4 Session and System Idle Times on page 46 1 15 1 GNOME Power Manager Notification Messages The GNOME Power Manager displays the following notifications under the specified conditions AC Adapter Unplugged on page 41 Fully Charged on page 41 Power Low on page 42 Power Critical on page 42 Suspend Failure on page 42 AC Adapter Unplugged Figure 1 15 GNOME Power Manager Notification When AC Adapter is Removed Power Information x The AC Power has been unplugged The S system is now using battery power You can disable this notification by changing the GConf key apps gnome power manager notify ac adapter Fully
167. ery power you can configure the settings on both tabs The settings you choose are in effect no matter which power source you use 104 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 Use the sliders to set the amount of inactive time that passes before the display and computer go into sleep mode When the display is in sleep mode the computer continues to run When the computer is in sleep mode power to the display and hard disk is shut off and the computer uses only the power needed to maintain the contents of RAM 4 Click Close The options you selected go into effect immediately Setting General Power Options To set general power options click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Power Management then click the General tab On this tab you can choose The sleep type to use when the computer is inactive How and when the Power icon displays 2 4 6 Setting Preferred Applications The Preferred Applications module allows you to specify which applications to use for various common tasks To change any of these settings 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Preferred Applications 2 Click the tab for the type of application you want to set 3 Select one of the available applications from the Choose menu or enter the command used to start the application 4 Click Close The changes take effect immediately 2 4 7 Setting Session Sharing Preferences The Remote Desktop Preference dialog box lets you sha
168. es on page 230 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 225 Section 15 5 6 Layers on page 230 Section 15 5 7 Image Modes on page 231 Section 15 5 8 Special Effects on page 231 15 5 1 Changing the Image Size After an image is scanned or a digital photograph is loaded from a camera it is often necessary to modify the size for display on a Web page or for printing Images can easily be made smaller either by scaling them down or by cropping or cutting them Making an image larger is more difficult Because of the nature of pixel graphics quality is lost when an image is made larger You should save a copy of your original image before scaling or cropping Cropping an Image Cropping an image works like cutting the edges from a piece of paper Select the crop tool from the toolbox it resembles a scalpel or with Tools gt Transform Tools gt Crop amp Resize Click a starting corner and drag to outline the area to keep A small window opens with information about the starting point and the size of the selected area Adjust these values by clicking and dragging a corner of the crop box or by adjusting the values in the window From Selection adjusts the crop to fit the current selection selections are explained in Selecting Parts of Images on page 227 Auto Shrink makes the crop smaller based on color changes in the image Click Cancel to abort the crop Click Crop to crop the image The results of Resize are identical to
169. es and fields Speed Slow umm y Fast Type to test settings Y Help A Accessibility X Close You can modify any of the following keyboard preferences Customizing Your Settings 57 58 Table 2 1 Keyboard Preferences Option Key Presses Repeat When Key is Held Down Description Enables keyboard repeat The action associated with a key is performed repeatedly when you press and hold that key For example if you press and hold a character key the character is typed repeatedly Use the Delay option to select the delay from the time you press a key to the time that the action repeats Use the Speed option to set the speed at which the action is repeated Cursor Blinks in Text Boxes and Fields Lets the cursor blink in fields and text boxes Use the slider to specify the speed at which the cursor blinks Type to Test Settings The test area is an interactive interface that lets you see how the keyboard settings affect the display as you type Type text in the test area to test the effect of your settings You can also click the Accessibility button to start the Keyboard accessibility preference tool Configuring Keyboard Layout Preferences Use the Layouts tabbed page to set your keyboard layout Figure 2 3 Keyboard Preferences Dialog Layouts Page a Keyboard Preferences ix Keyboard Layouts Layout Options Typing Break Keyboard model Microsoft Natur
170. es regular expression Searches for files that contain the specified regular expression in the directory path or filename Type the regular expression in the text box provided Regular expressions are special text strings used to describe a search pattern For more information see Regular Expressions info http www regular expressions info Show hidden and backup files Includes hidden and backup files in the search Follow symbolic links Follows symbolic links when searching for files Include other filesystems Searches in directories that are not in the same file system as the start directory 6 Specify the required search information for the search option 7 Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for each search option you want to apply To remove a search option from the current search click the Remove button next to the option 8 Click Find Using the Search Results List You can use the Search Results list to open or delete a file found during a search or you can save the search results to a file 36 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 1 13 Search Results List 194 Files Found Search for Files a Name contains conf v Look in folder etc P Select more options Search results 194 files found Name Folder Size 4 __ hplip conf etc hp 197 __ xorg conf etc X11 4 _ root conf etc gpm 1 __ twiddler conf etc gpm 4 K D gt ue
171. ew of the file and information such as the title path and date the file was last modified or accessed Use the Search menu to limit your search to files in a specific location such as your address book or Web pages or to display only a specific type of file in your results list The Sort menu lets you sort the items in your results list according to name relevance or the date the file was last modified For more information about using the GNOME desktop s search function see Searching with Beagle page 185 1 4 2 Main Menu Tabs You can determine which icons appear in the main menu by clicking the Applications Documents or Places tabs Favorite Applications on page 25 Recent Applications on page 26 Recent Documents on page 26 Recent Places on page 26 Favorite Applications By default Favorite Applications shows icons for several commonly used applications Use this view to show the applications you use most often To add an item to your Favorite Applications 1 Click Computer gt More Applications 2 Right click the application you want to add Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 25 26 3 Select Add to Favorites The selected application is added to your Favorite Applications To remove an item from your Favorite Applications 1 Click Computer 2 Make sure that your Favorite Applications appear in the main menu If Favorite Applications does not appear on the main menu click Applications
172. ewing bookmarks or the browsing history Extensions can add new ways to use the sidebar as well To display the Sidebar select View gt Sidebar and select the desired contents 12 2 Finding Information There are two ways to find information in Firefox the search bar and the find bar The search bar looks for pages and the find bar looks for things on the current page Section 12 2 1 Finding Information on the Web on page 204 Section 12 22 Installing a Different Search Engine on page 204 Section 12 2 3 Searching in the Current Page on page 204 12 2 1 Finding Information on the Web Firefox has a search bar that can access different engines like Google Yahoo or Amazon For example if you want to find information about SUSE by using the current engine click in the search bar type SUSE and press Enter The results appear in your window To choose your search engine click the icon to the left of the search bar A menu opens with a list of available search engines 12 2 2 Installing a Different Search Engine If you favorite search engine is not listed Firefox gives you the possibility to select it 1 Establish an Internet connection 2 Click the icon to the left of the search bar 3 Select Manage Search Engines from the menu 4 Click Get more search engines 5 Firefox displays a Web page with available search engines You can choose from Wikipedia IMDB and others Click the desired search plug in 6 In
173. f Draw is the ability to open it from other OpenOffice org modules so you can create a drawing that is automatically imported into your document 1 From an OpenOffice org module for example from Writer click Insert gt Object gt OLE Object gt OpenOffice org 2 3 Drawing gt OK This opens Draw 2 Create your drawing 3 Click in your document outside the Draw frame The drawing is automatically inserted into your document 3 7 Creating Mathematical Formulas with Math It is usually difficult to include complex mathematical formulas in your documents The OpenOffice org Math equation editor lets you create formulas using operators functions and formatting assistants You can then save those formulas as objects that can be imported into other documents Math functions can be inserted into other OpenOffice org documents like any other graphic object NOTE Math is not a calculator The functions it creates are graphical objects Even if they are imported into Calc these functions cannot be evaluated The OpenOffice org Office Suite 137 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org OpenOffice org contains extensive online help In addition a large community of users and developers support it As a result it is seldom hard to find help or information about using OpenOffice org The following table shows some of the places where you can go for additional information Because Web sites often close or their content ch
174. f selected images Right click an image select Attach Tag then select the appropriate tag for this image To attach a tag to a group of images click the first one then press Shift and select the other ones without releasing the Shift key Right click to display the tag menu then select the matching category 238 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide You can also use the following methods to tag photos Drag and drop a photo onto a tag Drag and drop a tag onto the photo Use the options on the Zags menu and the Edit menu Select a photo then press t to display the Tags entry bar The first photo you associate with a tag is used for that tag s icon To edit a tag s name parent tag or icon right click the tag then select Edit Tag You can change a tag s parent by dragging and dropping it where you want You can also edit the name of a tag by selecting it and pressing F2 After your photos have been tagged you can browse your collection by tags Using our earlier example clicking People gt Family limits the displayed collection to the photos tagged Family Searching your collection by tag is also possible through Find gt Find Selected Tag The result of your search is displayed in the thumbnail overview window Removing tags from single images or groups of images works similarly to attaching them The tag editing functions are also accessible on the Zags menu in the top menu bar 16 5 Searching and Finding Photos As men
175. f you use the PHP software known as Gallery http gallery sourceforge net you can post your photos to your existing album Ensure that the Remote module in your Gallery installation is enabled Site Admin gt Plugins Get More Plugins gt Remote PennAve http pennave sourceforge net is another dynamic photo gallery application It is designed to be used in conjunction with F Spot to organize and manage your photos 1 Select the photos you want to export 2 Click File gt Export gt Export to Web Gallery Photos Gallery Gallery gt 4 Adal Album Export to Album gt i Open album in browser when done uploading Style _ Resizeto 400 lt pixels Autorotate Export titles and comments xX Cancel ok 3 Select a gallery you want to export your images to or click Add to add a new gallery F Spot establishes a connection to the Web location entered for your web gallery 4 Select the album you want to export the images to then specify whether to scale the images automatically and export titles and comments 5 Click OK 16 6 2 Exporting Photos to CD 1 Select the photos you want to burn to CD 2 Click File gt Export gt Export to CD then click OK F Spot copies the files and opens the Write to Disc dialog box Managing Your Digital Image Collection 241 Write to Disc Information Write disc to CORW DVD CRX830E e Disc name Personal Data Sep 10 2007 Data
176. ffice org Format OpenOffice org can read edit and save documents in a number of formats It is not necessary to convert files from those formats to the OpenOffice org format to use those files However if you want to convert the files you can do so To convert a number of documents such as when first switching to OpenOffice org do the following 1 Select File gt Wizards gt Document Converter 2 Choose the file format from which to convert There are several StarOffice and Microsoft Office formats available 3 Click Next 4 Specify where OpenOffice org should look for templates and documents to convert and in which directory the converted files should be placed IMPORTANT Documents retrieved from a Windows partition are usually in a subdirectory of windows 5 Make sure that all other settings are appropriate then click Next 6 Review the summary of the actions to perform then start the conversion by clicking Convert The amount of time needed for the conversion depends on the number of files and their complexity For most documents conversion does not take very long Sharing Files with Users of Other Office Suites OpenOffice org is available for a number of operating systems This makes it an excellent tool when a group of users frequently need to share files and do not use the same system on their computers When sharing documents with others you have several options If the recipient needs to be able to edit th
177. folders and sections It resembles Using the Firefox Bookmark Manager on page 205 Figure 12 2 Using the Firefox Bookmark Manager File Edit View Help LJ B Mt al New Bookmark New Folder New Separator Move Properties Delete Search v Bookmarks Name Location Description Bo MECCA gt sus openSUSE http www opensuse org b Entert N SUSE Linux http www novell com p b News N Novell Lin http www novell comli b Inter N SUSE Linux http www novell com c b Refer N SUSE Linux http www novell com s b Maps N SUSE Linux http www novell com p b Shop P B Entertainment gt 3Peop gt E News gt S3 Intemet Search b D Reference 6 object s To open the bookmark manager click Bookmark gt Organize Bookmarks A window opens and displays your bookmarks With New Folder create a new folder with a name and a description If you need a new bookmark click New Bookmark This lets you insert the name location keywords and also a description The keyword is a shortcut to your bookmark If you need your newly created bookmark in the sidebar check Load this bookmark in the sidebar Browsing with Firefox 205 12 3 2 Importing Bookmarks From Other Browsers If you used a different browser in the past you probably want to use your preferences and bookmarks in Firefox too At the moment you can import from Netscape 4 x 6 7 Mo
178. full screen view Seek and volume controls Playlists Complete keyboard navigation Video thumbnailer for GNOME Nautilus properties tab To start the Totem Movie Player click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Totem Movie Player Section 18 1 Using the Totem Movie Player on page 263 Section 18 2 Modifying Totem Movie Player Preferences on page 267 18 1 Using the Totem Movie Player When you start Totem Movie Player the following window is displayed Figure 18 1 Totem Movie Player Start Up Window i Totem Movie Player Movie Edit View Go Sound Help gt Sidebar Stopped 0 00 0 00 Section 18 1 1 Opening a Video or Audio File on page 264 Playing Movie Files 263 Section 18 1 2 Opening a Video or Audio File by URI Location on page 264 Section 18 1 3 Playing a DVD VCD or CD on page 264 Section 18 1 4 Seeking Through Movies or Songs on page 265 Section 18 1 5 Changing the Zoom Factor on page 265 Section 18 1 6 Showing or Hiding Controls on page 266 Section 18 1 7 Managing Playlists on page 266 Section 18 1 8 Choosing Subtitles on page 266 Section 18 1 9 Taking Screen Shots on page 266 18 1 1 Opening a Video or Audio File 1 To start the Totem Movie Player click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Totem Movie Player 2 Click Movie gt Open 3 Select the file
179. g Figure 12 3 Installing Firefox Extensions m Seems Themes 5 Beagle Indexer 0 6 Index webpages you visit using Beagle DOM Inspector 1 8 1 2pre Inspects the structure and properties of a window and its contents ee Posie NZZN Get Extensions 12 5 2 Changing Themes If you do not like the standard look and feel of Firefox install a new theme Themes do not change the functionality only the appearance of the browser When installing a theme Firefox asks for confirmation first Allow the installation or cancel it After a successful installation you can enable the new theme 1 Click Tools gt Add ons gt Themes 2 In the new dialog that appears click Get Themes If you already installed a theme find it in the list as in Installing Firefox Themes on page 208 Browsing with Firefox 207 Figure 12 4 Installing Firefox Themes et ag Extensions BiU e Firefox default 2 0 The default theme Tango Icons 148 e Tango Icons for Mozilla Firefox 1d 9995 Get Themes 3 A new window appears with the Firefox Add ons https addons mozilla org Web site 4 Choose a theme and click Install Now 5 Confirm the download and installation 6 After downloading the theme select the theme in the list of themes then click Use Theme 7 Close the window and restart Firefox If a theme is installed you can always switch to a different theme without restarting by clicking Tools gt Add ons gt Themes then Us
180. g Notes on page 191 Section 11 2 Searching All Notes on page 192 Section 11 3 Linking Notes on page 193 Section 11 4 Accessing Your Notes on page 194 Section 11 5 Formatting Text in Notes on page 194 Section 11 6 Exporting Notes to HTML on page 196 Section 11 7 Deleting Notes on page 196 Section 11 8 Printing Notes on page 197 Section 11 9 Configuring Tomboy Preferences on page 197 11 1 Creating Notes To create a new note click the Tomboy Notes icon in your GNOME Panel then select Create New Note Taking Notes with Tomboy 191 Figure 11 1 A New Tomboy Note l New Note 3 a amp D e ws v Search Link Text Tools Delete New Note 3 Describe your new note here To edit the note click the content area then use the keyboard to add and remove content The first line of the note holds the title By default this is populated with the text New Note You can change the title by clicking the line and using the keyboard to change the title By default focus is given to the content area upon creation of a new note so you can immediately start editing the note without clicking the content area For more information on formatting the contents of a note see Section 11 5 Formatting Text in Notes on page 194 Your note is saved automatically You can then organize the notes you create by linking related notes and ideas together Fore m
181. g Preferences The Editing tabbed page lets you set preferences related to editing notes Figure 11 4 Tomboy Editing Preferences Tomboy Preferences Editing Hotkeys Synchronization Add ins M Spell check while typing Misspellings will be underlined in red with correct spelling suggestions shown in the context menu O Highlight WikiWords Enable this option to highlight words ThatLookLikeThis Clicking the word will create a note with that name O Use custom font gt Close The Editing preferences include the following Spell check while typing Underlines misspellings in red and provides suggestions in the right click context menu Highlight WikiWords Creates links for phrases ThatLookLikeThis Clicking the link creates a new note with the title corresponding to the link text Use custom font Sets a custom font to be used in your notes If this option is disabled the default system font is used Taking Notes with Tomboy 197 11 9 2 Hotkey Preferences The Hotkeys tabbed page lets you set global key combinations to perform different functions in Tomboy To set key combinations the Listen for Hotkeys check box must be selected Press Alt H to toggle this option on or off Figure 11 5 Tomboy Hotkey Preferences Tomboy Preferences Editing Hotkeys Synchronization Add ins M Listen for Hotkeys Hotkeys allow you to quickly access your notes from
182. ge 259 Section 17 4 4 Synchronizing Your Library on page 260 17 4 1 Playing Music from Your Digital Audio Player To play music from your digital audio player simply plug your player into your system After your system recognizes your device an icon is displayed in the left panel in Banshee Select the icon to display the music on your device in the right panel Double click the song you want to listen to 258 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 17 11 Banshee MP3 Playback from an iPod Mini I Still Haven t Found What Iim Looking For U2 Music Edit Playback Tools View Help am em Still Haven t Found What I m Looking For 1 09 of 4 39 1 by U2 from The Joshua Tree K9 00 Music Library 5 Banshee Test iPod Podcasts S mj Track Artist e Radio 22 8 3 Bob Dylan 8 6 Pink Floyd wj 4 Pink Floyd 1 U2 gt 2 U2 3 u2 8 12 The Doors 8 10 Everclear 8 9 Marilyn Manson 8 12 Nirvana 1 Pink Floyd 2 Pink Floyd 12 U2 Write CD F Synchronize iPod Disk Usage re MB of 1 78 GB Search Title Album Time Rating DRM Mr Tambourin The Best of Bob Dylan 5 26 Xe DRM Comfortably N The Wall 6 24 Aiii DRM Wish You Wer Wish You Were Here 5 34 Ik Where the Streets Ha The Joshua Tree 5 37 Aiki I Still Haven t Found The Joshua Tree 4 39 With or Without You The Joshua Tree 456 ooo DRM The End Greatest Hits 6 30 oe DRM White Men in So Much for the After 3
183. go to www novell com documentation feedback html and enter your comments there Documentation Updates For the latest version of this documentation see the openSUSE 10 3 documentation Web site http www novell com documentation opensuse 1 03 index html Additional Documentation The GNOME User Guide and documentation for each component can be accessed through the Help Center To access the Novell Help Center click Help on the top panel of the desktop and then click User s Manual For documentation about the KDE Desktop see the openSUSE 10 3 KDE User Guide http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensusel03 kdeuser data book opensuse kdeuser html For information about installing and administering openSUSE see the openSUSE 10 3 Reference Guide http www novell com documentation opensuse103 opensuse103_reference data book opensuse reference html About This Guide 13 Documentation Conventions In Novell documentation a greater than symbol gt is used to separate actions within a step and items in a cross reference path A trademark symbol Cc TM etc denotes a Novell trademark An asterisk denotes a third party trademark 14 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide GNOME Desktop Chapter 1 Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop on page 17 Chapter 2 Customizing Your Settings on page 55 GNOME Desktop 15 16 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop This s
184. group You can also use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change an item s location in the menu Creating New Separators Separators serve as visual cues to make it easier to find items in menus NOTE Separators are not used in the current version of the GNOME menu Adding a separator has no effect However if you install and use an older version of the GNOME menu you can use separators Customizing Your Settings 93 94 To create a separator 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 Select the item above the space where you want the separator to appear For help locating an item see Finding Menu Items on page 92 3 Click New Separator The new separator appears beneath the selected item in the tems list You can drag the separator to a new location as you would any other menu item To delete a separator see Deleting Items from the Main Menu on page 94 Showing or Hiding Menu Items 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu 2 Locate the item in the tems list 3 Select the box next to the item to show the item Or Deselect the box next to the item to hide the item 4 Click Close When you hide an item it remains in the tems list and can be shown at another time if you decide you want it to appear in the menu To delete an item from the tems list see Deleting Items from the Main Menu on page 94 Deleting Items from the Main Menu Ther
185. he desired mouse pointer The following table lists the mouse pointer preferences you can modify Option Description Cursor Theme Displays the available cursor themes Highlight the Pointer When You Press Enables a mouse pointer animation when you press and Ctrl release Ctrl This feature can help you locate the mouse pointer Customizing Your Settings 67 8 Click Close gt Save As The Save Theme to Disk dialog is displayed 9 Type a name and a short description for the custom theme in the dialog then click Save The custom theme now appears in your list of available themes Installing a New Theme You can add a theme to the list of available themes The new theme must be an archive file that is tarred and zipped a tar gz file Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Theme tab Click Install Browse to the location of the theme archive file select the archive then click Open kh O N Click Apply New Theme to apply the theme or Click Keep Current Theme to continue using the currently applied theme Deleting a Theme You can delete controls options window frame options or icons options 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Appearance then click the Theme tab 2 Select the theme you want to delete 3 Click Delete Changing the Desktop Background The desktop background is the image or color that is applied to your desktop You can
186. he document as it will appear online or you can directly edit the HTML code Click File gt New gt HTML Document Click the arrow at the bottom of the Formatting and Styles window Select HTML Styles Create your HTML document using the styles to tag your text Click File gt Save As Select the location where you want to save your file name the file and select HTML Document html from the Filter list 7 Click OK ona fF WON If you prefer to edit HTML code directly or if you want to see the HTML code created when you edited the HTML file as a Writer document click View gt HTML Source In HTML Source mode the Formatting and Styles list is not available NOTE The first time you switch to HTML Source mode you are prompted to save the file as HTML if you have not already done so 3 3 Creating and Using Spreadsheets with Calc Calc is the OpenOffice org spreadsheet application Create a new spreadsheet with File gt New gt Spreadsheet or open one with File gt Open Calc can read and save in Microsoft Excel s format so it is easy to exchange spreadsheets with Excel users NOTE Calc can process many VBA macros in Excel documents however support for VBA macros is not complete When opening an Excel spreadsheet that makes heavy use of macros you might discover that some do not work In the spreadsheet cells enter fixed data or formulas A formula can manipulate data from other cells to generate a value f
187. he fields is defined correctly You can change the field name type whether the entry is required and the maximum length of the field the number of characters that can be entered in that field For this example leave the settings as they are 8 Click Next 9 Click Create a primary key click Automatically add a primary key click Auto value then click Next 10 Accept the default name for the table select Create a form based on this table then click Finish 11 Continue with Creating a Form 3 5 3 Creating a Form Next create the form to use when entering data into your address book 1 Inthe Form Wizard click the double right arrow to move all available fields to the Fields in the form list then click Next twice 2 Select how you want to arrange your form then click Next 3 Select the option to use the form to display all data and leave all of the check boxes empty then click Next 4 Apply a style and field border then click Next For this example accept the default selections 5 Name the form select the Modify the form option then click Finish 6 Continue with Section 3 5 4 Modifying the Form on page 136 3 5 4 Modifying the Form After the form has been defined you can modify the appearance of the form to suit your preferences 1 Close the form that opened when you finished the previous step 2 Inthe main window for your database right click the form you want to modify there should be only one optio
188. hed to your computer Q For dialing in to regular phone networks a SIP account is required For a list of providers see the VoIP Providers List http www voipproviderslist com Free trials are provided by the VoIP Buster http www voipbuster com QO For video conferencing a Web cam is connected to your computer 7 2 Configuring Ekiga On first start Ekiga opens a configuration assistant that requests all data needed to configure your instance of Ekiga 1 Start Ekiga by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Ekiga Softphone 2 Click Forward provide your first name and surname then click Forward 3 Enter your ekiga net account data or choose not to sign up to ekiga net http ekiga net To add other accounts later on configure them using Edit gt Accounts 4 Click Forward select a connection type then click Forward 5 Determine the type of firewall you will use to enable you to perform calls with Ekiga then click Forward 6 Select the audio manager to use then click Forward 7 Select the audio input and output devices click Test Settings to test your settings then click Forward 8 Accept the V4L video manager selection then click Forward 9 Select the video input device and test your settings then click Forward Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga 163 10 View the summary of your settings then click Apply Ekiga allows you to maintain multiple accounts To configure an additional account
189. hen click the Remove button or press the Delete key Drag files from the area on the left 5 Click Burn to open the Disc burning setup dialog box 6 Specify a drive to write to Click Properties to select the burning speed and other preferences such as whether or not the disc is ejected after burning is complete 7 Optional To create a multisession CD or DVD select Leave the disc open to add other files later Multisession discs can be used to add files in more than one burning session As long as the disc contains enough space you can append as many sessions as you like 8 Click Burn 19 2 3 Copying a CD or DVD 1 To start Brasero click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Brasero Disc Burning Application 2 Inthe main Brasero window click Disc copy The CD DVD Copy Options dialog box opens Type no disc Size E Contents Status Select a drive to write to CDRW DVD CRX830E Pr Type no disc Size E Contents Status amp Cancel Copy Burning CDs and DVDs 275 3 Specify the source drive you want to copy 4 Specify a drive to write to To copy the disc to the file system select File image from the Select a drive to write to drop down list then click Properties to specify a location and image type 5 Click Copy 19 2 4 Burning an Existing CD DVD Image to Disc 1 To start Brasero click Computer gt More Applications gt Mult
190. hen it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License http www fsf org licenses 1gpl html instead of this License B 2 GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 2 November 2002 Copyright C 2000 2001 2002 Free Sof
191. hey are opened Runs an executable file when you open the file An executable file is a text file than can execute that is a shell script View executable text files when they are opened Displays the contents of an executable file when you open the file Ask each time Displays a dialog when you click an executable file The dialog asks whether you want to execute the file or display the file Ask before emptying the Trash or deleting files Displays a confirmation message before the Trash is emptied or before files are deleted Include a Delete command that bypasses Trash Adds a Delete menu item to the Edit menu and the pop up menu that is displayed when you right click a file folder or desktop object When you select an item and click Delete the item is immediately deleted from your file system Display To configure the way icon captions and dates appear in the File Manager click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or Edit gt Preferences from Nautilus then click the Display tab Figure 2 23 File Manager Display Dialog Box File Management Preferences Views Behavior Display List Columns Preview Icon Captions Choose the order of information to appear beneath icon names More information will appear when Zooming in closer ere J Size t Date Modified 2 Date Format Tue 21 Aug 2007 02 24 02 PM MDT lt gt
192. hopping Feb 20 11 56 AM Drafts CustomerCare Lowes Welcome to Lowes com Feb 20 11 45 AM Junk David Carlisle lt davidca Need Mont s email Feb 22 12 12 PM Outbox 3 Bl Sent From The Evolution Team lt evolution novell com gt l To Evolution Users lt evolution novell com gt l Trash Subject Welcome to Evolution gt Work Date 14 March 2007 12 00 00 0000 06 00 MDT Search Folders CZ Mai The Evolution Team is proud to welcome you to Evolution LS a complete system for managing your communications and Am personal information Contacts 88 Calendars Getting Started On the left of the Evolution window is the side bar with shortcuts to all your mail folders PET Below that you will find buttons for your calendars contacts tasks mail and memos I For a complete guide to using Evolution select Table of Contents in the Help menu or e Tasks press the F1 key Menu Bar The menu bar gives you access to most Evolution features Folder List The folder list gives you a list of the available folders for each account To see the contents of a folder click the folder name and the contents are displayed in the e mail list Toolbar The toolbar gives you fast and easy access to the frequently used features in each component Search Tool The search tool lets you search your e mail contacts calendar and tasks t
193. hough you might not be prompted to swipe your finger in all cases Logging in to GDM or a login shell Unlocking your screen on the GNOME desktop Starting YaST and the YaST modules in the GNOME control center Starting an application with root permission sudo or gnomesu Changing to a different user identity with su or su username 1 20 1 Registering a Fingerprint Fingerprints can either be registered with YaST or from the command line This section contains instructions on registering fingerprints from the command line Currently only one fingerprint per user can be registered For more detailed information about configuring and using fingerprint authentication see Using Fingerprint Authentication http en opensuse org 1 Open a shell and log in as root 2 Runtf tool help to view the available options 3 To register a fingerprint for a certain user enter tf tool add user login tf tool prompts the user to swipe a finger until three readable fingerprints have been gathered The user s fingerprint data is then stored to etc pam thinkfinger login bir 4 If you want to use fingerprint authentication for starting YaST or the YaST modules in the GNOME control center register a fingerprint for root too 5 To verify an existing fingerprint for a certain user enter tf tool verify user login 6 Let the user swipe a finger tf tool compares the fingerprint to the print stored for this user and provides a message
194. ialog box lets you control the LCD brightness when your system is on AC or battery power the idle time for the screen power down and suspend action the actions to perform when the laptop lid is closed and the notification area icon policy To access Power Management Preferences click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Power Management On AC Power Preferences on page 44 On Battery Power Preferences on page 45 General Preferences on page 45 On AC Power Preferences Use the options on the On AC Power dialog box to automatically put your computer to sleep when it has been inactive for a specified amount of time When your computer is asleep it is turned on but in a low power mode It takes less time for a computer to wake up from sleep than it does for the computer to start up after being turned off You can also set only the display to sleep If your computer is in the middle of a task for example burning a DVD that you want to finish while you are away set only the display to sleep Figure 1 21 GNOME Power Manager On AC Power Preferences Power Management Preferences On AC Power General Actions Put computer to sleep when inactive for z Display Put display to sleep when inactive for FAREY 5 48 minutes 44 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide On Battery Power Preferences Use the options on the On Battery Power dialog box to automatically put your computer
195. ically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it GNU Licenses 287 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
196. ick the left panel then click New Master 4 Edit the slide master until it has the desired look 5 Click Close Master View or View gt Normal to return to Normal View TIP When you have created all of the slide masters you want to use in your presentations you can save them in an Impress template Then any time you want to create presentations that use those slide masters open a new presentation with your template Applying a Slide Master Slide masters can be applied to selected slides or to all slides in the presentation 1 Open your presentation then click View gt Master gt Slide Master 2 Optional If you want to apply the slide master to multiple slides but not to all slides select the slides that you want to use that slide master To select multiple slides in the Slides Pane Ctrl click the slides to use that slide master 3 Inthe Task Pane right click the master page you want to apply If you do not see the Task Pane click View gt Task Pane 4 Apply the slide master by clicking one of the following Apply to All Slides Applies the selected slide master to all slides in the presentation Apply to Selected Slides Applies the selected slide master to the current slide or to any slides you select before applying the slide master For example if you want to apply a different slide master to the 134 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide first slide in a presentation select that slide then change to Master View and
197. icon A list of UNIX shares available to you is displayed To access Windows shares double click the Windows Network icon The Windows shares available to you are displayed For more information see Chapter 8 Accessing Network Resources on page 169 Adding a Network Place 1 Click Computer gt Nautilus File Browser gt File gt Connect to Server Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 31 Connect to Server Service type Public FTP Server Optional information Bort Folder Name to use for connection F Qu Browse Network X Cancel Connect 2 Select a service type then specify the required information for your type of service 3 Specify the name you want displayed for this connection then click Connect An icon for the network place is added to the desktop 1 6 3 Sharing Directories From Your Computer You can make directories on your computer available to other users on your network Enabling Sharing on page 32 Sharing a Directory on page 32 Enabling Sharing Use YaST to enable sharing on your computer In order to enable sharing you must have root privileges and be a member of a workgroup or domain 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt YaST 2 In YaST click Network Services gt Windows Domain Membership 3 In the Windows Domain Membership module click Allow Users to Share Their Directories 4
198. ideo The GStreamer Properties application lets you set which audio and video plug ins you want to use for streaming multimedia To open this application click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt GStreamer Properties In most cases you should use the default selections However if you want to select other plug ins select the plug in you want from the menus The Audio tab lists the plug ins for audio input and output The Video tab lists the video plug ins Click Close when you are finished The system is immediately configured to use the selected plug Ins 2 4 3 Configuring Language Settings openSUSE can be configured to use many languages The language setting determines the language of dialogs and menus and can also determine the keyboard and clock layout You can set the following language settings Primary language Whether the keyboard language setting should depend on the primary language Whether the time zone should depend on the primary language Secondary languages NOTE You must have administrator root privileges to configure language settings To configure your language settings 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Language 2 Conditional If you are not logged in as root or a user with administrator privileges enter the root password If you do not know the root password contact your system administrator You cannot continue without the root password 3 Specify
199. if the fingerprints match As soon as the user s fingerprint has been successfully registered the user can choose to authenticate with either fingerprint or password To remove a user s fingerprint delete the appropriate fingerprint file for this user etc pam thinkfinger login bir With tf tool acquire you can do a test run with tf tool The fingerprint is stored as tmp test bir and can be verified with tf tool verify 1 20 2 Additional Information Find the project home page at http thinkfinger sourceforge net http thinkfinger sourceforge net For more technical details refer to usr share doc packages libthinkfinger README in your installed system There are also man pages available for pam thinkfinger and tf tool Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 53 54 1 21 Obtaining Software Updates When you connect to the Internet the openSUSE Updater automatically checks whether software updates for you system are available An openSUSE Updater applet in the system tray of you panel informs you about the availability of updates and lets you easily install them with just a few clicks The applet icon changes color and appearance depending on the availability of updates for your system For detailed information on how to install software updates with openSUSE Updater and how to configure openSUSE Updater see Section 3 7 Keeping the System Up to date http www novell com documentation open
200. iferea Liferea Program Feeds Items View Search Help t v S E amp v Example Feeds 34 Date Headline v Novell 34 E 03 06 2007 01 39 56 AM RSVP for the Annual GroupWise Movie at Bra Novell Cool Solut E 03 05 2007 11 22 19 AM config sh for Linux Novell Technical 03 03 2007 09 25 04 AM NDSRC Quunread 34 03 02 2007 09 12 54 AM TimeZone Update SPK Q Flagged EJ 03 02 2007 04 25 03 AM CPK SPK database FE 03 02 2007 04 04 07 AM BrainShare 2007 Movie will be E 03 02 2007 03 31 06 AM E amin mn an nm an eee Feed Novell Cool Solutions Item TimeZone Update SPK This SPK updates the Autoexec ncf runs the SET command to change the dates for Start End of Daylight Savings time C__ RSS lt p gt Liferea is now online 216 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 14 3 Creating a New Subscription You can subscribe to feeds from many locations on the Internet These include news and information services blogs discussion forums and more This section describes how to add a subscription The example in the following procedure shows how to subscribe to the CNN Top Stories newsfeed but the process is very similar for most feed providers 1 To start Liferea click Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Liferea 2 Obtain the URL for the desired feed For example to obtain the CNN newsfeed URL 2a Open your browser and go to http www cnn com 2b Scroll down near the bottom of the CNN page then
201. ified This can work and is also available in The GIMP but better results can be obtained by adjusting the color levels To do this select Layer gt Colors gt Levels A dialog opens for controlling the levels in the image Good results can usually be obtained by clicking Auto To make manual adjustments to all channels use the dropper tools in A Channels to pick areas in the image that should be black neutral gray and white To modify a channel individually select the desired channel in Channel Then drag the black white and middle markers in the slider in nput Levels Alternatively use the dropper tools to select points in the image that should serve as the white black and gray points for that channel If Preview is selected the image window shows a preview of how the image would look with the modifications applied When the desired result is achieved click OK to apply the changes With Reset restore the original settings Cancel stops level adjustment 15 5 5 Undoing Mistakes Most modifications made in The GIMP can be undone To view a history of modifications use the undo dialog included in the default window layout or open one from the toolbox menu with File gt Dialogs gt Undo History The dialog shows a base image and a series of editing changes that can be undone Use the buttons to undo and redo changes In this way you can work back to the base image If you undo a modification then make a new one the undone mo
202. ift during selection produces a circle Free Select Lasso Draw a selection area freehand with this tool by dragging the mouse over the image with the left mouse button pressed The end points are connected with a straight line when you release the tool The area inside is then selected Fuzzy Select Magic Wand This tools selects a continuous region based on color similarities Set the maximum difference between colors in the tool options dialog in Threshold By Color Select With this you can select all the pixels in the image with the same or similar color as the clicked pixel The maximum difference between colors can be set in the tool options dialog in Threshold Intelligent Scissors Click a series of points in the image As you click the points are connected based on color differences Click the first point to close the area Convert it to a regular selection by clicking inside it Using the Quick Mask The quick mask is a way of selecting parts of an image by using the paint tools A good way to use it is to make a rough selection by using the intelligent scissors or the lasso freehand selection tool Then activate the quick mask by pressing the small icon with the dashed box in the lower left corner Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 227 The quick mask displays the selection with a red overlay Areas shaded with red are not selected Areas appearing as they did before the mask was activated are selected To modify the sele
203. ight notices F Include immediately after the copyright notices a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License in the form shown in the Addendum below G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document s license notice H Include an unaltered copy of this License I Preserve the section Entitled History Preserve its Title and add to it an item stating at least the title year new authors and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page If there is no section Entitled History in the Document create one stating the title year authors and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence J Preserve the network location if any given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on These may be placed in the History section You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission K For any section Entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications Preserve the Title of the section and preserve in the section all the substance and tone
204. ight have the same Key ID Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key DSA keys can only sign ElGamal keys are used to encrypt Strength Specifies the length in bits of the key The longer the key the more security it provides However a long key does not compensate for the use of a weak passphrase Fingerprint A unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key Created The date the key was created Expires The date the key can no longer be used a key can no longer be used to perform key operations after it has expired Changing a key s expiration date to a point in the future re enables it A good general practice is to have a master key that never expires and multiple subkeys that do expire and are signed by the master key Location The location where the private key has been stored Subkeys See Editing OpenPGP Subkey Properties on page 177 for more information Owner Names and Signatures Details Technical Details Dates KeylD EF9EA249 Created 2007 09 06 Type DSA Expires Never Strength 1024 Actions Fingerprint Override Owner Trust Ultimate 2486 7739 CB7D 7105 D827 T 85 0 843F OEB6 EF9E A249 Export Complete Key fe Export 4 b Subkeys X Close Qe 6 Click Close Adding a User ID User IDs allow multiple identities and e mail addresses to be used with the same key Adding a user ID is useful for example
205. il and Calendar B Shutdown Banshee es OpenOffice org Wri Music Player NES Word Processor Status SS F Spot Gm Nautilus m Hard Drive Y Photo Browser File Browse 60G Free 63G Total Network Wired Using ethernet eth0 More Applications The main menu contains several elements Section 1 4 1 Search Bar on page 24 Section 1 4 2 Main Menu Tabs on page 25 Section 1 4 3 System on page 26 Section 1 4 4 Status on page 27 1 4 4 Search Bar The search bar helps you find applications and files on your system Type your search terms in the Search field then press Enter The results are displayed in the Desktop Search dialog box openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 1 6 Desktop Search Dialog Box Q Desktop Search beagle S earch View Help Eind beagle J lg Find Now 7 Applications 2 results E Search e Search Settings Q Search for data on your desktop hd Images 1 result beagle png PNG 1600x1200 373 9 KB v Documents 3 results about beagles odt fe Introducing a New Product page A Today beagle odt 1 page Showing all 6 matches You can use the results list to open a file forward it via e mail or display it in the file manager Simply right click an item in the results list and select the option you want The options available for an item depend on the type of file it is Clicking a file in the list displays a previ
206. il com 9A49D3C2 ea User 123 1crt4est gmail com office AA9SDOA20 y User 123 EFSEA249 Section 9 1 Signing and Encryption on page 173 Section 9 2 Generating a New Key Pair on page 174 Section 9 3 Modifying Key Properties on page 175 Section 9 4 Importing Keys on page 178 Section 9 5 Exporting Keys on page 179 Section 9 6 Backing Up Keyrings on page 179 Section 9 7 Signing a Key on page 179 Section 9 8 File Manager Integration on page 180 Section 9 9 Encryption Preferences on page 181 9 1 Signing and Encryption Signing means attaching electronic signatures to e mail messages or even software to prove its correct derivation To keep someone else from writing messages using your name and to protect Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 173 both you and the people you send them to you should sign your e mails Signatures help you easily check the sender of the messages you receive and distinguish genuine messages from malicious messages Software developers sign their software so that you can check the integrity Even if you get the software from an unofficial server you can verify the package with the signature You might also have sensitive information you want to protect from other parties Encryption helps you transform data and make it unreadable for others This is important for companies so they can protect internal
207. ilot Settings Welcome Co gnome pilot ou seem to be running gnome pilot for the first time he following steps will setup gnome pilot for syncing ou can always change any options later from PilotLink panel in Gnome Control Center Press Forward to continue Press Cancel to exit Bacl Forward gnome pilot Settings Device Settings N Typ Serial O USB IrDA Network Timeout 2 B Device dev pilot v Speed 57600 e Name Cradle e im Que Xo ene Bema 3 Inthe Device Settings dialog box describe your handheld s cradle then click Forward See Adding or Editing an Entry on the Device Settings Tab on page 156 for more information about the information requested by this step gnome pilot Settings PDA Identification amp Yes I ve used sync software with this PDA before No I ve never used sync software with this PDA before Owner Name and ID to set on the PDA user123 PDA ID 1000 Help X Cancel Back sb Eorward 4 Inthe PDA Identification dialog box identify your device then click Forward 154 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 5 6 If you have previously used synchronization software with this PDA it already has a synchronization ID that your desktop can get from it If you have not you can set the username and ID on the PDA from your desktop gnome pilot Settings Initia
208. imedia gt Brasero Disc Burning Application 2 Inthe main Brasero window click Burn image The Image Burning Setup dialog box opens Image burning setup Select a drive to write to CDRW DVD CRX830E C Type no disc Size Contents Status Path None B Image type Let brasero choose safest A X Cancel amp Burn 3 Specify a drive to write to Click Properties to select the burning speed and other preferences such as whether or not the disc is ejected after burning is complete 4 Specify the location of the image you want to burn and the image type 5 Click Burn 19 2 5 Erasing a CD or DVD 1 To start Brasero click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Brasero Disc Burning Application 2 Inthe main Brasero window click Disc gt Erase The Disc Blanking dialog box opens 276 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Disc blanking Select a recorder Type CD R Size 668 6 MB free Contents data tracks Status data can be appended to the medium Options O fast blanking O simulation Progress 3 Specify the drive containing the disc you want to erase 4 Select any other options you want 5 Click Blank Burning CDs and DVDs 277 278 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Appendixes Appendix A Moving from Windows to Linux on page 281 Appendix B GNU Licenses on page 285 Appendixes 279 280 openSU
209. imers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License but only as regards disclaiming warranties any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License 2 VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium either commercially or noncommercially provided that this License the copyright notices and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute However you may accept compensation in exchange for copies If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3 You may also lend copies under the same conditions stated above and you may publicly display copies 3 COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies or copies in media that commonly have printed covers of the Document numbering more than 100 and the Document s license notice requires Cover Texts you must enclose the copies in covers that carry clearly and legibly all these Cover Texts Front Cover Texts on the front cover and Back Cover Texts on the back cover Both covers must also clearly
210. in formats for graphics pixel and vector The GIMP works only with pixel graphics which is the normal format for photographs and scanned images Pixel graphics consist of small blocks of color that together create the entire image The files can easily become quite large because of this It is also not possible to increase the size of a pixel image without losing quality Unlike pixel graphics vector graphics do not store information for all individual pixels Instead they store information about how image points lines or areas are grouped together Vector images can also be scaled very easily Inkscape or the drawing application of OpenOffice org for example use this format 15 2 Starting The GIMP To start The GIMP click Computer gt More Applications gt Graphics gt The GIMP or enter gimp amp in a terminal Section 15 2 1 Initial Configuration on page 221 Section 15 2 2 The Default Windows on page 222 15 2 1 Initial Configuration When starting The GIMP for the first time a configuration wizard opens for preparatory configuration The default settings are acceptable for most purposes Press Continue in each dialog unless you are familiar with the settings and prefer another setup Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 221 15 2 2 The Default Windows Three windows appear by default They can be arranged on the screen and except the toolbox closed if no longer needed Closing the toolbox closes the applicatio
211. in the area on the left Burning CDs and DVDs 273 4 To remove files from the project do any of the following Select the files you want to remove then click the Remove button or press the Delete key Drag files from the area on the left 5 Click Burn to open the Disc Burning Setup dialog box 6 Specify a drive to write to Click Properties to select the burning speed and other preferences such as whether or not the disc is ejected after burning is complete 7 Optional To create a multisession CD or DVD select Leave the disc open to add other files later Multisession discs can be used to write data in more than one burning session This is useful for example for writing backups that are smaller than the media In each session you can add another file As long as the disc contains enough space you can append as many sessions as you like You can even add audio files to data discs 8 Optional Select Check data integrity to verify the integrity of the written data by comparing the MD5 sums of the original data and the burned data 9 Click Burn 19 2 2 Creating an Audio CD or DVD 1 To start Brasero click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Brasero Disc Burning Application 2 Inthe main Brasero window click Audio project The New Audio Disc Project dialog box opens Brasero New audio disc project Project Edit View Disc Help 44 Audio project 5 File Browser JJ No track Browse the fi
212. ing Find files folders and documents on the computer Create display and manage sticky notes on your desktop Access programs from a menu like the one in previous versions of GNOME This is especially useful for people who are used to earlier versions of GNOME Increase or decrease the sound volume Display current weather information for a specified city Access additional work areas called workspaces through virtual desktops For example you can open applications in different workspaces and use them on their own desktops without the clutter from other applications 1 4 Using the Main Menu Click Computer on the far left of the bottom panel to open the main menu Commonly used applications appear in the main menu along with recently used applications You can also click Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 23 24 Documents to display your recent documents or click P aces to display your favorite places such as your home directory or the Desktop Click More Applications to access additional applications listed in categories Use the options on the right to access Help install additional software open the GNOME Control Center lock your screen log out of the desktop or check the status of your hard drive and network connections Figure 1 5 Main Menu Q Search System Applications f Documents Places Help 3 Lock Screen Favorite Applications f Logout Firefox gt Evolution DN Web Browser Ma
213. ings 0 0 0 0 eee eee 97 2 3 2 Configuring Assistive Technology Support 0 0 c eee eee eee 99 2 3 3 Changing Your Password 0 00 cect ete eee 100 2 3 4 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts 0 0 0 cc eee 101 2 4 SYSTEM ca sese epitnds A eg hes O bea Gi dig See ee E Wo sek ed ME e hades E 101 2 4 1 Configuring Date and Time slssseeeee I 102 2 4 2 Configuring Streaming Audio and Video lisse 102 2 4 8 Configuring Language Settings 0 0 cece ete 102 2 4 4 Configuring Network Proxies 0 0 0 0 cect ete 103 2 4 5 Configuring Power Management 0 00 104 2 4 6 Setting Preferred Applications 0 llle 105 2 4 7 Setting Session Sharing Preferences leeren 105 2 4 8 Configuring Beagle Search Settings 0 0 0 cee eee 106 2 4 9 Managing Sessions llle ete 107 2 4 10 Setting Sound Preferences 0 cee eh 109 2 4 11 Managing Users and Groups lsleelese eh 112 2 4 12 Configuring Administrative Settings with YaST 0 2 0 0 cee ee eee 112 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Part I Office and Collaboration 3 The OpenOffice org Office Suite 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 Understanding OpenOffice org slseee ee 3 1 1 Advantages of the Novell Edition of OpenOffice org 3 1 2 Using the Standard Edition of OpenOffice org 3 1 3 C
214. ings button Each conduit has at least two settings an Action to perform whenever you synchronize and a One Time Action performed only the next time you synchronize Not all conduits have all of these actions The list of possible actions includes the following Disabled Do nothing Synchronize Ensures that data is the same in both places copying new data from the pilot to the desktop and from the desktop to the computer Copy to pilot Copies all data from the desktop to the pilot New data added on the pilot is not copied to the desktop Copy from pilot Copy all data from the pilot to the desktop New data added on the desktop is not copied to the pilot 156 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Other settings might be available as well including Conduit Priority which determines the order in which conduits will be used and Sync Private Records which determines whether to copy private information as well as public or just the public data 5 2 The Pilot Applet The GNOME Pilot panel applet remains in your panel until you are ready to synchronize your handheld device If the pilot access daemon is running the applet appears in black and white If it is not running the applet appears in red and black If the daemon is paused the applet is yellow and black Click the applet button to start the GNOME Pilot configuration tool The following actions for the applet are available in the right click menu Restore If your Pa
215. int Background colors amp images Click the Margins amp Header Footer tab to adjust margins and select what to include in the headers and footers After you configure your settings print a Web page with File gt Print Select the printer or a file in which to save the output With Properties set the paper size specify the print command choose grayscale or color and determine the margins When you are satisfied with your settings click Print 12 7 For More Information Get more information about Firefox from the official home page at http www mozilla com firefox http www mozilla com firefox Refer to the integrated help to find out more about certain options or features Browsing with Firefox 209 210 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Transferring Data From the Internet GNOME FTP gFTP is a multithreaded file transfer client with the following features FTP and HTTP proxy server support listings Bookmarks menu that lets you quickly connect to remote sites Figure 13 1 GNOME FTP gFTP 2 0 18 ETP Local Remote Bookmarks Transfers Logging Tools Help amp Host v Port v User v Pass FTP Support for the FTP FTPS control connection only HTTP HTTPS SSH and FSP protocols Support for FXP file transfers that is transferring files between two remote servers via FTP Support for UNIX EPLF Novell MacOS VMS MVS and NT DOS style directory home
216. ion a R 7 Preview 10 minutes Regard the computer as idle after V Activate screensaver when computer is idle Lock screen when screensaver is active ant g Help A Power Management 3X Close You can select from Random random selection of screen savers from a custom defined list Blank Screen or a selection of installed screen savers Select a screen saver from the list to choose it The currently selected screen saver is displayed in the preview window Specify the amount of time that the screen 1s to be idle before the screen saver is activated and whether the screen is locked when the screen saver is activated 2 2 8 Customizing Window Behavior Use the Window Preferences tool to customize window behavior for the desktop You can determine how a window reacts to contact with the mouse pointer or to double clicks on its title bar and you can define which key to hold for moving an application window To customize window behavior click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Windows openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 32 Window Preferences Dialog Window Preferences Window Selection CJ Select windows when the mouse moves over them Titlebar Action Double click titlebar to perform this action Maximize Movement Key To move a window press and hold this key then grab the window 5 Control Alt O Super or Windows logo Buel i X Close When sev
217. is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code
218. is running Secure Shell Keys vj Automatically load Secure Shell keys 3X Close 3 Choose from the following options Never remember passphrases Select this option to not remember any passphrase Remember passphrases for minutes Specifies the amount of time in minutes for storing passphrases Always remember passphrases whenever logged in Select this option to remember any passphrases whenever you are logged in to the session Ask me before using a cached passphrase Select this option to ask you before a stored passphrase is used Automatically load Secure Shell keys Select this option to automatically cache any Secure Shell key 4 Click Close 9 9 3 Key Servers You can keep your keys up to date by periodically synchronizing keys with remote keyservers Synchronizing makes sure that you have the latest signatures on all of your keys so that the web of trust is the most useful 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Edit gt Preferences then click the Key Servers tab 182 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Encryption Preferences Find Keys Using hkp pgp mit edu 11371 db Add Idap keyserver pgp com Publish Keys To None Don t publish keys Y Automatically synchronize modified keys with key servers Help Passwords and Encryption Keys provides suppor
219. ist is displayed in the left panel Right click New Playlist select Rename Playlist then enter the name you want You can drag and drop songs from one playlist to another or use the options on the Edit menu to remove or delete songs and rename or delete playlists You can sort a playlist by clicking the title of the column Click the column again to reverse the sort You can also right click Music Library then click Sort Playlists You can edit the name of the artist album and title as well as the track number and track count Simply select a song then click Edit gt Edit Song Metadata You can also rate your music which gives you the ability to play only songs with a certain rating To rate a song select the number of stars you want to assign in the Rating field Figure 17 8 Editing Song Dialog Box Editing Rossini William Tell Overtur _ o x Metadata Details Artist Various Album Classical Treasures 25 Cla Title Rossini William Tell Overt Genre v Track number 1 B Track count 0 2 Year 0 Rating eecece X Cancel Save If you want to set all fields in a group to the same value select multiple songs in a playlist then click Edit gt Edit Song Metadata Make the changes you want then click Apply common field values to all tracks You can also use the Back and Forward buttons to cycle through the selected songs
220. ize of items that appear in the list view Customizing Your Settings 83 Section Option Description Tree View Show only folders When selected displays folders in the tree in the Defaults side pane Behavior To configure the behavior of the File Manager click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt File Management or Edit gt Preferences from Nautilus then click the Behavior tab Figure 2 22 File Manager Behavior Dialog Box File Management Preferences Behavior Single click to open items Double click to open items M Always open in browser windows Executable Text Files O Run executable text files when they are opened View executable text files when they are opened amp Ask each time Trash Ask before emptying the Trash or deleting files O Include a Delete command that bypasses Trash Select from the following options Table 2 9 File Manager Behavior Options Option Description Single click to activate items Performs the default action for an item when you click the item If this option is selected and you point to an item the title of the item is underlined Double click to activate items Performs the default action for an item when you double click the item Always open in browser windows Opens the File Manager in Browser mode whenever you open it 84 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Option Description Run executable text files when t
221. k and Feel gt Appearance then click the Fonts tab Customizing Your Settings 69 Figure 2 10 Font Preferences Dialog Appearance Preferences E Theme Background Fonts Interface Application font Sans 110 Document font Sans 10 Desktop font i Sans 10 Window title font Sans Bold 10 Fixed width font Monospace 10 Rendering Monochrome Best shapes abcfgop AO abcfgop labcfgop AO abcfgop gt Best contrast Subpixel smoothing LCDs abcfgop AO abcfgop abcfgop AO abcfgop Details Bue X close The upper part of the dialog shows the fonts selected for applications documents the desktop window titles and a fixed width font for terminals Click one of the buttons to open a selection dialog where you can set the font family style and size To specify how to render fonts on your screen select one of the following options Monochrome Renders fonts in black and white only The edges of characters might appear jagged in some cases because the characters are not antialiased Antialiasing is an effect that is applied to the edges of characters to make the characters look smoother Best Shapes Antialiases fonts where possible Use this option for standard cathode ray tube CRT monitors Best Contrast Adjusts fonts to give the sharpest possible contrast and antialiases fonts so that characters have smooth edges This option might enhance the ac
222. key combination To remove a shortcut key combination place the mouse pointer over the menu item then press Backspace or Delete IMPORTANT If you assign a new keyboard combination you are not warned if you select a combination that was previously assigned to something else The previous assignment is removed and replaced by the new one There is no automatic way to restore the original default keyboard shortcut for a command You must manually reassign the keyboard shortcut This feature does not maintain shortcuts that are normally assigned to all applications such as Ctrl C for copy This might lead to inconsistencies in your GNOME applications Configuring Placement of Toolbar Button Labels Select one of the following options to specify how toolbar button labels display in your GNOME compliant applications Text below icons Displays icon labels below the icons for each button Text beside icons Displays icons on the toolbar with text beside the most important icons Icons only Displays icons only without any text labels Text only Displays text labels on each button without icons A preview of the selected option appears in the Menu and Toolbar Preferences dialog 2 2 2 Configuring Desktop Effects Xgl is an Xserver architecture that lets you turn your desktop into a rotating 3 D cube tile windows so they don t overlap and switch tasks while viewing live thumbnails You can enable translucent or transparent windows z
223. l Sync About to send the following data to the PDA Owner Name user123 PDA ID 1000 Please put PDA in Cradle netsync and press HotSync button amp Cancel Back Que In the Initial Sync dialog box click Forward to contact your PDA device and get or set the name and other information Choose a name to use when referring to the PDA and a directory on your desktop system where you will store backups and other data 5 1 2 Adding or Editing a Handheld Entry The Pilots tab lists the handheld devices you have configured If you have not used the Pilot Settings tool before you do not have any items in this list and the tool opens a new window to walk you through the process of creating one To add a new pilot click Add To edit an existing pilot entry select it and click Edit When editing or creating an entry you will be asked for five pieces of information User Name This is the name used on your Pilot If your pilot already has a name configured you can get it from the pilot by clicking the Get from Pilot button You can also set it on the pilot by clicking the Set On Pilot button ID This is the user ID number from your pilot You can get this value from the handheld by clicking the Get from Pilot button You can also set it on the handheld by clicking the Set On Pilot button Pilot Name This is the name by which your handheld will be identified For example you could
224. l applet runs silently without giving any notice of its existence This changes as soon as a call comes in The main window of Ekiga opens and you hear a ring sound on your headset or speakers When you notice an incoming call click Accept to pick up the phone and start talking If you do not want to accept this call click Reject It is also possible to transfer the call to another SIP address 7 6 Using the Address Book Ekiga offers to manage your SIP contacts To open the address book click Tools gt Address Book in the Ekiga main window An empty list window opens 166 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 7 2 Ekiga Address Book Address Book File Contact v Remote Contacts Name VoIP URL E Mail Categories Speed Dial GJEkiga White Pages j Contacts Near Me Local Contacts Personal Name contains To add a contact select Personal right click the address window then select New Contact You can also press Ctrl gt N The following entries are required for a valid contact Name Specify the name of your contact This can be a full name but you can also use a nickname here SIP Address Specify a valid SIP address for your contact Email Specify the e mail address of your contact for your own reference Speed Dial Specify a Speed Dial which lets you access often used numbers more easily This is optional Categories If desired add your own categories if you have many different
225. l that indexes your personal information space normally your home directory to find whatever you re looking for Using Beagle you can find documents e mails and attachments Web history IM IRC conversations address book contacts calendar appointments notes source code images music and video files archives and their contents and applications Section 10 1 Using Beagle on page 185 Section 10 2 Search Tips on page 186 Section 10 3 Performing a Property Search on page 187 Section 10 4 Setting Search Preferences on page 188 Section 10 5 Indexing Other Directories on page 188 Section 10 6 Preventing Files and Directories from Being Indexed on page 189 10 1 Using Beagle To use Beagle click Computer enter your search terms in the Search field then press Enter The results are displayed in the Desktop Search dialog box Figure 10 1 Desktop Search Dialog Box Desktop Search beagle Search View Help Eind beagle f Find Now v Applications 2 results Qy Search Settings Q Search Search for data on your desktop m Images 1 result EJ beagle png PNG 1600x1200 373 9 v Documents 3 results about beagles odt Introducing a New Product Today 1 page beagle odt 1 page Showing all 6 matches You can use the results lists to open a file forward it via e mail or display it in the file manager Simply right click an item in the
226. lassical Treasures 25 C Classical Treasures 25 C Classical Treasures 25 C user123 rTo 2 18 1 19 2 33 1 08 16 01 Pathetique 1 07 T2 7 55 1 54 Pant19 Pan125b D 935 Faur Requiem Martha Goldstein Brahm s Waltzes Randolph Hokanson Keyboard Works of the M Schubert 2 MIT Concert Choir Cutter Debussy Trois Chanson William Tell2 user123 4 19 Toreador Song 1903 Columbia 137 1208 2 28 1 I home Damrosch Orchestra Recommended Artists Top Tracks by Beethoven Top Albums by Beethoven 1 Symphony No 9 Scher 1 Beethoven Symphony Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart 10096 Simil Similarity 2 The Best of Beethoven 2 Moonlight Sonata 3 Fur Elise 4 Ode to Joy 5 Ave Maria 3 Music Box Archives vol 01 f Johann Sebastian Bach 89 Similarity 4 Evegeny Mravinsky Len Fr d ric Chopin 75 Similarity 5 String Quartets op 18 n m 32 Items 1 hour 23 minutes 16 seconds B 17 2 3 Ripping Your Music To rip music from a CD and add it to your library 1 Insert a CD into your CD or DVD drive Banshee automatically lists the CD as a source in the left menu Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 251 Banshee Music Player Music Edit Playback Tools View Help S CopyCD import cD ah Music Library 2 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Favorites arch 5 Filter on All Columns Podcasts 5j 4
227. lder hierarchy Artist Album gt File name Number Title gt The Beatles Help 07 Ticket to Ride ogg CD Importing Output format Free Lossless Audio Codec Free Lossless Audio Codec FLAC is an open source codec that compresses but does not degrade audio quality L Use error correction when importing X Close Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 261 2 Choose from the following options Music Library Lets you specify a music folder location This location is used when you import music Click Copy files to music folder when importing to place a copy of the files you import in your Banshee music folder File System Organization Lets you determine folder hierarchy in the music library and how filenames are displayed CD Importing Lets you determine encoding profiles for CD ripping Select the output format you want then click Edit to configure advanced options for that format Use error correction when importing Error correction Tries to work around problem areas on a disk such as surface scratches but can substantially slow down the time it takes to import 3 Click Close to save your changes 262 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Playing Movie Files The Totem Movie Player application is a movie player for the GNOME desktop which provides the following features Support for a variety of video and audio files A variety of zoom levels and aspect ratios and a
228. le Management Preferences Views Behavior Display List Columns Preview Text Files Show text in icons Local Files Only 4 gt Other Previewable Files Show thumbnails Local Files Only 4b Only for files smaller than 3 MB 4r Sound Files Preview sound files Never gt Folders Count number of items Local Files Only Que Select from the following options Table 2 11 File Manager Preview Options Option Show text in icons Show thumbnails Only for files smaller than Preview sound files Count number of items X Close Description Specifies when to preview the content of text files in the icons that represent the files Specifies when to show thumbnails of image files in the icons that represent the files Specifies the maximum file size for files represented by thumbnails Specifies when to preview sound files Specifies when to show the number of files contained in folders In the Icon view you might need to increase your zoom level to see the number 2 2 4 Locking Desktop Functions The Lockdown Editor lets you disable lock down certain desktop functions This is useful if you want to restrict the actions that users can perform on a computer For example you might want to prevent command line operations on a computer that is for public use at a trade show Customizing Your Set
229. le mode click Edit gt Shuffle Mode 18 1 8 Choosing Subtitles To choose the language of the subtitles click View gt Subtitles then select the subtitle language you want to display To disable the display of subtitles click View gt Subtitles gt None By default Totem Movie Player chooses the same language for the subtitles that you use on your computer Totem Movie Player automatically loads and displays subtitles if the file that contains them has the same name as the video file and has an asc txt sub smi or ssa file extension 18 1 9 Taking Screen Shots To take a screen shot of a movie or a visualization of song that is playing click Edit Take Screenshot 266 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide You can save a screen shot to either of the following File Select Save screenshot to file then click the Browse button to specify a filename Desktop Select Save screenshot to the desktop 18 2 Modifying Totem Movie Player Preferences To modify Totem Movie Player preferences click Edit gt Preferences You can modify the following Section 18 2 1 General Preferences on page 267 Section 18 2 2 Display Preferences on page 268 Section 18 2 3 Audio Preferences on page 268 18 2 1 General Preferences The Totem General Preferences let you select a network connection speed specify a TV out connection type and change the font and encoding used to display subtitles Figure 18 2 Totem General
230. le system TO add files to this project you can click the d button to show the selectio select files in selection pane and click the PI Name v Modified drag files in this area from th tion p double click on files in the selection pane Search im bin Friday copy files from file manager for example D Recently Used De Today at 44 3 Desktop do Today at 14 1B jeu s pes Tom hie deb n nis car EJ File System gra Today at 14 click on the Remove button to remove s F drag and e items out from this a CD RW DVD ROM Dii ima Yesterday a select items in this area and cho amp Network Servers Bind Today at 10 select items in this area and press Music Today at 09 m n m gt amp Empty 0 min 1 h 40 Al files e 15min 30min 45min 1h lh15 1h30 274 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 To add files to the project do any of the following Select the files you want to add in the selection pane on the right then click the Add button Drag files to the area on the left from the selection pane or from your file manager Double click the files you want to add in the selection pane Copy the files you want to add for example from your file manager then paste the files in the area on the left 4 To remove files from the project do any of the following Select the files you want to remove t
231. le to listen to You can listen to music in your library which means that you need to import music from an external source such as a file folder or CD or you can listen to music directly from a CD You can also listen to music on Internet radio stations podcasts or your digital audio player see Section 17 4 Using Banshee with Your Digital Audio Player on page 258 for more information Banshee also comes with MP3 support If your music collection consists of both MP3 and Ogg Vorbis files you do not need to convert any files to a different format Just open Banshee and start listening If the format you are tying to play is not supported by the player s engine Banshee offers to search for a suitable codec which you can then install with YaST Section 17 2 1 Importing Music on page 248 Section 17 2 2 Playing Your Music on page 249 Section 17 2 3 Ripping Your Music on page 251 Section 17 2 4 Listening to Internet Radio on page 252 Section 17 2 5 Listening to Podcasts on page 253 17 2 1 Importing Music Banshee can import music from a file folder CD or digital audio player 1 In Banshee click Music gt Import Music 2 Select an import source 3 Click Import Music Source 248 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Banshee can automatically query MusicBrainz http musicbrainz org for extra information about tracks that you import and retrieve cover art for display when
232. lected 1 In Banshee click Music gt New Smart Playlist from Search 2 Specify a name for the smart playlist then specify the search criteria you want Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 257 Create Smart Playlist from Search Playlist Name All of the following Artist a contains l Title contains sU Ja Album ai contains S _ J Genre contains Jar p L Limitto 25 songs selected by Album P Predefined Smart Playlists X Cancel fih Save Iz 2 Use the plus and minus symbols to add or remove criteria To use an already defined smart playlist click Predefined Smart Playlists then select the playlist you want 3 Click Save The smart playlist is added to your music library 17 4 Using Banshee with Your Digital Audio Player Banshee supports several digital audio players including Apple iPod Creative NOMAD Dell DJ and almost any other generic USB mass storage player Instead of using separate applications to get support for your audio devices Banshee gives you easy integrated support and lets you copy your music to or from your device no matter what format the music is in Section 17 4 1 Playing Music from Your Digital Audio Player on page 258 Section 17 4 2 Adding Music to Your Digital Audio Player on page 259 Section 17 4 3 Copying Music on Your Digital Audio Player to Banshee on pa
233. lid characters in a passphrase 9 3 Modifying Key Properties Section 9 3 1 Editing OpenPGP Key Properties on page 175 Section 9 3 2 Editing Secure Shell Key Properties on page 178 9 3 1 Editing OpenPGP Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all OpenPGP keys 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Double click the PGP key you want to view or edit or select the key then click Key gt Properties Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 175 3 Use the options on the Owner tab to add a photo to the key or to change the passphrase associated with the key Photo IDs allow a key owner to embed one or more pictures of themselves in a key These identities can be signed just like normal user IDs A photo ID must be in JPEG format and should be no larger than 240x288 pixels Ifthe chosen image does not meet the required file type or size Passwords and Encryption Keys can resize and convert it on the fly from any image format supported by the GDK library 4 Click the Names and Signatures tab to add a user ID to a key See Adding a User ID on page 176 for more information 5 Click the Details tab which contains the following properties Key ID The Key ID is similar to the fingerprint but the Key ID contains only the last eight characters of the fingerprint It is generally possible to identify a key with only the Key ID but sometimes two keys m
234. llowing four categories Hardware page 56 Look and Feel page 66 Personal page 97 System page 101 Figure 2 1 GNOME Control Center Control Center Filter o Biuetoot Mh OSL D E ard and Mi Groups r Keyboard E Modem Mouse Hardware Look and Feel e h k 4 Print Removable Drives and Personal EE scanner BW Screen Resolution System Common Tasks Add Printer i Appesrance Desktop Effects Fh rue Management Configure Network QJ Lockdown Ed E Main Me fg Orca Screen Reader Change Password a fe Main Menus rie dme Aga ser E screensaver TH Windo Open Administrator Settings SEE Accessibiin Er Assistive Technology MA Change Ps d x FR Koning manager Shortcu GE Date and Time GH GStreamer Properties pE Language w Network Proxies WW Power Management T Preferred Applications Hy lt e fu Remote Desktop CX Search Settings P Sessions e a User Management hs T Some settings require that you use the YaST Control Center These administrator settings include most of the hardware the graphical user interface Internet access security settings user administration software installation and system updates and information You need the root password to access the YaST Control Center Customizing Your Settings 55 56 For information on configuring administrator settings see System Configuration with YaST http www novell com documentation sled10 sled deployment spl data cha y
235. lmOS device has lost all data select this item to restore it from a backup you made earlier Pause Daemon Pauses the GNOME Pilot daemon gpilotd If the daemon is paused this item reads Continue Restart Stops and restarts the daemon Last Log Displays the results of the last synchronization performed Preferences Click this item to select what happens when you click the applet and whether to display notices in dialog boxes Synchronizing Your Handheld Devices with GNOME Pilot 157 158 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Instant Messaging with Pidgin Use Pidgin formerly called Gaim to use all of your instant messaging accounts from a single instant messaging client Pidgin supports all of the most popular instant messaging protocols so you can log in to all of your accounts at once and chat live with your contacts in one tabbed interface regardless of which IM system they use With Pidgin you can log in to multiple accounts on multiple IM networks simultaneously Pidgin also supports many features of the various networks such as file transfer away messages and typing notification This section explains the Pidgin options you need to know about to set up Pidgin and communicate with your contacts It does not explain all of Pidgin features and options For more information open Pidgin then click Help gt Online Help or press F1 Section 6 1 Supported Protocols on page 159 Section 6 2 Addi
236. logical weaponry end uses See the Novell International Trade Services Web page http www novell com info exports for more information on exporting Novell software Novell assumes no responsibility for your failure to obtain any necessary export approvals Copyright 2004 2007 Novell Inc Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License GFDL Version 1 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with the Invariant Section being this copyright notice and license A copy ofthe licernse is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License THIS DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT 1 THE DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY ACCURACY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT THE INITIAL WRITER AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES
237. lows you to configure printing from your Linux client to a Windows network printer 1 Start the GNOME Control Center from the main menu 2 Select Hardware gt Printers 3 Select New Printer Adding a printer requires root privileges so you must enter the root password to continue 4 Select Network Printer then select Windows Printer SMB from the drop down menu 5 Specify the Windows host the printer and the username and password required to access the Windows computer then click Forward 6 Select the driver that most closely matches the printer then click Forward 7 Click Apply The printer is ready for use To print to the Windows network printer configured above select it from the list of available printers 172 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys The GNOME Passwords and Encryption Keys program is an important component of the encryption infrastructure on your system With the help of this program you can create and manage PGP and SSH keys import and export PGP and SSH keys share your keys with others back up your keys and keyring cache your passphrase and encrypt and decrypt the clipboard Figure 9 1 Password and Encryption Keys Main Window Passwords and Encryption Keys Key Edit Remote View Help ig a amp Properties Export Public Key Find Remote Keys Filter My Personal Keys Trusted Keys Other Collected Keys Passwords Name Key ID A 1crt4est gma
238. ltimedia Chapter 15 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP on page 221 Chapter 16 Managing Your Digital Image Collection on page 235 Chapter 17 Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee on page 247 Chapter 18 Playing Movie Files on page 263 Chapter 19 Burning CDs and DVDs on page 271 Multimedia 219 220 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP The GIMP 7he GNU Image Manipulation Program is a program for creating and editing pixel graphics In most aspects its features are comparable to those of Adobe Photoshop and other commercial programs Use it to resize and retouch photographs design graphics for Web pages make covers for your custom CDs or almost any other graphics project It meets the needs of both amateurs and professionals Like many other Linux programs The GIMP is developed as a cooperative effort of developers worldwide who volunteer their time and code to the project The program is under constant development so the version included in your system might vary slightly from the version discussed here The layout of the individual windows and window sections is especially likely to vary The GIMP is an extremely complex program Only a small range of features tools and menu items are discussed in this chapter See For More Information on page 232 for ideas of where to find more information about the program 15 1 Graphics Formats There are two ma
239. m D Network Servers bod Audio Disc f Trah 1ertdest asc Job Search hini Job Searchhimipgp lockdown epiphany v COM a AS terns Free space 504 GB ana Bw di Thu Sep 5 409 pm Bl Table 2 7 contains a list of the default keystrokes and mouse movements you can use to perform desktop effects To change any of these shortcuts see Modifying Desktop Effects on page 73 Table 2 7 Desktop Effects Shortcuts Effect Activate or deactivate rain effect Shortcut Shift F9 Create ripples with the mouse pointer Ctrl Alt Super key Windows key and move the mouse pointer Panoramic view of all desktop cubes Ctrl Alt Down arrow use the Left and Right arrows to scroll Rotate desktop cube Ctrl Alt Left arrow or Right arrow or drag a window to the edge of the screen Rotate desktop cube manually Ctrl Alt left click the desktop and drag the mouse pointer Rotate desktop cube while keeping the current active window with you Ctrl Alt Shift Left arrow or Right arrow Switch windows thumbnail view Alt Tab Customizing Your Settings 79 Effect Shortcut Tile windows Ctrl Alt Up arrow or move the mouse pointer to the top left corner of the screen Wobbly window Left click the window and drag Zoom once Super key Windows key Button 3 Zoom in manually Super key Windows key scroll wheel up Zoom out manually Super key Windows key scroll wheel down More Deskto
240. m the archive openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Option Selected files Files Re create folders Overwrite existing files Do not extract older files Password Open destination folder after extraction Click Extract Description Extracts the selected files from the archive Extracts from the archive all files that match the specified pattern Reconstructs the folder structure when extracting the specified files For example you specify tmp in the Filename text box and choose to extract all files The archive contains a subfolder called doc If you select the Re create folders option Archive Manager extracts the contents of the subfolder to tmp doc If you do not select the Re create folders option Archive Manager does not create any subfolders Instead Archive Manager extracts all files from the archive including files from subfolders to tmp Overwrites any files in the destination folder that have the same name as the specified files If you do not select this option Archive Manager does not extract the specified file if an existing file with the same name already exists in the destination folder Extracts the specified file only if the destination folder does not contain the specified file or if the destination folder contains an older version of the specified file Archive Manager uses the modification date to determine which file is the most recent If the version of the file in the archive is older
241. mages included in the document To open the Navigator click Edit gt Navigator The elements listed in the Navigator vary according to the document loaded in Writer The OpenOffice org Office Suite 129 Figure 3 3 Navigator Tool in Writer Navigator f Text frame a Graphics 9 OLE objects Bookmarks e Sections Untitled active Click an item in the Navigator to jump to that item in the document Using a Master Document to Create a Single Document from Multiple Files If you are working with a very large document such as a book you might find it easier to manage the book with a master document rather than keeping the book in a single file A master document enables you to quickly apply formatting changes to a large document or to jump to each subdocument for editing A master document is a Writer document that serves as a container for multiple Writer files You can maintain chapters or other subdocuments as individual files collected in the master document Master documents are also useful if multiple people are working on a document You can separate each person s portion of the document into subdocuments collected in a master document allowing multiple writers to work on their subdocuments at the same time without fear of overwriting other people s work NOTE If you are coming to OpenOffice org from Microsoft Word you might be nervous about using master documents because the master document fe
242. menu similar to the Start menu in Windows and the icons of all applications currently running You can also add applications and applets to the panel for easy access If you click the name of a program in the taskbar the program s window is moved to the foreground If the program is already in the foreground a mouse click minimizes it Clicking a minimized application reopens the respective window Figure 1 3 GNOME Bottom Panel W Computer S a The GIMP i Tue Aug 21 1 11 PM Ell Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop The Show Desktop icon is on the right side of the bottom panel This icon minimizes all program windows and displays the desktop Or if all windows are already minimized it reopens them If you right click an empty spot in the panel a menu opens offering the options listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Panel Menu Options Option Description Add to Panel Opens a menu of applications and applets that can be added to the panel Properties Modifies the properties for this panel Delete This Panel Removes the panel from the desktop All of the panel settings are lost Allow Panel to be Moved Lets you drag the panel to another side of the screen or locks the panel in Lock Panel Position its current position New Panel Creates a new panel and adds it to the desktop Help Opens the Help Center About Panels Opens information about the panel application 1 3 4 Adding Applets and Applications to the Panel Y
243. most users there is no need to change these settings Table 2 2 Keyboard Layout Options Option Description Adding the EuroSign to certain keys If it is supported by your keyboard add the Euro sign as the third level character on the E 5 or 2 key Alt Win key behavior Assign the behavior of the Unix Super Meta and Hyper modifier keys to the Alt and Windows keys CapsLock key behavior Choose from a number of options of that specify the behavior of the Caps Lock key Customizing Your Settings 59 60 Option Compose key position Ctrl key position Japanese keyboard options Layout switching Miscellaneous compatibility options Numeric keypad layout selection Third level choosers Use keyboard LED to show alternative group Using space key to input non breakable space character Description Specifies the key to be used as the Compose key Use the Compose key to combine two keystrokes to make one character such as an accented character that is not on your keyboard layout Specify the key that acts as the Ctrl key This is useful on older keyboards that do not have a Ctrl key Specify whether to use the Kana lock key and the NICOLA F style backspace Specify the keys used to switch keyboard layouts Specify whether Shift works with the Num Lock key on a numerical keypad as it does on Windows If this option is not selected use Shift with the numeric keypad to obtain the reverse of the current behavior
244. n then click Edit 3 Arrange the fields on the form by dragging them to their new locations 136 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide For example move the First Name field so it appears to the right of the Last Name field and then adjust the locations of the other fields to suit your preference 4 When you have finished modifying the form save it and close it 3 5 5 Whats Next After you have created your database tables and forms you are ready to enter your data You can also design queries and reports to help sort and display the data Refer to OpenOffice org online help and other sources listed in Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 for additional information about Base 3 6 Creating Graphics with Draw Use OpenOffice org Draw to create graphics and diagrams You can save your drawings in today s most common formats and import them into any application that lets you import graphics including the other OpenOffice org modules You can also create Flash versions of your drawings The OpenOffice org documentation contains complete instructions on using Draw See Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 for more information To use a Draw graphic in a document 1 Open Draw then create the graphic 2 Save the graphic 3 Copy the graphic and paste it into the document or insert the graphic directly from the document One particularly useful feature o
245. n In the default configuration The GIMP saves your window layout when you exit Dialogs left open reappear when you next start the program The Toolbox on page 222 Layers Channels Paths Undo on page 223 The Toolbox The main window of The GIMP shown in Figure 15 1 contains the main controls of the application Closing it exits the application At the top the menu bar offers access to file functions extensions and help Below that you find icons for the various tools You can mouse over an icon to display information about it Figure 15 1 The Main Window File Xtns Help FP TRH Paintbrush amp x Opacity 100 0 v Mode Normal a Brush circle 11 P Pressure sensitivity Fade out Incremental _ Use color from gradient amp L8 The current foreground and background color are shown in two overlapping boxes The default colors are black for the foreground and white for the background Click the box to open a color selection dialog Swap the foreground and background color with the bent arrow symbol to the upper right of the boxes Use the black and white symbol to the lower left to reset the colors to the default To the right the current brush pattern and gradient are shown Click the displayed selection to access the selection dialog The lower portion of the window allows configuration of various options for the current tool 222 open
246. n 1 will typically require changing the actual title 9 TERMINATION You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License Any other attempt to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Document is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 10 FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns See http www gnu org copyleft Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation If the Document does not specify a GNU Licenses 295 version number of this License you may choose any version ever published not as a draft by the Free Software Foundation ADDENDUM How to use this License for your documents To use this License in a doc
247. n Preferences Option Description Acceleration Use the slider to specify the speed at which your mouse pointer moves on your screen when you move your mouse Sensitivity Use the slider to specify how sensitive your mouse pointer is to movements of your mouse Threshold Use the slider to specify the distance that you must move an item before the move action is interpreted as a drag and drop action 2 1 7 Configuring a Network Card If you connect to a network over a network card use YaST to configure your connection NOTE Root privileges are required for configuring your network card 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Network Card 2 Enter the root password YaST opens 3 Follow the instructions in YaST to configure the network card Customizing Your Settings 63 64 2 1 8 Installing and Configuring Printers Use the Printers module to install and configure printers To start the Printers module click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Printers Figure 2 8 Printers Dialog Printer Edit a New Printer mktghpSsimxSonnst Ready 2 1 9 Configuring Removable Drives and Media You can use a wide variety of removable drives and media including storage devices cameras scanners and more The configurations for many of these devices are set up automatically during installation To change the configuration for a drive or other removable device click Computer
248. nally select the sound to play at each of the specified events Setting System Beep Preferences Some applications play a beep sound to indicate a keyboard input error Use the System Beep tab to set preferences for the system beep Customizing Your Settings 111 Figure 2 41 Sound Preferences Dialog System Beep Page Sound Preferences System Beep Devices Sounds O Enable system beep O Visual system beep Help X close 2 4 11 Managing Users and Groups Use the User Management tool to manage users and groups including user and group names group membership password and password encryption and other options Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt User Management The User Management tool opens the User and Group Administration module in YaST NOTE Root privileges are required to manage users and groups Follow the directions in YaST for information on changing settings 2 4 12 Configuring Administrative Settings with YaST Use the YaST Control Center to change the installation and configuration of your whole system Administrator or root permission is required to open YaST To open YaST click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt YaST then enter the root password If you do not know the root password ask your system administrator 112 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 42 YaST Control Center YaST Control Center
249. nd past downloads To open the download manager click Tools gt Downloads Firefox opens a window with your downloads While downloading a file you see a progress bar and the current file If necessary pause a download and resume it later To open a downloaded file click Open With Remove remove it from the list If you need information about the file right click the filename and choose Properties If you need further control of the download manager open the configuration window from Edit gt Preferences and go to the Main tab Here determine the download folder and how the manager behaves 12 5 Customizing Firefox Firefox can be customized extensively You can install extensions change themes and add smart keywords for your online searches 206 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 12 5 4 Extensions Mozilla Firefox is a multifunctional application which means that you can download and install add ons known as extensions For example you can add a new download manager and mouse gestures To add an extension click Tools gt Add ons gt Extensions In the bottom right corner click Get Extensions to open the Mozilla extensions update Web page where you can choose from a variety of available extensions Click the extension to install then click the install link to download and install it When you restart Firefox the new extension is functional You can also look at the various extensions at Firefox Add ons http addons mozilla or
250. nd speed of slide transitions and the presentation type the timing of the presentation then click Create There are several slide transition choices available from the drop down list You can choose either the default presentation type or Automatic If you select Automatic specify the amount of time each page displays and the length of the pause between presentations The presentation opens ready for editing The OpenOffice org Office Suite 133 3 4 2 Using Master Pages Master pages give your presentation a consistent look by defining the way each slide looks what fonts are used and other graphical elements Impress uses two types of master pages Slide master Contains elements that appear on all slides For example you might want your company logo to appear in the same place on every slide The slide master also determines the text formatting style for the heading and outline of every slide that uses that master page as well as any information you want to appear in a header or footer Notes master Determines the formatting and appearance of the notes in your presentation Creating a Slide Master Impress comes with a collection of preformatted master pages Eventually most users will want to customize their presentations by creating their own slide masters 1 Start Impress then create a new empty presentation 2 Click View gt Master gt Slide Master This opens the current slide master in Master View 3 Right cl
251. nd the scope of this section However more information is found in the help system and detailed how tos are found at the OpenOffice org Documentation page http documentation openoffice org HOW_TO index html Creating a Template A template is a text document containing only the styles and content that you want to appear in every document such as your address information and letterhead on a letter When a document is created or opened with the template the styles are automatically applied to that document To create a template Click File gt New gt Text Document Create the styles and content that you want to use in any document that uses this template Click File gt Templates gt Save Specify a name for the template a amp WN In the Categories box click the category you want to place the template in The category is the folder where the template is stored 6 Click OK 3 2 5 Working with Large Documents You can use Writer to work on large documents Large documents can be either a single file or a collection of files assembled into a single document Navigating in Large Documents on page 129 Using a Master Document to Create a Single Document from Multiple Files on page 130 Navigating in Large Documents The Navigator tool displays information about the contents of a document It also lets you quickly jump to different elements For example you can use the Navigator to get a quick overview of all i
252. ne OAFIID GNOME_MiniCorr CPU Frequency Scaling Monitor OAFIID G Deskbar OAFIID Deskbar Applet Dictionary Look up OAFIID GNOME Ditctic 1 3X Close Lock down the panels Prevents changes from being made to the configuration of the panel Individual applets might need to be locked down separately however The panel must be restarted for this to take effect Customizing Your Settings 89 Disable force quit Prevents a user from forcing an application to quit by removing access to the Force Quit button Disable lock screen Prevents a user from locking their screen by removing access to the lock screen menu entries Disable log out Prevents a user from logging out by removing access to the log out menu entries Disable Applets Disables the applets selected in the list Epiphany Web Browser Use the options in the Epiphany Web Browser category to control access to features in Epiphany Figure 2 28 Epiphany Web Browser Lockdown Editor Settings Lockdown Editor C Disable quit O Disable arbitrary URL C Disable bookmark editing Disable history O Disable javascript chrome O Disable toolbar editing O Force fullscreen mode C Hide menubar Safe Protocols a O Disable unsafe protocols 3 Close Disable quit Prevents the user from closing Epiphany Disable arbitrary URL Prevents the user from typing a UR
253. ng Mail Standard Unix Mbox Spool or Directory Receiving Options If you select Standard Unix Mbox Spool or Directory as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 2 3 4 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages Select if you want to apply filters to new messages in the Inbox Select if you want to store status headers in Elm Pine and Mutt formats Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail Sending Mail Now that you have entered information about how you plan to get mail Evolution needs to know about how you want to send it 1 Select a server type from the Server Type list The following server types are available Sendmail Uses the Sendmail program to send mail from your system Sendmail is more flexible but is not as easy to configure so you should select this option only if you know how to set up a Sendmail service SMTP Sends mail using an outbound mail server This is the most common choice for sending mail If you choose SMTP there are additional configuration options SMTP Configuration 1 2 Type the host address in the Host field If you are unsure what your host address is contact your system administrator Select if your server requires authentication If you selected that your server requires authentication you ne
254. ng an Account on page 160 Section 6 3 Managing Your Buddy List on page 160 Section 6 4 Chatting on page 161 6 1 Supported Protocols Pidgin supports the following instant messaging protocols AOL Instant Messenger AIM Bonjour Gadu Gadu Google Talk GroupWise Messenger ICQ IRC Jabber XMPP MSN Messenger QC SILC SIMPLE Yahoo Zephyr Instant Messaging with Pidgin 159 6 2 Adding an Account To use Pidgin you must already have accounts on the systems you want to use For example to use Pidgin for your AIM account you must first have an AIM account After you have those accounts set them up in the Pidgin Add Account dialog 1 Start Pidgin by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt Internet gt Pidgin 2 Click Accounts gt Add Edit to open the Accounts dialog box The first time you run Pidgin or any subsequent time you start Pidgin when you don t have any accounts set up the Accounts dialog box opens automatically 3 Click Add to open the Add Account dialog 4 Select the protocol you want to set up The Add Account dialog differs for each protocol depending on what setup options are available for that protocol Add Account Basic Advanced Login Options Protocol N GroupWise Screen name Password Local alias O Remember password X Cancel l 5 Enter the setup options for the chosen protocol Typical optio
255. ns include your account name and password Your protocol might support additional options such as a buddy icon alias login options or others 6 Click Save 7 Repeat Steps 2 to 5 for each additional protocol After an account is added you can log in to that account by entering your password in the Pidgin login dialog box 6 3 Managing Your Buddy List Use the Buddy List to manage your contacts also known as buddies You can add and remove buddies from your Buddy List and you can organize your buddies in groups so they are easy to find 6 3 1 Displaying Buddies in the Buddy List After your accounts are set up all buddies who are online appear in your Buddy List If you also want your buddies who are not online to appear in the Buddy List click Buddies gt Show Offline Buddies 160 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 6 1 Pidgin Buddy List Buddy List o x Buddies Accounts Tools Help Buddies Montverio singingcats91 Offline rx Q Available E 6 3 2 Adding a Buddy To add a buddy to your Buddy List click Buddies gt Add Buddy then enter the information about that buddy NOTE For some protocols you cannot add a buddy in the Pidgin interface You must use the client for those protocols if you want to add to your buddy list After you have added a buddy in the protocol s client that buddy appears in your Buddy List 6 3 3 Removing a Buddy To remove a buddy right click that budd
256. ntrol synchronizes both faders To silence a mixer select the Mute option for that mixer When you adjust the fader of a muted channel GNOME Volume Control deselects the Mute option for that mixer Any mixer that has a Rec option can be a recording source To specify the current recording source select the Rec option for that mixer 1 20 Using the Fingerprint Reader With the ThinkFinger driver openSUSE supports the fingerprint reader by UPEK SGS Thomson Microelectronics included with some IBM and Lenovo ThinkPads The same fingerprint reader can also be found in other laptops and either as a stand alone device or built into some USB keyboards For more details refer to http thinkfinger svn sourceforge net viewvc checkout thinkfinger README in http thinkfinger svn sourceforge net viewvc checkout thinkfinger README in After registering their fingerprints users can log in to the system either by swiping a finger on the fingerprint reader or by typing in a password If the hardware check detects the fingerprint reader integrated with your laptop or connected to your system the packages libthinkfinger and pam thinkfinger are automatically installed Use the command line tool t to01 to register or verify a fingerprint for various users root permission is required for this The PAM module pam thinkfinger supports user openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide authentication by fingerprint for the following applications and actions alt
257. o Video and Statistics Some settings like the Audio settings may only be changed during a phone call Many of functions of Ekiga are available with keyboard shortcuts Table 7 1 summarizes the most important ones Table 7 1 Keyboard Shortcuts for Ekiga Ctrl Sequence Description Ctrl O Initiate a call with the current number Ctrl D Hang up Ctrl G Hold the current call Ctrl T Transfer the current call to another party Ctrl S Save the current picture to hard disk Ctrl W Close the Ekiga user interface Ctrl Q Quit Ekiga Ctrl E Start the Accounts manager Ctrl P Open the Ekiga Preferences overview This dialog allows you to do some fine tuning to your Ekiga settings Ctrl Zoom in to the picture of the Web cam Ctrl Zoom out of the picture of the Web cam Ctri Return to the normal size of the Web cam display Ctrl F Use full screen for the Web cam Ctrl H Display the history of your calls 7 4 Making a Call After Ekiga is configured appropriately making a call is straightforward 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Communicate gt Ekiga Softphone 2 Enter the SIP address of the other party at the SIP address prompt The address should look like sip username domainname or username hostname for direct local calls or like username sipserver or userid sipserver for proxied calls or calls using the service of a SIP provider If you have a SIP provider that accepts re
258. o HTML You can create an HTML Hypertext Markup Language document from one or more notes 1 In the note you want to export select the Export to HTML option from the Tools drop down menu 2 Specify where to save the HTML file 3 Optional Select Export linked notes to export any notes for which a link exists in the current note Select nclude all other linked notes to export all notes for which a link exits in any ofthe notes linked to your current note 4 Click Save 11 7 Deleting Notes To delete a note click the Delete button on the Tomboy toolbar You see a dialog box asking if you want to permanently delete the note and its contents Click Delete to discard the note permanently or click Cancel to abort the process Links to this note from other notes will still exist but will re create the note upon activation 196 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 11 8 Printing Notes Select the Print option on the Tools drop down menu to print the current note You are presented with the standard GNOME print dialog box 11 9 Configuring Tomboy Preferences To modify preferences for Tomboy right click the Tomboy icon on the GNOME panel then select Preferences You can configure the following Section 11 9 1 Editing Preferences on page 197 Section 11 9 2 Hotkey Preferences on page 198 Section 11 9 3 Synchronization Preferences on page 198 Section 11 9 4 Add ins Preferences on page 199 11 9 1 Editin
259. o and MP3 CDs from subsets of your library and subscribe to download and listen to your favorite podcasts Banshee also supports streaming audio through its Internet Radio plug in Section 17 1 Starting Banshee on page 247 Section 17 2 Listening to Music on page 248 Section 17 3 Managing Your Music Library on page 254 Section 17 4 Using Banshee with Your Digital Audio Player on page 258 Section 17 5 Creating Audio and MP3 CDs on page 260 Section 17 6 Sharing Your Music on page 260 Section 17 7 Configuring Banshee Preferences on page 261 17 1 Starting Banshee To open Banshee click Computer gt Banshee Music Player The first time you open Banshee you are prompted to import music Choose an import source such as your home directory a local folder a local file a CD or an alternate music source such as a digital audio player then click Import Music Source Figure 17 1 Import Music Library Import Music to Library Import Music to Library Lem Your music library is empty You may import new music into your library now or choose to do so later Choose an import source B Local Folder T Do not show this dialog again X Cancel Import Music Source After successfully importing your music your library is displayed Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 247 Figure 17 2 Banshee Library Bansh
260. o easily find what you re looking for Message List The message list displays a list of e mail that you have received To view an e mail in the preview pane click the e mail in the e mail list Shortcut Buttons The shortcut bar lets you switch between folders and between Evolution tools At the bottom of the shortcut bar there are buttons that let you switch tools and above that is a list of all the available folders for the current tool If you have the Evolution Connector for Microsoft Exchange installed you have an Exchange button in addition to buttons for the other tools Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 147 Status Bar The status bar periodically displays a message or tells you the progress of a task This most often happens when you re checking or sending e mail The Online Offline indicator is here too in the lower left of the window Preview Pane The preview pane displays the contents of the e mail that 1s selected in the e mail list 4 2 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar s contents always provide all the possible actions for any given view of your data If you re looking at your Inbox most of the menu items relate to e mail Some content relates to other components of Evolution and some especially those in the File menu relates to the application as a whole File Anything related to a file or to the operations of the application usually falls under this menu such as creating things saving them to disk printing
261. of each of the contributor acknowledgements and or dedications given therein L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document unaltered in their text and in their titles Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles M Delete any section Entitled Endorsements Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version GNU Licenses 293 N Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section O Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers If the Modified Version includes new front matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant To do this add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version s license notice These titles must be distinct from any other section titles You may add a section Entitled Endorsements provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties for example statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front Cover Text and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back Cover Text to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version Only one passage of Front Cover Text and one of Back Cove
262. of server types that are available Novell GroupWise Select this option if you connect to Novell GroupWise Novell GroupWise keeps e mail calendar and contact information on the server Microsoft Exchange Available only if you have installed the Connector for Microsoft Exchange It allows you to connect to a Microsoft Exchange 2000 or 2003 server which stores e mail calendar and contact information on the server IMAP Keeps the e mail on your server so you can access your e mail from multiple systems IMAP4rev1 Keeps the e mail on your server so you can access your e mail from multiple systems POP Downloads your e mail to your hard disk for permanent storage freeing up space on the e mail server USENET News Connects to the news server and downloads a list of available news digests Local Delivery Choose this option if you want to move e mail from the spool the location where mail waits for delivery and store it in your home directory You need to provide the path to the mail spool you want to use If you want to leave e mail in your system s spool files choose the Standard Unix Mbox Spool option instead 140 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide MH Format Mail Directories If you download your e mail using mh or another MH style program you should use this option You need to provide the path to the mail directory you want to use Maildir Format Mail Directories If you download your e mail using Qmail or another maildir
263. office template htm For more information about templates see Section 3 2 4 Using Templates to Format Documents on page 128 and Section 3 3 2 Using Templates in Calc on page 132 3 2 Word Processing with Writer OpenOffice org Writer is a full featured word processor with page and text formatting capabilities Its interface is similar to interfaces for other major word processors and it includes some features that are usually found only in expensive desktop publishing applications This section highlights a few key features of Writer For more information about these features and for complete instructions for using Writer look at the OpenOffice org help or any of the sources listed in Section 3 8 Finding Help and Information About OpenOffice org on page 138 NOTE Much of the information in this section can also be applied to other OpenOffice org modules For example other modules use styles similarly to how they are used in Writer Section 3 2 1 Creating a New Document on page 125 Section 3 2 2 Sharing Documents with Other Word Processors on page 126 Section 3 2 3 Formatting with Styles on page 126 Section 3 2 4 Using Templates to Format Documents on page 128 Section 3 2 5 Working with Large Documents on page 129 Section 3 2 6 Using Writer as an HTML Editor on page 131 3 2 1 Creating a New Document There are two ways to create a new document To create a document from scra
264. og out after a delay Allow user switching Select this option to offer an option in the unlock dialog box to switch to a different user account 2 2 5 Customizing the Main Menu Use the Main Menu application to customize the GNOME Main menu To start this application click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Main Menu Changes you make to the Main menu are not overwritten during a subsequent system update Changes are applied after the latest menu view is generated This section describes the following ways you can edit the Main menu Finding Menu Items on page 92 Rearranging Menu Items on page 93 Creating New Separators on page 93 Showing or Hiding Menu Items on page 94 Deleting Items from the Main Menu on page 94 Renaming Menu Items on page 94 Changing an Item s Generic Name on page 95 Adding New Items to the Main Menu on page 95 IMPORTANT The first time you use Main menu changes to the menu do not take effect until you log out and log back in After the first time changes appear immediately when you make them Some features such as the ability to nest groups and insert separators apply only if you use older versions of the GNOME menu Finding Menu Items The Main Menu window is arranged with the Main menu submenus in the Menus list on the left and the items in the selected menu in the tems list on the right Groups in a submenu are nested below that submenu To
265. ol in the following areas Buttons Motion Configuring Button Preferences Use the Buttons tabbed page to specify whether the mouse buttons are configured for left hand use You can also specify the delay between clicks for a double click Figure 2 6 Mouse Preferences Dialog Buttons Page Mouse Preferences Buttons Motion Mouse Orientation C Left handed mouse Double Click Timeout Timeout 400 milliseconds Y Hep X close The following table lists the mouse button preferences you can modify Table 2 4 Mouse Button Preferences Option Description Left handed Mouse Configures your mouse for left hand use swapping the functions of the left mouse button Double Click Timeout Use the slider to specify the amount of time that can pass between clicks when you double click If the interval between the first and second clicks exceeds the time that is specified here the action is not interpreted as a double click openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Configuring Motion Preferences Use the Motion tabbed page to set your preferences for mouse movement Figure 2 7 Mouse Preferences Dialog Motion Page Mouse Preferences Buttons Motion Speed Acceleration Slow mu i Fast Sensitivity LOW m L1 oe High Drag and Drop Threshold Small d Large G Hep X close The following table lists the mouse motion preferences you can modify Table 2 5 Mouse Motio
266. ollection of styles to suit many users needs However most users eventually need a style that does not yet exist To create a new style 1 Right click in any empty space in the Styles and Formatting window Make sure you are in the list of styles for the type of style you want to create For example if you are creating a character style make sure you are in the character style list 2 Click New 3 Click OK 4 Name your style and choose the settings you want applied with that style For details about the style options available in any tab click that tab and then click Help 3 2 4 Using Templates to Format Documents Most word processor users create more than one kind of document For example you might write letters memos and reports all of which look different and require different styles If you create a template for each of your document types the styles you need for each document are always readily available 128 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Creating a template requires a little bit of up front planning You need to determine how you want the document to look so you can create the styles you need in that template You can always change your template but a little planning can save you a lot of time later NOTE You can convert Microsoft Word templates like you would any other Word document See Converting Documents to the OpenOffice org Format on page 120 for information A detailed explanation of templates is beyo
267. ols Version Enable Disable gt Desktop Integration b Synchronization Preferences b i Formatting Information Additional add ins can be found in the Tomboy Add ins http live gnome org Tomboy PluginList page Place new add ins in the HOME tomboy addins folder 200 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Internet Chapter 12 Browsing with Firefox on page 203 Chapter 13 Transferring Data From the Internet on page 211 Chapter 14 Reading Newsfeeds with Liferea on page 215 Internet 201 202 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Browsing with Firefox Included with your openSUSE is the Mozilla Firefox Web browser With features like tabs pop up window blocking and download and image management Firefox combines the latest Web technologies You can view more than one Web page in a single window You can suppress annoying advertisements and disable images that slow you down Its easy access to different search engines helps you find the information you need Start the program from the main menu or by entering the command firefox The main program features are described in the following sections Section 12 1 Navigating Web Sites on page 203 Section 12 2 Finding Information on page 204 Section 12 3 Managing Bookmarks on page 205 Section 12 4 Using the Download Manager on page 206 Section 12 5 Customizing Firefox on page 206 Section 12
268. ompatibility with Other Office Applications 3 1 4 Starting OpenOffice org lisse 3 1 5 Improving OpenOffice org Load Time 0 0000 cee eee 3 1 6 Customizing OpenOffice org llle 3 1 7 Finding Templates 2 2 22 eee ERI Rc ei Re eR Word Processing with Writer llle 3 2 1 Creating a New Document 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 2 Sharing Documents with Other Word Processors 3 2 3 Formatting with Styles llle 3 2 4 Using Templates to Format Documents 000 3 25 Working with Large Documents 20000000 ee eee 3 2 6 Using Writer as an HTML Editor llli Creating and Using Spreadsheets with Calc llle 3 3 1 Using Formatting and Styles in Calc llle 3 3 2 Using Templates in Calc llle Creating and Using Presentations with Impress llle 3 4 1 Creating a Presentation 0 00 eee eee 3 4 2 Using Master Pages 0 cece tees Creating and Using Databases with Base 00000000 ee 3 5 1 Creating the Database 0 eee ee 3 5 2 Setting Up the Database Table 00 0 eee ee eee 3 5 3 Cr ating a Form sodes be el ed bn Sac ee oa ID Ye 3 5 4 Modifying the Form llli IIIA 3 5 5 What s Next c eue bru eee len etude ee iy eae Creating Graphics with Draw lille Creating Mathematical Formulas with Math 220 05 Finding H
269. on one desktop some shells on another and your e mail application and Web browser on the third desktop Using Ctrl Alt Left arrow and Ctrl Alt Right arrow you can rotate the cube to access the programs running in the selected desktop and avoid windows piled on top of each other on one desktop Dragging a window to the edge of the screen rotates the cube and places the window on the new desktop To rotate the cube manually in 3 D press Ctrl Alt left click the desktop then drag the mouse pointer Ctrl Alt Shift Left arrow or Right arrow lets you rotate the cube while taking the currently selected window with you Use the options under Drag the cube with the mouse by using to change the default keystrokes used to rotate the cube For information on how to add an image behind your cube see Displaying a Skydome Image Behind the Cube on page 81 Edge Flipping When edge flipping is enabled the desktop cube rotates to the next face when you bump the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen You can choose to always enable edge flipping or to enable edge flipping only when you drag a window or icon to the edge of the desktop Use the slider bar at the bottom of the tabbed window to specify how long in microseconds it takes to rotate the cube after you bump the edge of the desktop with a window or the mouse pointer Other Features Use the options on this tabbed page to configure window tiling zooming and water effects 76 openSUSE
270. one to four folders at the base of the tree depending on the tool and their system configuration Each Evolution tool has at least one called On This Computer for local information For example the folder list for the e mail tool shows any remote e mail storage you have set up plus local folders and search folders If you get large amounts of e mail you might want more folders than just your Inbox You can create multiple calendar task or contacts folders 148 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide To create a new folder 1 Click Folder New 2 Type the name of the folder in the Folder Name field 3 Select the location of the new folder 4 Click OK Folder Management Right click a folder or subfolder to display a menu with the following options Copy Copies the folder to a different location When you select this item Evolution offers a choice of locations to copy the folder to Move Moves the folder to another location Mark Messages As Read Marks all the messages in the folder as read New Folder Creates another folder in the same location Delete Deletes the folder and all its contents Rename Lets you change the name of the folder Disable Disables the account Properties Checks the number of total and unread messages in a folder and for remote folders lets you select whether to copy the folder to your local system for offline operation You can also rearrange folders and messages by dragging and dropping them
271. oo ewe aa ees Celis eB eee eae ea 246 17 Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 247 17 1 Starting Banshee slc bel RR RR eed wei oed 247 17 2 Listening to MUSIC 2i ole Dk RR Rp IgE B ere ed a ee ee bowed 248 10 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 TZ 2 1 Importing MUSIC gt sr n eR ED RR CUL EUIS 17 2 2 Playing Your MUSIC 5 ruo Rer REISEN EDI EL AES 17 2 3 Ripping Your MUusiC s imeslcccm AERA ee eR EEE Ree Oe ee EE ENEP ENNER 17 2 4 Listening to Internet Radio lslseleee A 17 2 5 Listening to Podcasts o een n e a n a e E e Managing Your Music Library iz etenn en E ED AEE ete ee 17 3 1 Organizing Your Music sseleee eee 17 3 2 Creating Smart Playlists llleee I Using Banshee with Your Digital Audio Player slsle eee 17 4 14 Playing Music from Your Digital Audio Player l l 17 4 2 Adding Music to Your Digital Audio Player llle 17 4 8 Copying Music on Your Digital Audio Player to Banshee 17 4 4 Synchronizing Your Library llle III Creating Audio and MP3 CDs ssssssseeeeeee e Sharning Your MuSiC konin eee rm ae t o e cont hue E e n cer o eo REUS EC Configuring Banshee Preferences llli ses 18 Playing Movie Files 18 1 18 2 Using the Totem Movie Player 22 5 2s RR ER ERR ERR ER RES 18 1 1 Opening a Video or Audio File lsllelee BIB 18 1 2 Opening a Video
272. oom in and out of the desktop screen and use other window effects such as shadows fading and transformations You can also configure windows to snap to other windows and screen edges when they are moved Customizing Your Settings 71 Figure 2 11 3 D Desktop B E Ll z s Enabling Desktop Effects To enable Xgl you need a graphics adapter capable of providing 3 D support and you also need the graphics driver that Linux uses to operate the graphics adapter This driver must be able to handle OpenGL or 3 D requests from the Linux kernel For a list of supported adapters see the etc X11 xgl hardware list file that is included with the openSUSE installation This file tells you which graphics cards are known to work with Xgl which cards do not work with Xgl and which cards might work with Xgl but are not supported because they are either too slow or contain too many known defects Your screen resolution must be within the 1024x768 to 1920x2000 range and your color depth must be set at 24 bit 3 D acceleration must also be enabled Use SaX2 to change your graphics card and monitor properties if necessary To enable desktop effects 1 Click Computer gt Control Center 2 Click Desktop Effects in the Look and Feel group The Desktop Effects tool analyzes your system and tries to determine whether or not you can run Xgl If it finds anything wrong it advises you on what actions you can take For exam
273. openSUSE www novell com TOS GNOME USER GUIDE October 12 2007 Novell Legal Notices Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this documentation and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to its content at any time without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes Further Novell Inc makes no representations or warranties with respect to any software and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Further Novell Inc reserves the right to make changes to any and all parts of Novell software at any time without any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes Any products or technical information provided under this Agreement may be subject to U S export controls and the trade laws of other countries You agree to comply with all export control regulations and to obtain any required licenses or classification to export re export or import deliverables You agree not to export or re export to entities on the current U S export exclusion lists or to any embargoed or terrorist countries as specified in the U S export laws You agree to not use deliverables for prohibited nuclear missile or chemical bio
274. options that you can modify Table 2 12 Internet Connection Options Option Description Direct Internet connection Connects directly to the Internet without a proxy server Manual proxy configuration Connects to the Internet through a proxy server and lets you configure the proxy server manually HTTP proxy The DNS name or IP address of the proxy server to use when you request a HTTP service Specify the port number of the HTTP service on the proxy server in the Port box Customizing Your Settings 103 Option Description Secure HTTP proxy The DNS name or IP address of the proxy server to use when you request a Secure HTTP service Specify the port number of the Secure HTTP service on the proxy server in the Port box FTP proxy The DNS name or IP address of the proxy server to use when you request an FTP service Specify the port number of the FTP service on the proxy server in the Port box Socks host The DNS name or IP address of the Socks host to use Specify the port number for the Socks protocol on the proxy server in the Port box Automatic proxy configuration Connects to the Internet through a proxy server and lets you configure the proxy server automatically Autoconfiguration URL The URL that contains the information required to configure the proxy server automatically 2 4 5 Configuring Power Management The Power Management module lets you manage your system s power saving options It is especiall
275. or graphics with transparency GIF is less often used now because of license issues GIF is also used for animated images The format can only save indexed images See Image Modes on page 231 for information about indexed images The file size can often be quite small if only a few colors are used PNG With its support for transparency lossless compression free availability and increasing browser support PNG 1s replacing GIF as the preferred format for Web graphics with transparency An added advantage is that PNG offers partial transparency which is not offered by GIF This enables smoother transitions from colored areas to transparent areas antialiasing To save the image in the chosen format press Save To abort press Cancel If the image has features that cannot be saved in the chosen format a dialog appears with choices for resolving the situation Choosing Export if offered normally gives the desired results A window then opens with the options for the format Reasonable default values are provided 15 5 Editing Images The GIMP provides a number of tools for making changes to images The functions described here are those most useful for home users Section 15 5 1 Changing the Image Size on page 226 Section 15 5 2 Selecting Parts of Images on page 227 Section 15 5 3 Applying and Removing Color on page 228 Section 15 5 4 Adjusting Color Levels on page 230 Section 15 5 5 Undoing Mistak
276. or information on configuring session preferences see Managing Sessions on page 107 1 1 2 Switching Desktops If you installed both the GNOME and the KDE desktops use the following instructions to switch desktops 1 Click Computer gt Logout gt Log Out openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide In KDE click the main menu button then click Leave gt Logout 2 On the login screen click Session 3 Select the desktop you want GNOME or KDE then click Change Session 4 Type your username then press Enter 5 Type your password then press Enter 1 1 3 Locking Your Screen To lock the screen you can do either of the following Click Computer gt Lock Screen Ifthe Lock button is present on a panel click it To add the Lock button to a panel right click the panel then click Add to Panel gt Lock Screen When you lock your screen the screen saver starts To lock your screen correctly you must have a screen saver enabled To unlock the screen move your mouse to display the locked screen dialog Type your username and password then press Enter For information on configuring your screen saver see Configuring the Screen Saver on page 96 1 2 Logging Out When you are finished using the computer you can log out and leave the system running or restart or shut down the computer If your system provides power management you can also suspend your computer making the next system start much faster than a complete reboo
277. or restart your system or suspend the computer openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 1 4 4 Status Status displays information about your hard drive and network connection including the amount of available space on your hard disk and the type of network connection you are using 1 5 Managing Folders and Files with Nautilus Use the Nautilus File Manager to create and view folders and documents run scripts and create CDs of your data In addition the File Manager provides support for Web and file viewing You can open the File Manager in the following ways Click Computer gt Nautilus File Browser Double click your Home directory icon on the desktop Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Home Folder or Nautilus File Browser Figure 1 7 File Manager user123 File Browser Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Help eS t amp g 7 Q E Forward Up Reload Home Computer Search m lt usert23 graphics Placesv Xx Em Em Em Em LJ Teal m fl Deskt bin Desktop Documents graphics esktop E File System Em E Network Servers Lo public_html SU103Bet 001 E Trash 5 items Free space 50 5 GB The elements of the Nautilus window include the following Menu Lets you perform most tasks in the file manager You can also open a pop up menu from file manager windows by right clicking in a file manager window The items in this menu depend on where you right click For example if y
278. or the cell in which it is inserted You can also create charts from cell values Section 3 3 1 Using Formatting and Styles in Calc on page 131 Section 3 3 2 Using Templates in Calc on page 132 3 3 1 Using Formatting and Styles in Calc Calc comes with a few built in cell and page styles to improve the appearance of your spreadsheets and reports Although these built in styles are adequate for many uses you will probably find it useful to create styles for your own frequently used formatting preferences The OpenOffice org Office Suite 131 Creating a Style 1 Click Format gt Styles and Formatting 2 Inthe Formatting and Styles window click either the Cell Styles or the Page Styles icon 3 Right click in the Formatting and Styles window then click New 4 Specify a name for your style and use the various tabs to set the desired formatting options 5 Click OK Modifying a Style 1 Click Format gt Styles and Formatting 2 Inthe Formatting and Styles window click either the Cell Styles or the Page Styles icon 3 Right click the name of the style you want to change then click Modify 4 Change the desired formatting options 5 Click OK 3 3 2 Using Templates in Calc If you use different styles for different types of spreadsheets you can use templates to save your styles for each spreadsheet type Then when you create a particular type of spreadsheet use the applicable template and the styles you need for that
279. ore information see Section 11 3 Linking Notes on page 193 11 2 Searching All Notes To get an overview of all your notes click ca then select Search All Notes By default the Search All Notes dialog box displays your notes in the order they were last modified Click the Note or Last Changed column headings to change the sort order Click the column heading a second time to toggle between ascending and descending order 192 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 11 2 Search All Notes Dialog Box Search All Notes Eile Edit Tools Help Search Q O Case Sensitive Note Last Changed Kitchen Remodel Today 10 24 AM F Job Search Today 10 24 AM Meeting Minutes Today 10 24 AM F Party Plans Today 10 23 AM m Using Links in Tomboy Today 9 33 AM Start Here Today 9 33 AM Total 6 notes You can find specific notes by entering text into the Search field The list of notes automatically updates to list only the notes that contain matching text To open a note listed in the Search All Notes dialog box do any of the following Double click a note Select a note then click File gt Open Right click a note then select Open Select a note then press Ctrl O 11 3 Linking Notes You can link notes in Tomboy by highlighting text in your current note then clicking the Link button in the toolbar This creates a new note and underlines the note s title in the
280. ortcuts Shortcut Description Backspace or Alt Up arrow Opens the parent folder Up arrow or Down arrow Selects an item Alt Down arrow or Enter Opens an item Shift Alt Down arrow Opens an item and closes the current folder Shift Alt Up arrow Opens the parent folder and closes the current folder Shift Ctrl W Closes all parent folders Ctrl L Opens a location by specifying a path or URL Alt Home Opens your home directory For more information click Help gt Contents in the File Manager 1 5 2 Archiving Folders If you have files you haven t recently but want to keep on your computer you can compress the files into a tape archive TAR format 1 Inthe Nautilus view pane right click the folder you want to archive then click Create Archive Create Archive Archive Documents tar gz Location File System X Cancel Create 2 Accept the default archive filename or provide a new name 3 Select a file extension from the drop down list use tar gz for the most common archive form 4 Specify a location for the archive file then click Create To extract an archived file right click the file then select Extract Here 28 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 1 5 3 Creating a CD DVD If your system has a CD or DVD read write drive you can use the Nautilus file manager to burn CDs and DVDs 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt GNOME CD DVD Creato
281. ou can add applications and applets to the bottom panel for quick access An applet is a small program and an application is usually a more robust stand alone program Adding an applet puts useful utilities where you can easily access them The GNOME desktop comes with many applets You can see a complete list by right clicking the bottom panel and selecting Add to Panel 22 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 1 4 Add to Panel Dialog Box Add to Panel Find an item to add to the panel zzz Custom Application Launcher Create a new launcher Application Launcher w Battery Charge Monitor Brightness Applet Adjusts Laptop panel brightness Character Palette Insert characters Clock Get the current time and date Command Line Mini Commander Connect to Server 300p Copy a launcher from the applications menu Monitor a laptop s remaining power Connect to a remote computer or shared disk CPU Frequency Scaling Monitor v Qe X Close Some useful applets include the following Table 1 2 Useful Applets Applet Dictionary Lookup Force Quit Search for Files Sticky Notes Traditional Main Menu Volume Control Weather Report Workspace Switcher Description Look up a word in an online dictionary Terminate an application This is especially useful if you want to terminate an application that is no longer respond
282. ou can switch between your library playlists and music devices while in Mini Mode To activate Mini Mode click View gt Mini mode Figure 17 4 Banshee in Mini Mode 5 Schubert Unfinished Symphony Various n 3 1 27 of 2 03 mf Full Mode d KI DU col e Music Library c Schubert Unfinished Symphony Classical Treasures 25 Classical Favorites Various Music Recommendations Banshee automatically recommends music that it thinks you might like based on the currently playing song It finds artists and popular songs that others with similar musical tastes enjoy 250 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide If you don t want to receive recommendations click Edit gt Plugins then deselect Music Recommendations Figure 17 5 Banshee Music Recommendations Pathetique Beethoven Music Edit Playback Tools View Help ls Kd UD P 1 08 of 16 01 J Music Library Pathetique by Beethoven from user123 Write CD d Search E Filter on All Columns it Music Library 32 Podcasts Radio Classical Tr 25 ah Track Artist Title Album Time Rating IE ZT 22 23 24 25 various Various Various Various Various Beethoven Tenalkovsky7 Dance Ur I Borodin Polovtsian Dance Kabalevsky Dance Of th Offenbach La Vie Parisi Debussy La Mer Classical treasures Z5 C Classical Treasures 25 C C
283. ou can use the results lists to open a file forward it via e mail or display it in the file manager Simply right click an item in the results list and select the option you want The options available for an item depend on the type of file it is Clicking a file in the list displays a preview of the file and information such as the title path and date the file was last modified or accessed For more information see Chapter 10 Searching with Beagle on page 185 With Search for Files you can locate files on your computer or in the file system by using a variety of search criteria such as file content date owner or file size Start it by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search for Files 1 8 1 Searching for Files You can use Search for Files on the System menu to locate files on your computer or on a network share by using any number of search criteria Figure 1 12 Search for Files Dialog eq Name contains Look in folder File System Search for Files P Select more options x Close Ena 34 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Search for Files uses the find grep and locate UNIX commands and all searches are case insensitive You can also open the Search for Files dialog by entering the following command in a terminal window gnome search tool Performing a Basic Search 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search for Files 2 Type
284. ou right click a file or folder you can select items related to the file or folder If you right click the background of a view pane you can select items related to the display of items in the view pane Toolbar Lets you quickly navigate among files and folders and provides access to files and folders The toolbar contains Back Forward Up Stop Reload Home Computer and Search buttons Location Bar Lets you locate files folders and URI sites Side Pane Lets you navigate or display information about the selected file or folder Use the drop down list to customize what is shown in the pane The list includes ways to view information about files perform actions on files add emblems to files view a history of recently visited sites and display your files in the Tree system To close the side pane click the X at the top right of the side pane To display the side pane click View gt Side Pane Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 27 View Pane Displays folders and files Use the options on the View menu to increase or decrease the size of content in the view pane and to display items as a list or as icons Status Bar Displays the number of items in a folder and indicates the available free space When a file is selected the status bar displays the filename and size 1 5 1 File Manager Navigation Shortcuts Some simple shortcuts for navigating in the File Manager include the following Table 1 4 File Manager Navigation Sh
285. ovell products and to get updates see www novell com documentation Novell Trademarks For Novell trademarks see the Novell Trademark and Service Mark list http www novell com company legal trademarks tmlist html Third Party Materials All third party trademarks are the property of their respective owners Parts of this manual are copyright O 2003 2004 Sun Microsystems Contents About This Guide Part GNOME Desktop 1 Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 1 1 Logging In and Selecting a Desktop 0 0000 eee 1 1 1 What Isia SESSION o idosa ey sues ua da p a p rct p reper ee eee 1 1 2 Switching Desktops er eel a e A eee e rA PRI RU 1 1 3 Locking Your Screen 5 nns ERR bie AER EZ Eogging QUE o i nus epe RRRERIR Rp be E PER EREMO IPSO IER 1 2 1 Logging Out or Switching Users 0 0 0 cece eae 1 2 2 Restarting or Shutting Down the Computer lille lessen 1 3 Desktop Basics 2 erinnere qe mpl pee ee baw pei ve baa began 1 3 1 Default Desktop Icons llssleseeeee eee eae 1 3 2 Desktop Menu 5L os is cnet RE eee Raten UE om eR e pee e S 1 3 3 Bottom Pariel scere RR IRR RR Ree v ER ERAI S 1 89 4 X Adding Applets and Applications to the Panel 0 0 0 0 eese 1 4 Using the Main Men x IcecuReemIeve nene Gate pace NOR RIED tur die EIE Ud 1 4 1 Search Bar iuga sess anode pads otegi tap heidi ieee hetl ataei des d 1 4 2 Main Menu Tabs x neta ear ee eee nAP S IH Aie ERE
286. p Effects You can also do these things with Xgl Switching Tasks on page 80 Unfolding the Cube on page 81 Displaying a Skydome Image Behind the Cube on page 81 Switching Tasks Press Alt Tab to display a thumbnail view of all windows open on your desktop While holding the the Alt key down press Tab to cycle through the list of windows The currently highlighted window will appear in focus Release the keys to access that window Figure 2 18 Thumbnail View E F Spot Ele Edt Wew Find Tags Help 2 o at PI Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Browse Editimage Fullscreen Sideshow P Favores 000 8 Hidden B rese Q Everts 80 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Unfolding the Cube Press Ctrl Alt Down arrow to unfold the desktop cube opening a panoramic view of all your desktops Your desktop cube is laid out like a filmstrip on your screen You can use the Left arrow and Right arrow to select a different screen This is similar to the switcher feature Alt Tab but lets you view a thumbnail of your entire desktop instead of only your active windows Figure 2 19 Panoramic View of All Desktop Cubes Displaying a Skydome Image Behind the Cube You can add background wallpaper also known as a skydome image that is visible when you rotate or unfold the desktop cube 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt GNOME Configuration Editor or press Alt F2 and enter gconf editor 2 Navigate to the
287. p continue http 3A 2F 2Fpicasaweb google com 2F amp passive true amp service Ih2 SmugMug http www smugmug com or 23 http www 23hq com you can post your files directly from F Spot to your account 1 Select the photos you want to export 2 Click File gt Export gt Export to Flickr Export to Picasaweb Export to SmugMug or Export to 23hq 3 Select or deselect the options you want in the Export dialog box The options displayed in the Export dialog box depend on the type of account you are exporting to For example Flickr and 23 exports require authorization in order to upload photos To do this click Authorize to open a Web browser then log in to your account 4 Click OK 16 7 Basic Photo Editing F Spot offers several basic image editing functions such as the ability to remove red eye crop and adjust colors and brightness When you edit a photo a new copy called a version is created so your original photo is never altered After your first edit to a photo subsequent edits modify the same version If you want to create multiple versions of a photo for example with different cropping or coloring click File gt Create New Version To access a photo s original version click File gt Version gt Original 1 Select the photo you want to edit 2 To enter edit mode click the Edit Photo icon in the toolbar double click the image or press Enter Eile Edit View Find Tags Help
288. ple you might be advised to change your screen resolution or color depth or to activate 3 D acceleration Follow the on screen prompts to configure your system for Xgl 72 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Desktop Effects Settings 3D Desktop Video card Unknown Your graphics card is not in Xgl s database 3D Acceleration Enabled Desktop Effects Disabled Your graphics card is not known to be supported by Xgl However it does appear to support 3D acceleration To enable Xgl press Enable Desktop Effects below This will log you out and return you to the login screen If the login screen does not come back up you will need to disable Xgl from the command line by logging in as root and running gnome xgl switch disable xgl If you are having problems configuring Desktop Effects you can click the Help button below to visit the troubleshooting page on the openSUSE wiki for advice Enable Desktop Effects Lone 3 After your system is configured for Xgl click Enable Desktop Effects 4 Type the root password then click Continue 5 Click Log Out to log out of your session then type your username and password to log back in The default desktop effects are now enabled For example windows wobble when they first appear and when you move them they fade away when you close them and dragging a window to the far right of the screen rotates the desktop cube To
289. published in 2006 that you have labeled with the Classical genre Banshee automatically updates all smart playlists when a change is made to your music library If you import new songs Banshee checks to see if they match any of your available smart playlists 256 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide When applicable Banshee also updates your smart playlists if you just listened to a song or updated a song s metadata Creating a Smart Playlist on page 257 Creating a Smart Playlist from a Search on page 257 Creating a Smart Playlist 1 In Banshee click Music gt New Smart Playlist 2 Specify a name for the smart playlist then select the criteria for songs in this playlist to match Use the plus and minus symbols to add or remove criteria To use an already defined smart playlist click Predefined Smart Playlists then select the playlist you want New Smart Playlist v Match al gt of the following Album lis p O Limit to 25 songs selected by Album v Predefined Smart Playlists Neglected Favorites 700 MB of Favorites 80 Minutes of Favorites Unheard Unheard Podcasts X Cancel 3 Click Save The smart playlist is added to your music library Creating a Smart Playlist from a Search You can create a smart playlist based on search criteria For example if you search for all songs in your music library by a certain artist Banshee can create a smart playlist in which all songs by that artist are se
290. r gt More Applications gt System gt Search 10 2 Search Tips You can use both uppercase and lowercase letters in search terms Searches are not case sensitive by default To perform a case sensitive search put double quotation marks around the word you want to match exactly For example if you use APPLE in a search apple is ignored To search for optional terms use OR for example apples OR oranges IMPORTANT The OR is case sensitive when used to indicate optional search terms To exclude search terms use a minus sign in front of the term you want to exclude for example apples oranges will find results containing apples but not oranges To search for an exact phrase or word put quotation marks around the phrase or word Common words such as a the and is are ignored The base form of a search term is used when searching for example a search for driving will match drive drives and driven 186 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 10 3 Performing a Property Search By default the Beagle search tool looks for search terms in the text of documents and in their metadata To search for a word in a particular property use property query For example author john searches for files that have john listed in the Author property Table 10 1 Supported Property Keywords Keyword album artist author creator email extension or ext genre
291. r or insert a blank disc and click Make Data CD DVD or Make Audio CD DVD 2 Copy the files you want to put on the CD or DVD into the Nautilus CD DVD Creator window CD DVD Creator File Browser Eile Edit View Go Bookmarks Help e a 8 4 amp 4 g Reload Home Computer Search 9 Benno cnr Placesv x B user123 DE Desktop EJ File System D Network Servers E 8 SU103Bet 001 controlcenter png firefox downloads qw701clnxm tgz Novell Client 10 2 E Trash png i386 2007614 CD1 iso 4 items 3 Click Write to Disc 4 Modify information in the Write to Disc dialog box or accept the defaults then click Write The files are burned to the disc This could take a few minutes depending on the amount of data being burned and the speed of your burner You can also use the Banshee music player to burn audio and MP3 CDs 1 5 4 Using Bookmarks Use the Nautilus Bookmarks feature to mark your favorite folders 1 Select the folder or item you want to create a bookmark for 2 Click Bookmarks gt Add Bookmark The bookmark is added to the list with the folder name as the bookmark name When you bookmark a file it is the folder that is actually bookmarked 3 To select an item from your Bookmarks list click Bookmarks then click the desired bookmark in the list You can also organize your Bookmarks list by clicking Bookmarks gt Edit Bookmarks and making your selections in the dialog box Getting
292. r General Preferences Power Management Preferences On AC Power General Actions When the power button is pressed Ask me lt When the suspend button is pressed Do nothing S Notification Area O Never display an icon O Always display an icon Extras M Use sound to notify in event of an error a System settings Qe 1 15 4 Session and System Idle Times gnome screensaver is a session daemon that monitors user input if the mouse has or has not been moved and if the keyboard has or has not been pressed then starts a timeout When the value of this timeout reaches the value set in Screensaver Preferences using the Regard this computer as idle after option then the login is marked as session idle At this point GNOME Power Manager performs the session idle actions such as enabling low power mode and lowering the laptop panel brightness Figure 1 24 Changing the Session Idle Timeout in Screensaver Preferences r zn LL Screensaver Preferences 3j Screensaver theme Blank screen k Random E Anemone Anemotaxis AntMaze AntSpotlight Apollonian Apple IL Atlantis Attraction f a lt gt Preview 10 minutes Regard the computer as idle after IV Activate screensaver when computer is idle Lock screen when screensaver is active oe Help A Power Management 3 Close 46 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide As soon as
293. r New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and an idea of what it does Copyright C yyyy name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail GNU Licenses 289 If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this w
294. r Text may be added by or through arrangements made by any one entity If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of you may not add another but you may replace the old one on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one The author s and publisher s of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version 5 COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents unmodified and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers The combined work need only contain one copy of this License and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it in parentheses the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known or else a unique number Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the lic
295. r edit or select the key then click Key gt Properties 3 Use the options on the Key tab to change the name of the key or the passphrase associated with the key 4 Click the Details tab which contains the following properties Algorithm Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key Strength Indicates the length in bits of a key The longer the key the more security it provides However a long key does not make up for the use of a weak passphrase Location The location where the private key has been stored Fingerprint A unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key Icrt4est gmail com Key Details Technical Details Algorithm RSA Strength 2048 Location home user123 ssh id_rsa Fingerprint c3 7e 19 db b7 45 1f 02 79 1d ed 45 9a 49 d3 c2 Export Complete Key 3 Close 5 Click Close 9 4 Importing Keys 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Key gt Import 178 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 Select a file containing at least one ASCII armored public key 4 Click Open to import the key You can also paste keys inside Passwords and Encryption Keys 1 Select an ASCII armored public block of text then copy it to the clipboard 2 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 3 Click Edit gt Paste Keys 9 5 Exporting Keys 1 Click Comput
296. rces and services Learn more about this in Section 8 2 Accessing Network Shares on page 170 Sharing Folders in Mixed Environments Using Nautilus you can configure your files and folders to share with other members of your network Make your data readable or writable for users from any Windows or Linux workstation Learn more about this in Section 8 3 Sharing Folders on page 170 Managing Windows Files openSUSE can be configured to integrate into an existing Windows network Your Linux machine then behaves like a Windows client It takes all account information from the Active Directory domain controller just as the Windows clients do Learn more about this in Section 8 4 Managing Windows Files on page 171 Configuring and Accessing a Windows Network Printer You can configure a Windows network printer through the GNOME Control Center Learn how to configure this in Section 8 5 Configuring and Accessing a Windows Network Printer on page 172 8 1 General Notes on File Sharing and Network Browsing Whether and to what extent you can use file sharing and network browsing on your machine and in your network depends on the network structure and on the configuration of your machine Before setting up either file sharing or network browsing contact your system administrator to make sure that your network structure supports this feature and to check whether your company s security policies permit it Network browsing
297. rchive that was created in a format that Archive Manager does not recognize the application displays an error message 1 16 2 Creating Archives kh O N In Archive Manager click Archive gt New Specify the name and location of the new archive Select an archive type from the Archive type drop down list Click New Archive Manager creates an empty archive but does not yet write the archive to disk Archive Manager writes a new archive to disk only when the archive contains at least one file If you create a new archive and quit Archive Manager before you add any files to the archive Archive Manager deletes the archive Add files and folders to the new archive 5a Click Edit gt Add Files or Edit gt Add a Folder then select the files or folders you want to add You cannot add folders to the archive with the Add Files dialog box Use the Add a Folder dialog box 5b Click Add Archive Manager adds the files to the current folder in the archive You can also add files to an archive in a file manager window without opening Archive Manager See Section 1 5 2 Archiving Folders on page 28 for more information 1 16 3 Extracting Files from an Archive 1 2 3 4 In Archive Manager select the files that you want to extract Click Archive gt Extract Specify the folder where Archive Manager will extract the files Choose from the following extract options Option Description All files Extracts all files fro
298. re a GNOME desktop session between multiple users and set session sharing preferences These preferences can have a direct impact on the security of your system 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Remote Desktop Customizing Your Settings 105 Remote Desktop Preferences Sharing _ Allow other users to view your desktop AN Bap Security E When a user tries to view or control your desktop L X Close 2 Choose from the following options Option Description Allow other users to view your desktop Lets remote users view your session All keyboard pointer and clipboard events from the remote user are ignored Allow other users to control your desktop Lets other users access and control your session from a remote location Users can view your desktop using this Click the highlighted text to system address by e mail command to a remote user When a user tries to view or control your Select the following security considerations when a desktop remote user tries to view or control your session Ask you for confirmation Select this option if you want remote users to ask you for confirmation when they want to share your session This option lets you be aware of other users who connect to your session You can also decide what time is suitable for the remote user to connect to your session Require the user to enter this password Select this option to authenticate the remote user if authentication is
299. read or import To import information you might want to use the Export tool under Windows Before importing e mail from Netscape make sure you have selected File gt Compact All Folders If you don t Evolution imports and undeletes the messages in your Trash folders NOTE Evolution uses standard file types for e mail and calendar information so you can copy those files from your evolution directory The file formats used are mbox for e mail and iCal for calendar information Contacts files are stored in a database but can be saved as a standard vCard To export contact data open your contacts tool and select the contacts you want to export press Ctrl A to select them all Click File gt Save as VCard 4 2 Using Evolution An Overview Now that the first run configuration has finished you re ready to begin using Evolution Here s a quick explanation of what s happening in your main Evolution window 146 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 4 1 Evolution Window Inbox 86 unread 89 total Evolution Eile Edit View Folder Message Search Help a v Ly ky ly e e ta o wv New Get Mail Reply Replyto All Forward Print Delete Junk Not Junk Cancel In 86 unread 89 tota Show All Messages Search E in Current Folder Date On This Computer From Subject The Evolution Team lt evolu Welcome to Evolution Nh CustomerCare Lowes Thankyou for s
300. ress Ctrl N This opens a dialog in which to create settings for the new image If desired select a predefined setting called a Template To create a custom template select File gt Dialogs gt Templates and use the controls offered by the window that opens In the mage Size section set the size of the image to create in pixels or another unit Click the unit to select another unit from the list of available units The ratio between pixels and a unit is set in Resolution which appears when the Advanced Options section is open A resolution of 72 pixels per inch corresponds to common screen display It is sufficient for Web page graphics A higher resolution should be used for images to print For most printers a resolution of 300 pixels per inch results in an acceptable quality In Colorspace select whether the image should be in color RGB or Grayscale For detailed information about image types see Image Modes on page 231 Select the Fill Type for the new image Foreground Color and Background Color use the colors selected in the toolbox White uses a white background in the image Transparent creates a clear image Transparency is represented by a gray checkerboard pattern Enter a comment for the new image in Comment When the settings meet your needs press OK To restore the default settings press Reset Pressing Cancel stops creation of a new image Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 223 15 3 2 Opening an Existing Image
301. results list and select the option you want The options available for an item in the results list depend on the type of file it is Selecting a file in the list displays a preview of the file and information such as the title path and date the file was last modified or accessed Searching with Beagle 185 Figure 10 2 Desktop Search Dialog Box With a File Selected Desktop Search beagle Search View Help Eind beagle Q Find Now v Images 2 results v Documents 2 results v Websites 2 results Eb ree Search for data on your desktop beagle search png EJ beagle png PNG 706x486 45 2 KB PNG 1600x1200 373 9 KB E about beagles odt Introducing a New Product 12 pages A Today Beagle Wikipedia the free enc beagles Google Search http en wikipedia org wiki Beagle http Awww google com search q beagl Title about beagles odt Last Edited Today Full Path home user123 Documents about beagles odt Beagles The Beagle is a breed of medium sized dog shorter legs and longer Showing all 8 matches Use the Search menu to limit your search to files in a specific location such as your address book or Web pages or to display only a specific type of file in your results list The View menu lets you sort the items in your results list according to name relevance or the date the file was last modified You can also access Desktop Search by clicking Compute
302. ributing any large number of copies to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document 292 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 4 MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it In addition you must do these things in the Modified Version A Use in the Title Page and on the covers if any a title distinct from that of the Document and from those of previous versions which should if there were any be listed in the History section of the Document You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission B List on the Title Page as authors one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document all of its principal authors if it has fewer than five unless they release you from this requirement C State on the Title page the name ofthe publisher of the Modified Version as the publisher D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyr
303. rom the drop down list Figure 1 26 Save Screenshot Dialog Box Save Screenshot Name Screenshot Save in folder E Desktop X Cancel i Save openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide You can also use The GIMP to take screen shots In The GIMP click File gt Acquire gt Screen Shot select a Single Window or the Whole Screen then click Grab 1 18 Viewing PDF Files Documents that need to be shared or printed across platforms can be saved as PDF Portable Document Format files openSUSE ships with the Evince PDF Viewer Figure 1 27 Evince PDF Viewer SuSE Linux Desktop User Guide en Eile Edit View Go gt Previous Next of 246 Fit Page Width Index me 12 1 The Initial Browser Window 159 160 Configuring For More Infor The Web Browse 161 Opening Web 162 Saving Web P 162 Enhanced We 163 Bookmarks 163 Java and Java 164 v The Mozilla Web 165 The Initial Brow 166 The Menu Bar 167 HomeUser cuntacs Sue Mum Linia enter Salta lone Usar Products SUSF Accessor Lre Prager Linux Penguins The Navigati 168 Tig Mesh couch The Persona 169 aaa NM owe Sidebar 169 Figure 12 1 The Initial Browser Window Working with T 170 Preferences 171 In its default configuration the window presented by the browser includes Overview of
304. rompts you with a few questions as it sets up a mail account and helps you import mail from your old mail client Then it shows you how many new messages you have and lists upcoming appointments and tasks as well as the current weather and news from news feeds The calendar address book and mail tools are available in the shortcut bar on the left Press Ctrl N to open a new item for whatever part of Evolution you re working in In mail this creates a new message If you re in the address book Ctrl N creates a new contact card and in the calendar Ctrl N creates a new appointment For more information see Chapter 4 Evolution E Mail and Calendaring on page 139 1 14 Opening or Creating Documents with OpenOffice org For creating and editing documents OpenOffice org is installed with the GNOME desktop OpenOffice org is a complete set of office tools that can both read and save Microsoft Office file formats OpenOffice org has a word processor a spreadsheet a database a drawing tool and a presentation program To get started click Computer gt OpenOffice org Writer or select an OpenOffice org module by clicking Computer gt More Applications gt Office then select the module you want to open A number of sample documents and templates are included with OpenOffice org You can access the templates by clicking File gt New gt Templates and Documents In addition you can use wizards which guide you through the creation of lett
305. s click the box to the right of Activate deactivate when I type until New accelerator appears Then press the keystrokes you want to use The new keystrokes appear in the box You can also choose to tile windows by moving the mouse pointer to the top left default top right bottom left or bottom right of the screen Customizing Your Settings 77 78 Figure 2 16 Application Tiling De e 2 2 game contri center Tailed t load modila gromebrestpad Litqnomebrestsad so canet leone stares object file Me socn file or airectery MARIDMS Acceasibility failed to tint sod Mes pected 1 ake this application accessisie gt t gnene contral center 495 WANT get actions Lt ROBLIN Can t Laad bacrgr omt Sest top Utx Messaqe Failed t load medule gnasebreskpad libgnassbrestied 0 comot jem shaved object file f direc gnthe gl settings 1942 Coon WARNING Arcossibitity failed to find soal le Lingas prong CALOR L ended to make tkis application accessible gnome ng tat tina 3940 CRITICAL genet bey Changer aitartien valam be MAL failed Zoom These options give you the ability to zoom in and out of areas on your screen which significantly improves desktop accessibility for visually impaired users or for anyone who wants to see a part of the screen displayed in a larger size By default pressing the Super key the Windows key Button 3 zooms in on part of the desktop If you hav
306. s License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 1s applicable to these copies of the Document then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate the Document s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate 8 TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4 Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections You may include a translation of this License and all the license notices in the Document and any Warranty Disclaimers provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer the original version will prevail If a section in the Document is Entitled Acknowledgements Dedications or History the requirement section 4 to Preserve its Title sectio
307. s graph shows the percentage charge available for the composite primary battery If you have a main laptop battery and an auxiliary battery only the averaged value is shown A legend is not shown with this graph Power History This graph shows the power charge history used by the composite primary battery The line represents the amount of power that is either being used to charge the batteries in the system or the power being used by the system from the batteries You should see the line go up when processor intensive tasks are performed and go down when the system is at idle or when the screen is dimmed A legend is shown with this graph when data events have been received You do not receive rate data from your computer if it is not charging or discharging or if the computer is suspended This is because of hardware limitations where the rate is only sent from the battery management chip rather than the power management chip on the motherboard Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 43 Estimated Time History This graph shows the estimated charge history for the composite primary battery The line represents the amount of time required until charged or the amount of time until discharge This line should go proportionally up when the power decreases and down when the rate increases A legend is shown with this graph when data events have been received 1 15 3 Modifying Power Management Preferences The Power Management Preferences d
308. s in the Inbox Select if you want to check new messages for junk content Select if you want to check for junk messages in the Inbox folder on oO Oi Select if you want to automatically synchronize remote mail locally 9 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail POP Receiving Options If you select POP as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 2 Select if you want to leave messages on the server 3 Select if you want to disable support for all POP3 extensions support for POP3 4 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail Evolution E Mail and Calendaring 143 USENET News Receiving Options If you select USENET News as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 2 Select if you want to show folders in short notation For example comp os linux would appear as c o linux 3 Select if you want to show relative folder names in the subscription dialog box If you select to show relative folder names in the subscription page only the name of the folder is displayed For example the folder evol
309. s the session properties that you can configure Table 2 13 Session Properties for Session Managed Applications Option Description Order Specifies the order in which the session manager starts session managed startup applications The session manager starts applications with lower order values first The default value is 50 To set the startup order of an application select the application in the table Use the Order box to specify the startup order value 108 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Option Description Style Determines the restart style of an application To select a restart style for an application select the application in the table and then select one of the following styles Normal Starts automatically when you start a session Use the ki11 command to terminate applications with this restart style during a session Restart Restarts automatically when you close or terminate the application Select this style for an application if it must run continuously during your session To terminate an application with this restart style select the application in the table and then click Remove Trash Does not start when you start a session Settings Starts automatically when you start a session Applications with this style usually have a low startup order and store your configuration settings for GNOME and session managed applications Remove Deletes the selected application from the list The application is remo
310. s you want to open then click Add You can also drag a file from another application such as a file manager to the Totem Movie Player window The Totem Movie Player application opens the file and plays the movie or song Totem Movie Player displays the title ofthe movie or song beneath the display area and in the titlebar of the window If you try to open a file format that Totem Movie Player does not recognize the application displays an error message You can double click a video or audio file in the Nautilus file manager to open it on the Totem Movie Player window 18 1 2 Opening a Video or Audio File by URI Location 1 To start the Totem Movie Player click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Totem Movie Player 2 Click Movie gt Open Location 3 Specify the URI location of the file you want to open then click Open 18 1 3 Playing a DVD VCD or CD To play a DVD VCD or CD insert the disc in the optical device of your computer then click Movie gt Play Disc To eject a DVD VCD or CD click Movie gt Eject To pause a movie or song that is playing click the button or click Movie gt Play Pause When you pause a movie or song the status bar displays Paused and the time elapsed on the current movie or song stops To resume playing a movie or song click the button or click Movie gt Play Pause 264 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide To view properties of a movie or song click View gt
311. screen Add Wallpaper Opens a dialog where you can select an image file to use as the background picture Remove Removes a desktop wallpaper after you select it and then click Remove Desktop Colors Lets you specify a color scheme by using the options in the Desktop Color drop down list and the color selector buttons You can specify a color scheme by using any of the following options Solid Color specifies a single color for the desktop background To select a color click Color In the Pick a Color dialog select a color and then click OK Horizontal Gradient creates a gradient effect from the left screen edge to the right screen edge Click Left Color to display the Pick a Color dialog then select the color that you want to appear at the left edge Click Right Color then select the color that you want to appear at the right edge Vertical Gradient creates a gradient effect from the top screen edge to the bottom screen edge Click Top Color to display the Pick a Color dialog then select the color that you want to appear at the top edge Click Bottom Color then select the color that you want to appear at the bottom edge 3 When you are satisfied with your choices click Close Your desktop immediately changes to show the new settings Configuring Fonts You can select the fonts to use in your applications windows terminals and desktop To set the Font preferences click Computer gt Control Center gt Loo
312. se of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by th
313. se your Windows data Viewing Windows Data with Nautilus Use Nautilus to display the contents of your Windows user folder just as you would for displaying a Linux directory Create new files and folders on the Windows server Manipulating Windows Data with GNOME Applications Many GNOME applications allow you to open files on the Windows server manipulate them and save them back to the Windows server Single Sign On GNOME applications including Nautilus support Single Sign On which means that to access other Windows resources such as Web servers proxy servers or groupware servers like MS Exchange you do not need to reauthenticate Authentication against all these is handled silently in the background after you provide your username and password on login Accessing Network Resources 171 To access your Windows data using Nautilus 1 Open Nautilus and click Network Servers 2 Click Windows Network 3 Click the icon of the workgroup containing the computer you want to access 4 Click the computer s icon and authenticate if prompted to do so then navigate to the shared folder on that computer To create folders in your Windows user folder by using Nautilus proceed as you would when creating a Linux folder 8 5 Configuring and Accessing a Windows Network Printer When you are part of a corporate network and authenticating against a Windows Active Directory server you can access corporate resources such as printers GNOME al
314. select by saturation value red green or blue select the corresponding radio button to the right The sliders and number fields can also be used to modify the currently selected color Experiment a bit to find out what works best for you When the desired color is shown in Current click OK To restore the original values shown when the dialog was opened click Reset To stop changing the color click Cancel To select a color that already exists in your image use the color picker tool which has an icon that resembles an eye dropper With the tool options set whether the foreground or background color should be selected Then click a point in the image that shows the desired color When the color is right click Close to close the tool s dialog Painting and Erasing To paint and erase use the tools from the toolbox There are a number of options available to fine tune each tool Pressure sensitivity options apply only when a pressure sensitive graphics tablet is used The pencil brush airbrush and eraser work much like their real life equivalents The ink tool works like a calligraphy pen Paint by clicking and dragging The bucket fill is a method of coloring areas of an image It fills based on color boundaries in the image Adjusting the threshold modifies its sensitivity to color changes Adding Text With the text tool easily add text to an image With the tool options select the desired font font size color justification
315. shortcut keys for an action select the action and then press the keys you want to associate with the action To disable the shortcut keys for an action click the shortcut for the action then press Backspace 2 4 System System settings include the following Section 2 4 1 Configuring Date and Time on page 102 Section 2 4 2 Configuring Streaming Audio and Video on page 102 Section 2 4 3 Configuring Language Settings on page 102 Section 2 4 4 Configuring Network Proxies on page 103 Section 2 4 5 Configuring Power Management on page 104 Section 2 4 6 Setting Preferred Applications on page 105 Section 2 4 7 Setting Session Sharing Preferences on page 105 Section 2 4 8 Configuring Beagle Search Settings on page 106 Section 2 4 9 Managing Sessions on page 107 Section 2 4 10 Setting Sound Preferences on page 109 Customizing Your Settings 101 Section 2 4 11 Managing Users and Groups on page 112 Section 2 4 12 Configuring Administrative Settings with YaST on page 112 2 4 1 Configuring Date and Time To change your date and time configuration such as your time zone or the way the date and time are displayed click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Date and Time This opens the YaST Date and Time module which requires root privileges Enter the root password and follow the instructions on the YaST pages 2 4 2 Configuring Streaming Audio and V
316. sical WCPE Wake Forest NC Great Classical Music 24 hours a day gt KDAV Davidson NC WDAV 89 9 a public radio service of Davidson College KUSC Los Angeles CA Classical KUSC is the largest non profit classical music station in the country KBYU Provo UT Classical 89 Great Music Sound Ideas 7 WBJC Baltimore MD Founded in 1951 WBJC is a public non commercial radio station broadcasting 24 hours a day v Metal Rock SnakeNet Metal Radio Home of the Metal Nation ChroniX Radio Aggressive Radio Network Loud amp Clear The EDGE Music is the heart and soul of The EDGE v RadioPass 7 Hot List Rolling Stone editors favorite new songs 7 New Faces Up and coming artists and bands ready to break big Rolling Stone Immortals Music of the 50 greatest artists of alltime as selected by a Rolling Stone panel of musicians produ Random Notes Reel through the years and the genres with Rolling Stone s ultimate shuffle play 7 Rolling Stone 500 The top 500 songs of all time as picked by a five star panel assembled by Rolling Stone magazine Summer Station Songs of sun surf road trips and tropical adventure Adding a New Internet Radio Station 1 Right click Radio in the source list then click Add Station amp Add new radio station Enter the Group Title and URL of the radio station you wish to add A description is optional Station Group Classical Station Title Stream URL
317. size 35 8 KiB Write Options Write speed Maximum possible S Help X Cancel Write 3 Assign a name to your image disk then select the writing speed 4 Click Write to start the CD writing process 16 6 3 Exporting Photos to a Folder 1 Select the photos you want to export 2 Click File gt Export gt Export to Folder Folder Export Photos Destination Eolder Ed Desktop E P Gallery Name Gallery Description Iv Open destination when done exporting Export Method Create standalone web gallery Save the files only Create gallery using Original Style Resize to 800 pixels lv Autorotate 4 X Cancel ok 3 Choose from the following export methods Create standalone web gallery Exports your photos to an interactive Website ready for you to upload Save the files only Exports your photos as files within directories without putting them into a gallery Create gallery using Original Exports your photos ready for use with Jakub Steiner s Original Photo Gallery http jimmac musichall cz original php software 4 Click OK 242 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 16 6 4 Posting to a Flickr Picasa Web Album SmugMug or 23 Account If you use Flickr http www flickr com Picasa Web Album https www google com accounts ServiceLogin hl en_US am
318. spend Failure When a suspend failure occurs you might receive this following warning The most common reason for this notification is that the current user does not have permission to suspend or hibernate the computer Figure 1 19 GNOME Power Manager Notification When Suspend Failure Occurs Suspend Problem Your computer failed to suspend Check the FAQ page for common problems 1 15 2 Viewing Power Statistics The statistics program lets you view the power consumption of your laptop hardware in graphic form openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 1 20 Power History Going From Battery Power to AC 2 Power Graphs 0X OnAC On battery o LCD dim Bl LCD resume Suspend Hibernate Resume A Lid closed A Lid opened Notification Charging Discharging Charged Os 3m 6m 3m 12m 15m 18m 21m 24m 27m 30m Add related events gt Z Graph type Power History Add legend Device Help X cose To access the statistics graphs click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Power Statistics You might not see some options or graphs if your computer does not have the required hardware You might also see other hardware not shown here for example UPS devices but these are treated the same way as other devices Change History on page 43 Power History on page 43 Estimated Time History on page 44 Change History Thi
319. stall your search plug in with Add or abort with Cancel 12 2 3 Searching in the Current Page To search inside a Web page click Edit gt Find in This Page or press Ctrl F The find bar opens Usually it is displayed at the bottom of a window Type your query in the input field Firefox finds 204 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide the first occurrence of this phrase You can find other occurrences of the phrase by pressing F3 or clicking the Next button in the find bar You can also highlight all occurrences by pressing the Highlight all button 12 3 Managing Bookmarks Bookmarks offer a convenient way of saving links to your favorite Web sites To add the current Web site to your list of bookmarks click Bookmarks gt Bookmark This Page If your browser currently displays multiple Web sites on tabs only the URL on the currently selected tab is added to your list of bookmarks When adding a bookmark you can specify an alternative name for the bookmark and select a folder where Firefox should store it To bookmark Web sites on multiple tabs select Bookmark All Tabs Firefox creates a new folder that includes bookmarks of each site displayed on each tab To remove a Web site from the bookmarks list click Bookmarks right click the bookmark in the list then click Delete 12 3 1 Using the Bookmark Manager The bookmark manager can be used to manage the properties name and address location for each bookmark and organize the bookmarks into
320. style program you should use this option You need to provide the path to the mail directory you want to use Standard Unix Mbox Spool or Directory If you want to read and store e mail in the mail spool on your local system choose this option You need to provide the path to the mail spool you want to use None Select this if you do not plan to check e mail with this account If you select this there are no configuration options Remote Configuration Options If you selected Novell GroupWise IMAP POP or USENET News as your server you need to specify additional information 1 Type the hostname of your e mail server in the Hostname field If you don t know the hostname contact your administrator 2 Type your username for the account in the Username field 3 Select to use a secure SSL connection If your server supports secure connections you should enable this security option If you are unsure if your server supports a secure connection contact your system administrator 4 Select your authentication type in the Authentication list or Click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported types Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work If you are unsure what authentication type you need contact your system administrator 5 Select if you want Evolution to remember your password 6 Click Forwar
321. suse103 opensuse103_startup data sec_updater html sec_updater in the openSUSE 10 3 Start Up Guide 1 22 For More Information Along with the applications described in this chapter for getting started GNOME can run many other applications You can find detailed information about many important applications in the other parts of this manual To learn more about GNOME and GNOME applications see http www gnome org http www gnome org and http gnomefiles org http gnomefiles org To report bugs or add feature requests go to http bugzilla gnome org http bugzilla gnome org openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Customizing Your Settings You can change the way the GNOME desktop looks and behaves to suit your own personal tastes and needs Some of the settings you might want to change include Keyboard and mouse configuration see Section 2 1 4 Modifying Keyboard Preferences on page 57 and Section 2 1 6 Configuring the Mouse on page 62 Desktop background see Changing the Desktop Background on page 68 Screen saver see Section 2 2 7 Configuring the Screen Saver on page 96 Password see Section 2 3 3 Changing Your Password on page 100 Sounds see Section 2 4 10 Setting Sound Preferences on page 109 These settings and others can be changed in the Control Center To access the Control Center click Computer gt Control Center The Control Center is divided into the fo
322. t 1 2 1 Logging Out or Switching Users 1 Click Computer gt Logout 2 Select one of the following options Log out Logs you out of the current session and returns you to the Login screen Switch User Suspends your session allowing another user to log in and use the computer 1 2 2 Restarting or Shutting Down the Computer 1 Click Computer gt Shutdown 2 Select one of the following options Shutdown Logs you out of the current session then turns off the computer Restart Logs you out of the current session then restarts the computer Sleep Puts your computer in a temporary state that conserves power The state of your session is preserved including all applications you have running and all documents you have open Hibernate Suspends your session using no power until the computer is restarted The state of your session is preserved including all applications you have running and all documents you have open Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 19 20 1 3 Desktop Basics As with other common desktop products the main components of the GNOME desktop are icons that link to files folders or programs as well as the panel at the bottom of the screen similar to the taskbar in Windows Double click an icon to start its associated program Right click an icon to access additional menus and options You can also right click any empty space on the desktop to access additional menus for configuring or managing the desktop i
323. t Key None Prompt for a key This key is used to sign messages when no other key is chosen O When encrypting always include myself as a recipient 3X Close 3 Choose from the following options Default Key Specifies the key you want to use to sign files Files are encrypted with this key if the When encrypting always include myself as a recipient option is selected When encrypting always include myself as a recipient Select this option to add yourself to the recipients list for all files encrypted by Passwords and Encryption Keys If you do not select this option and you do not select yourself as a recipient you cannot decrypt any files you encrypt 4 Click Close Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 181 9 9 2 Passphrase Cache Enabling Passwords and Encryption Keys s passphrase caching ability allows you to perform many operations that require entering your passphrase without reentering it every time seahorse daemon takes the place of gpg agent Letting the cached passphrases expire is usually a good idea This then requires reentering your passphrase but adds security 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Edit gt Preferences then click the Passphrase Cache tab Encryption Preferences Encryption Settings Passphrase Cache Key Servers Key Sharing Remember PGP Passphrases A non supported PGP passphrase caching agent
324. t can be duplicated with sticky keys To configure keyboard accessibility settings click Computer gt Control Center gt Personal gt Accessibility The module consists of the three tabs Basic Filters and Mouse Keys Before modifying settings activate Enable Keyboard Accessibility Features Figure 2 33 Keyboard Accessibility Preferences Dialog M Basic Filters Mouse Keys Features Disable if unused for Beep when features tumed on or off from keyboard import Feature Settings Enable Sticky Keys NI v v Enable Repeat Keys Gy Dey IT Dra SI p so milliseconds Speed 30 z characters second Type to test settings Help Features Basic Tab The keyboard accessibility functions can be deactivated automatically after a certain time Set an appropriate time limit measured in seconds with the slider The system can additionally provide audible feedback when the keyboard accessibility functions are activated and deactivated Enable Sticky Keys Basic Tab Some keyboard shortcuts require that one key a modifier key is kept pressed constantly this applies to Alt Ctrl and Shift while the rest of the shortcut is typed When sticky keys are used the system regards those keys as staying pressed after being pressed once For an audible feedback generated each tim
325. t for HKP and LDAP keyservers HKP Servers HKP keyservers are ordinary Web based keyservers such as the popular hkp pgp mit edu 11371 also accessible at http pgp mit edu http pgp mit edu LDAP Keyservers LDAP keyservers are less common but use the standard LDAP protocol to serve keys Idap keyserver pgp com is a good LDAP server 3 Click Close 9 9 4 Key Sharing Key sharing is provided by DNS SD also known as Bonjour or Rendezvous Enabling key sharing adds the local Passwords and Encryption Keys users public key rings to the remote search dialog box Using these local key servers is generally faster than accessing remote servers 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt Utilities gt Passwords and Encryption Keys 2 Click Edit gt Preferences then click the Key Sharing tab Encryption Preferences Encryption Settings Passphrase Cache Key Servers Key Sharing O Share my keys with others on my network Sharing your keys allows other people on your network to use d the keys you ve collected This means they can automatically encrypt things for you or those you know without you having to send them your key Note Your personal keys will not be compromised Que 3 Select Share my keys with others on my network 4 Click Close Encryption with Passwords and Encryption Keys 183 184 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Searching with Beagle Beagle is a search too
326. t to a network over a DSL connection use YaST to configure your connection NOTE Root privileges are required for configuring your DSL Connection 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt DSL 2 Enter the root password YaST opens 3 Follow the instructions in YaST to configure DSL openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 2 1 3 Configuring Your Graphics Card and Monitor Your graphics card was configured for your monitor during installation If you ever need to change these settings click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Graphics Card and Monitor then set the appropriate options for your monitor NOTE Graphics card configuration is done in YaST2 and requires root privileges 2 1 4 Modifying Keyboard Preferences Use the Keyboard Preferences tool to modify the autorepeat preferences for your keyboard and to configure typing break settings Click Computer gt Control Center gt Hardware gt Keyboard You can set the following preferences Keyboard Layouts Layout Options Typing Break Configuring Keyboard Preferences Use the Keyboard tabbed page to set general keyboard preferences Figure 2 2 Keyboard Preferences Dialog Keyboard Page Keyboard Preferences Keyboard Layouts Layout Options Typing Break Repeat Keys IV Key presses repeat when key is held down Delay Short m io Long Speed Slow Ls RID Fast Cursor Blinking Cursor blinks in text box
327. tch click File gt New gt Text Document To use a standard format and predefined elements for your own documents try a wizard Wizards are small utilities that let you make some basic decisions then produce a ready made document from a template For example to create a business letter click File gt Wizards gt Letter Using the wizard s dialogs easily create a basic document using a standard format A sample wizard dialog is shown in Figure 3 2 The OpenOffice org Office Suite 125 Figure 3 2 An OpenOffice org Wizard Letter Wizard Steps Please choose the type of letter and page design Business letter Page design Elegant Printed items 7 Use letterhead paper with pre printed elements Recipient and sender Formal personal letter Footer Name and location Personal letter This wizard helps you to create a letter template You can then use the template as the basis for writing letters as often as desired Enter text in the document window as desired Use the Formatting toolbar or the Format menu to adjust the appearance of the document Use the File menu or the relevant buttons in the toolbar to print and save your document With the options under nsert add extra items to your document such as a table picture or chart 3 2 2 Sharing Documents with Other Word Processors You can use Writer to edit documents created in a variety of other word processors For example you can import a Microsoft
328. template are available in the Formatting and Styles window A detailed explanation of templates is beyond the scope of this section However more information is found in the help system and detailed how tos are found at the OpenOffice org Documentation page http documentation openoffice org HOW_TO index html Creating a Template A Calc template is a spreadsheet that contains styles and content that you want to appear in every spreadsheet created with that template such as headings or other cell styles When a spreadsheet is created or opened with the template the styles are automatically applied to that spreadsheet To create a template Click File gt New gt Spreadsheet Create the styles and content that you want to use in any spreadsheet that uses this template Click File gt Templates gt Save Specify a name for the template a kk WN In the Categories box click the category you want to place the template in The category is the folder where the template is stored 6 Click OK 132 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 3 4 Creating and Using Presentations with Impress Use OpenOffice org Impress to create presentations for screen display or printing such as slide shows or transparencies If you have used other presentation software you can move comfortably to Impress which works very similarly to other presentation software Impress can open and save Microsoft Powerpoint presentations which means you can exchange
329. th Group Wise allowing documents to be placed in and loaded from the GroupWise Document Management System 3 1 2 Using the Standard Edition of OpenOffice org You can use the standard edition of OpenOffice org rather than the Novell edition If you install the latest version of OpenOffice org all of your Novell Edition files remain compatible However the standard edition does not contain the enhancements made in the Novell edition 3 1 3 Compatibility with Other Office Applications OpenOffice org can work with documents spreadsheets presentations and databases in many other formats including Microsoft Office They can be seamlessly opened like other files and saved back to the original format Because the Microsoft formats are proprietary and the specifications are not available to other applications there are occasionally formatting issues If you have problems with your documents consider opening them in the original application and resaving in an open format such as RTF for text documents or CSV for spreadsheets The OpenOffice org Office Suite 119 TIP For good information about migrating from other office suites to OpenOffice org refer to the OpenOffice org Migration Guide http documentation openoffice org manuals oooauthors2 0600MG MigrationGuide pdf Converting Documents to the OpenOffice org Format on page 120 Sharing Files with Users of Other Office Suites on page 120 Converting Documents to the OpenO
330. th OpenOffice org sls 1 15 Controlling Your Desktop s Power Management 0200 00 eee eee llle 1 15 1 GNOME Power Manager Notification Messages 000 1 15 2 Viewing Power Statistics liliis 1 15 3 Modifying Power Management Preferences 0002000 eee eeeeee 1 15 4 Session and System Idle Times 0 eee 1 16 Creating Displaying and Decompressing Archives 0 00 cece eee 13 15 17 17 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 21 21 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 30 31 32 33 33 34 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 40 41 41 42 44 46 47 Contents 5 6 11621 Opening an Archive vx ede Seo LR UR CREARE QE RE 47 1 16 2 Creating Archives 1 cuo cu RE ERR WERL ee E ee ee 48 1 16 3 Extracting Files from an Archive 0 0 cee tees 48 147 Taking Screen Shots ios setae ba veg erbari eg oe og healed beth gab ah eae we 50 1 18 Viewing PDE Files ur REI eg ee oe Rp ie Ee ee eee BUDE ee 51 1 19 Controlling Sound ssec vee Males be beg ere Npe kedet ee Ls bas Salen dua we 51 1 20 Using the Fingerprint Reader 1 0 0 ete 52 1 20 14 Registering a Fingerprint 1 0 0 2 eee ae 53 1 20 2 Additional Information 0 0 0 eee 53 1 21 Obtaining Software Updates 0 0 0 mh 54 1 22 For More Information iai s s leute bed Reet hed bE ede a taniy Beebe es bed bade ee 54 2 Customizing Your Settings 55 2 1 Hardware o
331. that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of
332. the Find bar Photos that don t have that tag or any tag at all are displayed You can also right click a tag in the Find bar then select Exclude To remove a tag from the search drag it away from the Find bar or right click the tag and select Remove By default photos tagged Hidden are not shown You must explicitly include the Hidden tag in your search to show such photos There is also a type to find entry Press the forward slash to open it It cannot be used at the same time as the Find bar You can type queries such as TagA and TagB or TagC and TagD At any point if F Spot recognizes what you have typed as a valid query it updates your search The not operator is not yet supported Figure 16 5 Type to find Search Eile Edit View Find Tags Help fe fails Ba M p Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Browse EditImage Fullscreen Slideshow gt Favorites 8 Hidden 007 People Places Events 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 eu vino vio 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 vio ee ee v 7 Photos out of 25 85 4 16 6 Exporting Image Collections F Spot offers a range of export functions for your photo collections Generating a Web Site Gallery page 241 Exporting Photos to CD page 241 Exporting Photos to a Folder page 242 Posting to a Flickr Picasa Web Album SmugMug or 23 Account page 243 240 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 16 6 1 Generating a Web Site Gallery I
333. the primary language whether you want to adapt the keyboard layout or time zone to the primary language and any secondary languages you need to support on the computer 4 Click Accept 102 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide The language configuration settings are written to several configuration files This process can take a few minutes The new settings take effect immediately after they are written to the configuration files 2 4 4 Configuring Network Proxies The Network Proxy Configuration tool lets you configure how your system connects to the Internet You can configure the desktop to connect to a proxy server and specify the details of the server A proxy server is a server that intercepts requests to another server and fulfills the request itself if it can You can specify the Domain Name Service DNS name or the Internet Protocol IP address of the proxy server A DNS name is a unique alphabetic identifier for a computer on a network An IP address is a unique numeric identifier for a computer on a network Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Network Proxies Figure 2 36 Network Proxy Configuration Dialog Network Proxy Preferences Proxy Configuration Advanced Configuration 3 Use the system s proxy settings Direct internet connection 9 Manual proxy configuration Automatic proxy configuration 6 The following table lists the Internet connection
334. the search text in the Name contains field The search text can be a filename or partial filename with or without wildcards as shown in the following table Search Text Example Result Full or partial filename myfile txt Searches for all files that contain myfile txt in the filename Partial filename combined with ch Searches for all files that have a c or h wildcards extension 3 Inthe Look in folder field type the path to the directory where you want Search for Files to begin the search 4 Click Find Search for Files searches in the directory that you specify and any subdirectories of the directory and displays the results of the search in the Search Results list If Search for Files does not find any files that match the search criteria the application displays the message No iles foundin the Search results list Adding Search Options Use Show more options to search by file content dates owner or file size 1 Click Computer gt More Applications gt System gt Search for Files 2 Type the search text in the Name contains field 3 In the Look in folder field type the path to the directory where you want Search for Files to begin the search 4 Click Select more options then click Available options 5 Select a search option that you want to apply then click Add The following options are available Option Description Contains the text Searches for a file by filename Type a full filename
335. the whole must be on the terms of this License whose 286 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or
336. them and quitting the program itself Edit Holds useful tools that help you edit text and move it around Lets you access the settings and configuration options in the Edit menu View Lets you decide how Evolution should look Some of the features control the appearance of Evolution as a whole and others the way a particular kind of information appears Folder Holds actions that can be performed on folders You can find things like copy rename delete and so on Message Holds actions that can be applied to a message If there is only one target for the action such as replying to a message you can normally find it in the Message menu Search Lets you search for messages or for phrases within a message You can also see previous searches you have made In addition to the Search menu there is a text entry box in the toolbar that you can use to search for messages You can also create a search folder from a search Help Opens the Evolution Help files 4 2 2 The Shortcut Bar Evolution s most important Job is to give you access to your information and help you use it quickly One way it does that is through the shortcut bar which is the column on the left side of the main window The buttons such as Mail and Contacts are the shortcuts Above them is a list of folders for the current Evolution tool The folder list organizes your e mail calendars contact lists and task lists in a tree similar to a file tree Most people find
337. ting Colors Paint tools use the foreground color To select the color first click the display box of the foreground color A dialog with four tabs opens These tabs provide different color selection methods Only the first tab shown in The Basic Color Selector Dialog on page 228 is described here The new color is shown in Current The previous color is shown in Old Figure 15 2 The Basic Color Selector Dialog w 027 O S C Ov fo O D cuw o O E o HTMLNotaion 000000 curent CL JL Jl TE o L JE JE JE JE JI Help amp JReset X cancel Dok I o DIDI Er Ete ET o o o o o 228 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide The easiest way to select a color is using the colored areas in the boxes to the left In the narrow vertical bar click a color similar to the desired color The larger box to the left then shows available nuances Click the desired color It is then shown in Current If that color is not what you want try again The arrow button to the right of Current lets you save a number of possible colors Click the arrow to copy the current color to the history A color can then be selected by clicking it in the history A color can also be selected by directly entering its hexadecimal color code in HTML Notation The color selector defaults to selecting a color by hue which is usually easiest for a new user To
338. tings 87 88 To start the Lockdown Editor click Computer gt Control Center gt Look and Feel gt Lockdown Editor You see a window with a list of options on the left Each option represents a different category of desktop settings that can be disabled General on page 88 Panel on page 89 Epiphany Web Browser on page 90 GNOME Screensaver on page 91 When the Lockdown Editor starts it tries to connect to the GConf mandatory configuration source xml merged S prefix etc gconf gconf xml mandatory If you have access to this configuration source a lock icon is displayed next to the check box for each setting Click the lock to specify if the setting is mandatory If the setting is mandatory regular users cannot change or override the setting If you don t have access to the mandatory configuration source the lock icon does not appear In this case all disabled settings are stored in the user s default configuration source and can be modified later using other tools such as gconf editor or gconftool 2 For more information about GConf and mandatory configuration sources see GConf Configuration Sources http www gnome org learn admin guide latest gconf 24 html gconf 26 in the GNOME Desktop System Administration Guide General Use the options in the General category to disable printing access to the command line and saving to disk Figure 2 26 General Lockdown Editor Settings Lockdown
339. tioned in Section 16 4 Managing Tags on page 238 tags can be used as a means to find certain images Another way to find images is to use the Timeline below the toolbar By dragging the little frame along this time line you can limit the images displayed in the thumbnail overview to those taken in a selected time frame F Spot starts with a default time line but you can edit the time span by moving the sliders to the right and left of the time line You can also start a search by clicking Find gt Show Find Bar With the find bar displayed you can drag tags from the tag view to the find bar Figure 16 4 Show Find Bar in F Spot Eile Edit View Find Tags Help T 3 5 B gt Import Rotate Left Rotate Right Browse EditImage Fullscreen Slideshow E Hidden People 5 w Places Events 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 t 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 9 10 2007 e 9 f 44 C 4 10 Photos out of 25 To find photos that are tagged with more than one tag select the first tag in the tag view or drag the tag onto the Find bar then drag the second tag and drop it on top of the first You can also right Managing Your Digital Image Collection 239 click the second tag in the tag view or click Find gt Find Selected Tag With then select the first tag or group of tags You can search for photos that don t have a particular tag by double clicking a tag in
340. to rita pando cheats eta shades b eera oes puteus Ry ee phoe er a e ODE 56 2 1 1 Configuring Bluetooth Services 0 0 0 0 cect eee 56 2 1 2 Configuring Your DSL Connection lisse 56 2 1 3 Configuring Your Graphics Card and Monitor 0 0 leeren 57 2 1 4 Modifying Keyboard Preferences iles 57 2 1 5 Configuring a Modem lssssslselee 61 2 1 6 Configuring the Mouse 1 0 0 eee RH eee 62 2 1 7 Configuring a Network Card 63 2 1 8 Installing and Configuring Printers 0 00 cee RR 64 2 1 9 Configuring Removable Drives and Media 0 0c eee eee eee 64 2 1 10 Configuring a Scanner 0 ete 64 2 1 41 Specifying Screen Resolution Settings llle 65 2 1 12 Configuring a Touchpad nee 65 2 2 Lookand F8el oium erue er PLI eva e ES Ride eed eae ee tae 66 2 2 1 Customizing the Desktop Appearance lslsssleee eee 66 2 2 2 Configuring Desktop Effects llle 71 2 2 3 File Management Preferences e 82 2 2 4 Locking Desktop Functions 0 0 cece eee 87 2 25 Customizing the Main Menu llle teens 92 2 2 6 Improving Access for the Visually Impaired llle eese 95 2 2 7 Configuring the Screen Saver 0 0 0 cette eee 96 2 2 8 Customizing Window Behavior 000 e eee tte eae 96 2 3 Personal brororim res dae pe oe pe ae A Seed a ates ee deu atta ote ele be 97 2 3 1 Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Sett
341. to sleep when it has been inactive for a specified amount of time to specify what happens when your laptop lid is closed and what happens when battery power is critically low When your computer is asleep it is turned on but in a low power mode It takes less time for a computer to wake up from sleep than it does for the computer to start up after being turned off You can also set only the display to sleep If your computer is in the middle of a task for example burning a DVD that you want to finish while you are away set only the display to sleep Figure 1 22 GNOME Power Manager On Battery Power Preferences Power Management Preferences On AC Power On Battery Power General Actions Put computer to sleep when inactive for When laptop lid is closed Blank screen e When battery power is critically low Shutdown e Display Put display to sleep when inactive for 15 minifes Dim display brightness by 5096 Dim display when idle Q Help X Close General Preferences Use the options on the General Power Management Preferences dialog box to configure miscellaneous options related to GNOME Power Manager s behavior such as the actions to perform when the power or suspend buttons are pressed if an icon is displayed in the notification area and if sound is used to notify you of an error Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 45 Figure 1 23 GNOME Power Manage
342. to view the contents of the archive in Archive Manager Figure 1 25 Archive Manager graphics tar gz Archive Edit View Help New Open Extract Delete Add Files Add Folder Name v Size Type Date Modifi E graphics 0 bytes Folder 07 Septem computermenu png 640 1 KB PNG image 07 Septem graphii gpm acpower png PNG image 07 Septem gpm_general png PNG image 07 Septem PNG image yast png 07 Septem 5 objects 790 3 KB 2 objects selected 55 8 KB Section 1 16 1 Opening an Archive on page 47 Section 1 16 2 Creating Archives on page 48 Section 1 16 3 Extracting Files from an Archive on page 48 1 16 1 Opening an Archive 1 In Archive Manager click Archive gt Open Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 47 48 2 3 Select the archive you want to open Click Open Archive Manager automatically determines the archive type and displays the following The archive name in the window title bar The archive contents in the display area The total number of files in the archive and the size of the archive when uncompressed in the status bar To open another archive click Archive gt Open again Archive Manager opens each archive in a new window To open another archive in the same window you must first click Archive 7 Close to close the current archive then click Archive gt Open If you try to open an a
343. tself Figure 1 1 GNOME Desktop mE gt Start Here The GIMP M9 uo Fri Aug 17 10 15 AM B By default the desktop features two key icons your personal Home folder and a trash can for deleted items Other icons representing devices on your computer such as CD drives might also be present on the desktop If you double click your Home folder the Nautilus file manager starts and displays the contents of your home directory For more information about using Nautilus see Managing Folders and Files with Nautilus on page 27 Right clicking an icon displays a menu that offers file operations such as copying cutting or renaming Selecting Properties from the menu displays a configuration dialog The title of an icon as well as the icon itself can be changed with Select Custom Icon The Emblems tab lets you add graphical descriptive symbols to the icon The Permissions tab lets you set access permissions for the selected files The Notes tab lets you manage comments The menu for the trash also features the Empty Trash option which deletes the contents of the trash A link is a special type of file that points to another file or folder When you perform an action on a link the action is performed on the file or folder that the link points to When you delete a link you delete only the link file not the file that the link points to openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide To create a link on the desktop to a folder or a file access the obj
344. tter MY Dimensions Width Height Media type Standard v Media source Standard v Ink type Standard Y Resolution Standard v Position Orientation Auto gt Left Top Right Bottom Right Border Bottom Border Center Vertically l Both Horizontally Size Scaling mmm 100 0 I Scale by Percent Width Units Inch Use Original D PPI Height O cm Image Size Qua DOE Save Print and X Cancel E Print HED Settings Save Settings da In the bottom portion of the window you can adjust the image size Click Use Original Image Size to take these settings from the image itself This is recommended if you set an appropriate print size and resolution in the image Adjust the image s position on the page with the fields in Position or by dragging the image in Preview When satisfied with the settings press Print or to save the settings for future use use Print and Save Settings Cancel stops printing 15 7 For More Information The following resources are useful for GIMP users even if some of them apply to older versions Help provides access to the internal help system This documentation is also available in HTML and PDF formats at http docs gimp org http docs gimp org Find many tutorials explaining basic or advanced image manipulation techniques with The GIMP at http gimp org tutorials http gimp org tutorials
345. tware Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed 0 PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual textbook or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it with or without modifying it either commercially or noncommercially Secondarily this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others This License is a kind of copyleft which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense It complements the GNU General Public License which is a copyleft license designed for free software We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software because free software needs free documentation a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does But this License is not limited to software manuals it can be used for any 290 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide textual work regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference 1 APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any
346. tyS0 or dev ttyS1 for serial cradles under Windows these are referred to as COM ports or dev usb for USB cradles You need to make sure that your user account has read write and execute permissions on this device To add those permissions become root with the su command and enter the command chmod atwrx dev ttyS0 Substitute the name of the device you are setting If you have not chosen the correct device you get an error message when you click OK Speed Select a number from the drop down menu The higher the number the faster you are asking the system to transfer information Normally you should not change this option because it is set by default for the fastest value that your connection type can provide If you experience problems at high speeds reducing the transfer speed might help 5 1 4 Conduit Settings A conduit is a specialized program that channels data between your computer and your handheld The gnome pilot package includes several and you can also install additional conduits such as those for Evolution Each configured handheld might have its own set of conduits and conduit settings If a conduit is disabled that type of data is ignored when you HotSync If a conduit is enabled its data 1s synchronized according to its settings To enable or disable a conduit select it and click the Enable or Disable button on the right side of the list of conduits To edit the settings select a conduit and click the Sett
347. u are working in the office Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Sessions This module consists of three tabbed pages Startup Programs Lets you specify non session managed startup applications which start automatically when you start a session Current Session Lets you specify startup order values and select restart styles for the session managed applications in your current session Session Options Lets you remember running applications when logging out so they open the next time you log in Configuring Startup Applications Use the Startup Programs tabbed page to specify non session managed startup applications Figure 2 37 Sessions Dialog Startup Programs Page Current Session Session Options Additional startup programs Enabled Program Add F Beagle Search Daemon a No description FA GNOME Printer Applet GNOME Printer Applet Network Manager Network Manager applet J OpenSUSE Updater applet Simple software updates notificati si Power Manager Power management daemon SUSE No description Si si ca a Startup applications are applications that start automatically when you begin a session You specify the commands that run these applications and the commands execute automatically when you log in Customizing Your Settings 107 You can also start session managed applications automatically For more information see Remembering R
348. u use a character style you only need to change the style from bold to italics and all text that has been formatted with that style automatically changes from bold to italics Text formatted with a menu option or button overrides any styles you have applied If you use the Bold button to format some text and an emphasis style to format other text then changing the style does not change the text that you formatted with the button even if you later apply the style to the text you bolded with the button You must manually unbold the text and then apply the style Likewise if you manually format your paragraphs using Format gt Paragraph it is easy to end up with inconsistent paragraph formatting This is especially true if you copy and paste paragraphs from other documents with different formatting However if you apply paragraph styles formatting remains consistent If you change a style the change is automatically applied to all paragraphs formatted with that style Changing a Style With styles you can change formatting throughout a document by changing a style rather than applying the change separately everywhere you want to apply the new formatting 1 In the Styles and Formatting window right click the style you want to change 2 Click Modify 3 Change the settings for the selected style For information about the available settings refer to the OpenOffice org online help 4 Click OK Creating a Style OpenOffice org comes with a c
349. u want to keep If you want your photo to be the exact dimensions necessary for a certain print Size you can constrain the kind of selection F Spot will allow you to draw by choosing the appropriate size from the Constraint drop down list See the description of the Remove Red Eye function for details on making a selection on your photo After you make your crop selection click the Crop icon beneath the photo to finalize the crop If you are working with the original photo cropping creates a new version of your photo To remove red eye from a photo select a zone containing the eyes You might want to zoom in on the image to accurately select the eyes in the photo You should be able to correct both eyes on the same person at once or even the eyes from multiple people at once If this doesn t work or if the selected zone contains some vivid red parts such as lips you will probably need to correct one red eye at a time To make your selection click one corner of the rectangle that will be your selection then drag your mouse to the diagonal corner and release it You can resize your selection by dragging its edges and you can move it by clicking in the middle of it and dragging it to where you want it After you have selected a zone remove the red by clicking the Red eye icon beneath the photo Access this function by clicking Edit Sharpen Adjust the values for Amount Radius and Threshold to your needs then click OK Fun
350. ument you have written include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page Copyright c YEAR YOUR NAME Permission is granted to copy distribute and or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License Version 1 2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections no Front Cover Texts and no Back Cover Texts A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License If you have Invariant Sections Front Cover Texts and Back Cover Texts replace the with Texts line with this with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES with the Front Cover Texts being LIST and with the Back Cover Texts being LIST If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts or some other combination of the three merge those two alternatives to suit the situation If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license such as the GNU General Public License to permit their use in free software 296 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide
351. unning Applications when Logging Out on page 109 To add a startup application click Add The Add Startup Program dialog is displayed Specify the command to start the application in the Startup Command field If you specify more than one startup application use the Order box to specify the startup order of the each application To edit a startup application select the startup application and then click Edit The Edit Startup Program dialog is displayed Modify the command and the startup order for the startup application To delete a startup application select the startup application and then click Remove Deselect the check box in the Enabled column to disable the application but leave it in the list Disabled applications do not start at startup but can easily be enabled to do so Setting Session Properties Use the Current Session tabbed page to specify startup order values and to choose restart styles for the session managed applications in your current session Figure 2 38 Sessions Dialog Current Session Page Startup Programs Current Session Session Options Currently running programs Order Style 50 40 20 40 50 50 50 gnome cups icon sa elah J Sa ll o M P Order 50 2 Style Normal Gd 2 uU et w ct oO Program gnome session properties gnome panel metacity ooo nautilus gnome power manager nm applet ea 5596996999 v The following table list
352. ution mail would appear as evolution 4 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail Local Delivery Receiving Options If you select Local Delivery as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 2 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail MH Format Mail Directories Receiving Options If you select MH Format Mail Directories as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 2 Select if you want to user the folders summary file 3 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sending Mail Maildir Format Mail Directories Receiving Options If you select Maildir Format Mail Directories as your receiving server type you need to specify the following options 1 Select if you want Evolution to automatically check for new mail If you select this option you need to specify how often Evolution should check for new messages 144 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide 2 Select if you want to apply filters to new messages in the Inbox 3 Click Forward When you have finished continue with Sendi
353. utton or buttons you selected then scroll the mouse wheel up or down to change the transparency of the window Figure 2 13 Translucent Window Music Edt Bisybact Tools Wew Hep mp M Computer B 8 penze Desktop Cube Ed LJ Banshee Music Player Classical Treasures 25 Classical Favorites t a Trek z L z z z L4 3 39arfog2zso9 e wronx Art t Various Various Various Various Tite Rossini Wiliam Tet Ove Strauss Blue Danube Ponchieti Dance of the Bizet Carmen Overture Schubert Serenade Schubert Marche Mitare J Strauss Radetshy Ma Chopin Necture Debussy Clare de Lune Schubert Unfinished S Mendeisschn Violin Con Tehalhovaly Waitz OFFI Liszt Hungarian Rhapsody Verd Dance Of The Prie Strauss Voices of Spring Mozart Miewet in D Tehakovery Dance of th Tehalkovely V n Con Liszt Spanish Rnapsedy Hcopycd EBHrnpotco qi Album Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 Classical Treasures 25 25 ems 4 mites 36 seconds f Cowo Cent
354. vanced Linux Sound Architecture ff Test Default Mixer Tracks Device e Select the device and tracks to control with the keyboard Use the Shift and Control keys to select multiple tracks if required Help X close Click the drop down list for each type of sound and select the application to use In most cases Autodetect is the best choice unless you want to use a specific application Setting General Sound Preferences Use the Sounds tab to specify when to launch the sound server You can also enable sound event functions 110 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Figure 2 40 Sound Preferences Dialog General Page Sound Preferences Enable software sound mixing ESD M Play system sounds System Sounds ES Select check box No sound e Choose menu item No sound o Click on command button No sound e Miscellaneous message No sound s P Question dialog No sound c Error message Warning beep NAMEME e Play Warning message No sound Iu Informational message No sound s Log out Logout c p Play Log in Login p Play i Help 3X Close Click Enable software sound mixing ESD to start the sound server when you start a session When the sound server is active the desktop can play sounds Click Play system sounds to play sounds when particular events occur in the desktop Fi
355. ve macros for the selected event 4 Click OK Changing the Global Settings Global settings can be changed in any OpenOffice org application by clicking Tools gt Options on the menu bar This opens the window shown in the figure below A tree structure is used to display categories of settings Figure 3 1 The Options Window Options OpenOffice org User Data Address Company First Last name Initials Paths Street Colors Fonts City State Zip Security f Appearance Country Region Accessibility Java Load Save Language Settings OpenOffice org Writer Fax E mail OpenOffice org Writer Web m OpenOffice org Base Charts Internet Title Position Tel Home Work The following table lists the settings categories along with a brief description of each category NOTE The settings categories that appear depend on the module you are working in For example if you are in Writer the OpenOffice org Writer category appears in the list but the OpenOffice org Calc category does not The OpenOffice org Base category appears in both Calc and Writer The Application column in the table shows where each setting category is available Table 3 2 Global Setting Categories aba Description Application OpenOffice org Various basic settings including your user data such as your All address and e mail important paths and settings for printers and external programs
356. ve the file from a list of commonly used directories To use a different directory or create a new one open Browse for other folders It is recommended to leave Select File Type set to By Extension 224 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide With that setting The GIMP determines the file type based on the extension appended to the filename The following file types are frequently useful XCF This is the native format of the application It saves all layer and path information along with the image itself Even if you need an image in another format it is usually a good idea to save a copy as XCF to simplify future modifications Information about layers is available in Layers on page 230 PAT This is the format used for The GIMP patterns Saving an image in this format lets you use the image as a fill pattern in The GIMP JPG JPG or JPEG is a common format for photographs and Web page graphics without transparency Its compression method enables reduction of file sizes but information is lost when compressing It might be a good idea to use the preview option when adjusting the compression level Levels of 85 to 75 often result in an acceptable image quality with reasonable compression Saving a backup in a lossless format like XCF is also recommended If you are editing an image save only the finished image as JPG Repeatedly loading a JPG then saving can quickly result in poor image quality GIF Although very popular in the past f
357. ved from the session manager and closed Applications that you delete are not started the next time you start a session Apply Applies changes made to the startup order and the restart style Remembering Running Applications when Logging Out Use the Session Options tab to automatically save the current state of your session The session manager saves the session managed applications that are open and the settings associated with the session managed applications The next time you start a session the applications start automatically with the saved settings 2 4 10 Setting Sound Preferences The Sound Preferences tool lets you control when the sound server starts You can also specify which sounds to play when particular events occur Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Sound to open the Sound Preferences tool Setting Sound Devices on page 109 Setting General Sound Preferences on page 110 Setting System Beep Preferences on page 111 Setting Sound Devices Use the Devices tab to configure the application to use for various types of sounds Customizing Your Settings 109 Figure 2 39 Sound Preferences Dialog Devices Page Sound Preferences Sounds System Beep Sound Events Sound playback Autodetect Test Music and Movies Sound playback Autodetect G Test Audio Conferencing Sound playback Autodetect e ff Test Sound capture ALSA Ad
358. volution you can accomplish your most common daily tasks quickly For example it takes only one or two clicks to enter appointment or contact information sent to you by e mail or to send e mail to a contact or appointment People who get lots of e mail will appreciate advanced features like search folders which let you save searches as though they were ordinary e mail folders This section introduces you to Evolution and helps you get started using it For complete information refer to the Evolution documentation Section 4 1 Starting Evolution for the First Time on page 139 Section 4 2 Using Evolution An Overview on page 146 4 1 Starting Evolution for the First Time Start the Evolution client by clicking Computer gt Evolution or by typing evolution ina terminal window 4 1 1 Using the Setup Assistant The first time you run Evolution it creates a directory called evolution in your home directory where it stores all of its local data Then it opens a Setup Assistant to help you set up e mail accounts and import data from other applications Using the Setup Assistant takes two to five minutes Later on if you want to change this account or if you want to create a new one click Edit gt Preferences then click Mail Accounts Select the account you want to change then click Edit Alternately add a new account by clicking Add The Setup Assistant helps you provide the information Evolution needs to get started
359. whether it is SMB browsing for Windows shares or SLP browsing for remote services relies heavily on the machine s ability to send broadcast messages to all clients in the network These messages and the clients replies to them enable your machine to detect any available shares or services For broadcasts to work effectively your machine must be part of the same subnet as all other machines it is querying If network browsing does not work on your machine or the detected shares and services do not match what you expected contact your system administrator to make sure that you are connected to the appropriate subnet To allow network browsing your machine needs to keep several network ports open to send and receive network messages that provide details on the network and the availability of shares and services The standard openSUSE is configured for tight security and has a firewall up and running that protects your machine against the Internet To adjust the firewall configuration you either need to ask your system administrator to open a certain set of ports to the network or to tear down the firewall entirely according to your company s security policy If you try to browse a network with a restrictive firewall running on your machine Nautilus warns you about your security restrictions not allowing it to query the network Accessing Network Resources 169 8 2 Accessing Network Shares Networking workstations can be set up to share folders Typi
360. window click Format gt Styles and Formatting OpenOffice org comes with several predefined styles You can use these styles as they are modify them or create new styles TIP By default the Styles and Formatting window is a floating window that is it opens in its own window that you can place anywhere on the screen If you use styles extensively you might find it helpful to dock the window so that it is always present in the same part of the Writer interface To dock the Styles and Formatting window press Control while you double click a gray area in the window This tip applies to some other windows in OpenOffice org as well including the Navigator Applying a Style To apply a style select the element you want to apply the style to and then double click the style in the Styles and Formatting window For example to apply a style to a paragraph place the cursor anywhere in that paragraph and double click the desired paragraph style The OpenOffice org Office Suite 127 Using Styles Versus Using Formatting Buttons and Menu Options Using styles rather than the Format menu options and buttons helps give your pages paragraphs texts and lists a more consistent look and makes it easier to change your formatting For example if you emphasize text by selecting it and clicking the Bo d button then later decide you want emphasized text to be italicized you need to find all of your bolded text and manually change it to italics If yo
361. xt to highlight the next match and place the cursor there Click Previous to move to the previous match Use the Case sensitive check box to limit the matches to ones that exactly match the case ofthe search string To close the Find bar click X on the far left or press the Escape key 11 5 1 Using Bulleted Lists Beginning a Bulleted List on page 196 Ending a Bulleted List on page 196 Increasing Indentation on page 196 Decreasing Indentation on page 196 Taking Notes with Tomboy 195 Beginning a Bulleted List To begin a bulleted list use any of the following methods Select Bullets from the Text drop down menu Start a line of text with a single dash character type text immediately following the dash then press Enter Ending a Bulleted List To end a bulleted list do any of the following Select Bullets from the Text drop down menu Press Enter on a blank bulleted line Select Decrease Indent from the Text drop down menu until the current line is no longer part of the bulleted list Press Shift Tab until the current line is no longer part of the bulleted list Increasing Indentation To increase the line indentation in a bulleted list select Increase Indent from the Text drop down menu or press the Tab key Decreasing Indentation To decrease the line indentation in a bulleted list select Decrease Indent from the Text drop down menu or press Shift Tab 11 6 Exporting Notes t
362. y s name in the Buddy List then click Remove 6 4 Chatting To open a chat session double click a buddy name in the Buddy List The Chat screen opens Type your message then press Enter to send it Each chat session you open appears as a tab in the Chat screen Click a buddy s tab to chat with that buddy Close a chat session by closing the tab for that buddy Instant Messaging with Pidgin 161 Figure 6 2 Pidgin Chat Session Montverio Conversation Options Send To Q Montverio 9 montverio 162 openSUSE 10 3 GNOME User Guide Using Voice Over IP with Ekiga Modern telecommunication means far more than just making a phone call It is also about exchanging text messages and sometimes even video conferencing Roaming enables you to be reachable under one phone number all across the world Ekiga brings these features to your Linux desktop allowing you to communicate over broadband Internet Section 7 1 Requirements on page 163 Section 7 2 Configuring Ekiga on page 163 Section 7 3 The Ekiga User Interface on page 164 Section 7 4 Making a Call on page 165 Section 7 5 Answering a Call on page 166 Section 7 6 Using the Address Book on page 166 Section 7 7 For More Information on page 168 7 1 Requirements Before you start make sure the following requirements are met Q Your sound card is properly configured L A headset or a microphone and speakers are attac
363. y When your sound card has been configured you can control the volume and balance of the sound with the GNOME Volume Control mixer If the mixer icon a loudspeaker symbol is not visible in the panel on your desktop press Alt F2 and enter gnome volume control or click Computer gt More Applications gt Multimedia gt Volume Control Getting Started with the GNOME Desktop 51 52 Figure 1 28 GNOME Volume Control Dialog Box Volume Control Intel ICH6 Alsa mixer Eile Edit Help Playback 4 J3 Us 8 2 Master Headphone PCM Line in CD Microphone II 1l I Ha gd dd ERE HH dM Od ul d 9 eS a E The GNOME Volume Control dialog box contains the following elements Menubar The items on the menu bar contain all of the commands that you need to work with the GNOME Volume Control Display area The display area contains the channel faders and associated options for several mixers which enable you to control the volume on those mixers NOTE GNOME Volume Control populates the display area dynamically based on the functionality supported by your sound card The mixers displayed in your GNOME Volume Control window might be different than those shown in Figure 1 28 on page 52 To increase the volume slide the fader up To decrease the volume slide the fader down To lock the left and right mixer channels together select the Lock option for that mixer When you lock the mixer channels GNOME Volume Co
364. y useful for extending the life of a laptop s battery charge However several options also help to save electricity when you are using a computer that is plugged in to an electricity source Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Power Management Specifying Sleep Mode Times on page 104 Setting General Power Options on page 105 Specifying Sleep Mode Times Sleep mode shuts down the computer when it is unused for a specified amount of time Whether you are using battery or AC power you can specify the amount of time that the computer remains unused before it is put to sleep You can also put the computer s display to sleep without shutting down the computer saving the power required by the display Sleep mode is especially important when the computer is operating under battery power Both the screen and the computer draw power from the battery so you can save a significant amount of battery power by shutting down one or both It is common to put the display to sleep after a shorter period of time Then if the computer remains unused for an additional amount of time it is also put to sleep To specify your computer s sleep settings 1 Click Computer gt Control Center gt System gt Power Management 2 Click the tab for the type of power you are using If your computer uses AC power click On AC Power If your computer runs on battery power click On Battery Power If your computer operates on both AC and batt
365. you play a song To enable this feature click Edit gt Plugins then select Metadata Searcher 17 2 2 Playing Your Music To play a song simply double click the song in the library Use the buttons on the upper left corner 19 00 53 to pause a song or play the next or previous song Use to adjust the volume You can also use the items on the Playback menu to repeat or shuffle songs Banshee also has an integrated CD player When you insert a music CD your CD title appears in the left panel Select the title then click the P ay button to play your full CD Notification Area Icon on page 249 Mini Mode on page 250 Music Recommendations on page 250 Notification Area Icon You can keep Banshee hidden in the notification area when you re not interacting with it by minimizing the Banshee window You see a pop up identifying the current song when a track changes If you don t want to see the pop ups click Edit gt Plugins gt Notification Area Icon gt Configuration then deselect Show notifications when song changes Playing and Managing Your Music with Banshee 249 Figure 17 3 Banshee Notification Area Pop up ry Now Playing Ponchieli Dance ot the Hours Various M Computer S openSUSE org Mo user123 File Brows _ The GMP Ponchieti Dance of T By G Mon Sep 10 1256 PM E Mini Mode You can also use the Mini Mode feature to condense the interface and free up valuable desktop space Y
366. ys that the Document is released under this License If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed as Front Cover Texts or Back Cover Texts in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License A Front Cover Text may be at most 5 words and a Back Cover Text may be at most 25 words A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine readable copy represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or for images composed of pixels generic paint programs or for drawings some widely available drawing editor and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup or absence of markup has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup
367. zilla 1 x and Opera To import your settings click File gt Import Select the browser from which to import settings After you click Next your settings are imported Find your imported bookmarks in a newly created folder beginning with From 12 3 3 Live Bookmarks Live bookmarks display headlines in your bookmark menu and keep you up to date with the latest news This enables you to save time with one glance at your favorite sites Many sites and blogs support this format A Web site indicates it by showing an orange icon in the right part of the location bar Click it and choose Subscribe to NAME OF THE FEED Click Subscribe now in the page that opens A dialog box opens in which to select the name and location of your live bookmark Confirm with Add Some sites do not tell Firefox that they support a news feed although they actually do To add a live bookmark manually you need the URL of the feed Do the following 1 Open the bookmark manager with Bookmarks gt Organize Bookmarks A new window opens 2 Select File gt New Live Bookmark A dialog box opens 3 Insert a name for the live bookmark and add your URL in the Feed Location for example http www novell com newsfeeds rss coolsolutions xml http www novell com newsfeeds rss coolsolutions xml Firefox updates your live bookmarks 4 Close your bookmark manager 12 4 Using the Download Manager With the help of the download manager you can keep track of your current a

openSUSE 10.3 GNOME User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents